DX-S Manual

HEALTHCARE
ReadMeFirst
Service Manual for Download
Imaging Services
Purpose of this Document

This document describes how to
add the order list for documentation.
print.
add comments.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2
06-2008
Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a

printed manual. See section 1.
Edition 1, Revision 2
06-2008 printed in Germany
Agfa Company Confidential
Document Node ID: 16099429
Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
ReadMeFirst
Integrating the Order List for Documentation

IMPORTANT:
The order list for documentation is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the order list for documentation:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select Order list and Front page PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation.
(3) Download the order list for documentation to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if
available.
Some pages especially circuit diagrams for equipment have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
06-2008
Page 2 of 5
ReadMeFirst
2.1
Printing single Pages or Chapters

To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:
(1)
Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2)
Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

(3)
Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.
(4)
Select "Print".
(5)
Select the page range.
(6)
Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7)
Select OK.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

06-2008
Page 3 of 5
ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
Shrink to printable area may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
reduce to printer margins or shrink oversized pages to paper size.
2.2
Printing the complete Service Manual

To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:
(1)
Select "Print".
(2)
Select All.
(3)
Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"

(see NOTE above).
(4)
Select OK.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
Adding Comments
If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

06-2008
Page 4 of 5
ReadMeFirst
3.1
Exporting your Comments

NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1)
In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup
3.2
(2)
Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3)
Select Options - Export Selected Comments.
(4)
Save the file with any name.
Importing Comments
(1)
In the drop down menu Comment & Markup select "Show comments List".
(2)
Select Options - Import Comments.
(3)
Browse for the comments file and press select.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.

06-2008
Page 5 of 5
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.
Technical
Documentation
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Order-No.: DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S
Type 5160
2nd Edition
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.


eq_00_about manual_e_template_v01
Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
Manufacturer
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH - Global Services Organisation
Tegernseer Landstr. 161
D-81539 Mnchen
Germany
Contact
To order spare parts and
spare part assortments:
Tel.:
+49 - (0)89 - 6207 3760
Fax.:
+49 - (0)89 - 6207 7388
To order documentation:
Tel.:
+49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553
Fax.:
+49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7271
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
1. Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO -> General Info -> Agfa HealthCare ->
Publications -> Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation,
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety
Directions" and on the product.
Chapter 0 / II
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
Chapter Overview
Chapter
Order List
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Functional Description
Repair and Service
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

Machine specific Tools, Software Tools and Auxiliary Equipment
Troubleshooting
Electrical and Mechanical Codes, Fuses, LEDs
Replacement of Parts
Adjustments and Calibrations
Software Menus and Setting
Software Releases, Patches
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
Reference and Circuit Diagrams
Spare Parts List
Accessories
Field Modifications
Manufacturing Standard Modifications
Maintenance
10
Service Bulletins
11
Installation Planning
12
Glossary and Keyword Index
12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 0 / III
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
Explanation of notes
This documentation uses:
Safety relevant notes
Icon
Signal Word
Situation
CAUTION:
Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any other
equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can be the
consequence.
WARNING:
Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,

patient or any other person and possible mistreatment of patients can
be the consequence.
DANGER:
Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the

consequence.
Not-safety relevant notes

Icon
Name
Type of Information
INSTRUCTION:
Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the

described actions.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to

prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

having a direct influence on the step or action.
Highlights unusual points
Indicates background information
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the graphical user
interface.
Conventions
Actions
Way of writing
Sample
Action,
explanation
Switch the machine on
Switch the machine on
Action with the mouse or the

"Return" key
<omni-cd.exe>
Double-click the
<omni-cd.exe> icon
Required text input via the

keyboard
vips
Enter vips and click on

<Continue>
Chapter 0 / IV
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
DX-S Service Documentation

2nd Edition
(DD+DIS014.05E)
Information for the Field Service Engineer:
Reason for the 2nd Edition:

The 2nd Edition of the DX-S Service Documentation has been released due to
the Mandatory Upgrade of DX-S software version STR_1306 along with the
upgrade of the Processing Station from CR QS 3.0 to NX 1.0.
Since the DX-S software STR_1305 or higher cannot run with CR QS 3.0 this
Mandatory Upgrade became necessary.
Features of the NX Processing Station

NX, derived from New eXperience is a total new concept as NX is a
standalone Computed Radiography Processing Station meaning that it
operates completely on its own on one single PC following functions:
Acquiring images from the Digitizer

Processing images
Displaying images
Distributing released images
Agfa CR
Digitizer(s)
NX
INPUT
(ID/QC)
12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
OUTPUT
Softcopy/Hardcopy
images
ready for diagnosis
Chapter 0 / V
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
Whats new in the 2nd Edition of the

DX-S Service Documentation?
Apart from layout modifications following changes have been applied to the
contents of the DX-S Service Documentation:
Chapter 1 - Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures:

Generic Safety Notes have been removed and are from now on available
in the Generic Safety Directions document and in Chapter 3.1 of the
DX-S Service Documentation.
Preparations for the Installation have been adapted to NX 1.0
The configuration of Site-Specific Data and the Installation Steps in
Case of Software Mismatch has been adapted to the latest Digitizer
Software.
Chapter 2 Functional Description:
CR Components, Workflow of the CR System and Software Architecture
have been updated.
Chapter 3.1 Safety Guidelines and General Repair Instructions:
This chapter has been completely restructured.
From now on all product specific safety notes of the
DX-S Service Documentation are available in this Chapter.
Added new type label for the DX-S
Chapter 3.2 Tools and Auxiliary Means:
Sections regarding the Service Tools have been updated to the
NX Service Tool.
Chapter 3.3 Troubleshooting:
The Exchange of a defective ID-chip has been updated.
Chapter 3.5 Replacements and Repair Procedures:
Sections Replacements at the Mounting Rack and Removal of the
complete Cassette Handling Unit have been updated.
The replacement of the Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box has
been updated
Chapter 3.8 Software Releases and Patches:
Release Info for STR_1305 has been updated.
Chapter 0 / VI
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
Chapter 3.9 FAQ Frequently Asked Questions:

Contents regarding the CR QS have been removed and have been
adapted to the NX Processing Station.
Chapter 4.0 Reference and Circuit Diagrams:
Diagram Rear View of the IP Handling Unit has been updated.

Attached Circuit Diagrams have been updated
Chapter 6.0 Accessories:

Service Documentation for the DX-S All in One :
Generic Safety Directions of this document are from now on available in
the Generic Safety Directions Document and in Chapter 3.1 of the
Chapter 8 Manufacturing Standard Modifications:
This chapter has been restructured completely and following contents have
been added:
Introduction of digitizer software STR_1306
Introduction of digitizer software STR_1305
Introduction of an improved erasure unit
Introduction of a new power unit
Chapter 9 Maintenance:
Image Plate Maintenance has been updated.
Chapter 11 Installation Planning:
Required free space for DX-S Standalone has been added.
Chapter 12 Glossary and Key Word Index:
Entry CR QS 3.0 has been updated.
Entries NX and AutoQC2 have been added.
12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 0 / VII
DD+DIS014.05E
About this Manual
DX-S Service Documentation

1st edition
(DD+DIS014.05E)
Information for the Field Service Engineer
The DX-S is Agfas new digitizer in the CR product family.
Main Product Features
The main difference between the DX-S and conventional CR digitizers is a
new scanning principle.
The scanning technology of DX-S works according to the scanning principle
line at a time instead of point at a time.
This line at a time scanning is put into practice with the new scan unit, the so
called
scan head, which provides:
o a linear, laser-diode based stimulation source,
o a light collection/detection system with specially designed optics and
multiple, linear, asymmetric CCDs.
Compared to flying spot systems, the scan process is executed at a stationary
fixed image plate. The material of the image plates has also been changed. It
is now built of needles instead of grains and is now called Needle IP (NIP).
All this results in a better image quality and an increased throughput of the
digitizer.
Chapter 0 / VIII
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
HEALTHCARE
Generic Safety Directions
Imaging Services
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E

for HealthCare Imaging Products

This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3
07-2009
Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the

corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
Referenced Documents
Document
Title
Not applicable
Not applicable


eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
DD+DIS238.06E
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstrae 161
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)
Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document

(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
(2)
Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

07-2009
Page 2 of 28
Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products
DD+DIS238.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1
CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2
System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10
CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11
ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12
COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14
RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16
GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

07-2009
Page 3 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
21
SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22
SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23
SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24
RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25
WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26
ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

07-2009
Page 4 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified
personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with
respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you dont
operate the product correctly or if you dont have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

07-2009
Page 5 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Used Icons
Icon
Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

07-2009
Page 6 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Labels
3.1
CE Mark
CE Mark
3.2
This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)

becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface
Obstacles
Laser Beam
Corrosive Liquid
Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
High Voltage
Hand Injuries
C&W_005.cdr

07-2009
Page 7 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
3.3
System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class #
Meaning
Class 1:
Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects,
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M:
Class 2:
Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or
binocular) are used.
Can nevertheless produce irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Dangerous to the human eye for
intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury.
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating
conditions.
Example Label
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

07-2009
Page 8 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Class #
Meaning
Class 2M:
Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of
optical instruments. Can produce
dazzling and irritating effects even for
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds,
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R:
Example Label
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
conditions.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B:
Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4:
Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION

07-2009
Page 9 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

07-2009
Page 10 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic XRay
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks

This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

07-2009
Page 11 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions

Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

07-2009
Page 12 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
10
Connections to other Equipment

Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.

Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

07-2009
Page 13 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
11
Accessories and Spare Parts

Parts and accessories replacement:
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
12
Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:
Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

07-2009
Page 14 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products

IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices Application of risk management to medical devices
IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME
SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

07-2009
Page 15 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

07-2009
Page 16 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
13
Safety Directions for Operation

Accessibility of the mains power switch:
CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
Ventilation openings must not be covered.
If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

07-2009
Page 17 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14
Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15
Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

07-2009
Page 18 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
16
General Safety Directions for Service Activities
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

07-2009
Page 19 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
17
Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities

Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:
Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

07-2009
Page 20 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:
CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

07-2009
Page 21 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
18
Safety Directions for Installation Activities
If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

07-2009
Page 22 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
19
Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments

a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

07-2009
Page 23 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.
Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
07-2009
Page 24 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
Do not look into the laser beam.
Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

07-2009
Page 25 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
Unplug before opening.
Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20
Safety Directions for remote Service Activities

Remote Service Activities:
Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

07-2009
Page 26 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
21
Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
22
In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
Safety Directions concerning Modifications

Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be
implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23
Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials

'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The Hazardous Material
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24
Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

07-2009
Page 27 of 28
DD+DIS238.06E
25
Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to
prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be
different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26
Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)

AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customers site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

07-2009
Page 28 of 28
Chapter 1
HEALTHCARE
Controls, Connections,
and Setup Procedures
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160
Purpose of this document

This document contains:
The installation of the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)

The installation of the DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
The installation of the DX-S System as separate components
(Digitizer without All in One cart, Type 5160/100)
NOTE:
For each installation a flowchart providing an overview of installation procedures
guides through the whole installation. Check which procedure applies to the present
situation and follow the instructions step by step. For details refer to section 2.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
compared to previous version 2.4
2.5
03-2010
Added section 1, Referenced Documents.

Added Limit Pattern CD in section 3.4.1.
Replaced DELL NX for DX-S with NX Workstation in
section 6.1.
Updated section 8.1, Checking the Technical Image
Quality of the System.
Document
Title
For a list of documents refer to section 1.


eq_01_setup_procedure_e_template_v07
DD+DIS014.05E
Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type Order List in the GSO library.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 2
DD+DIS014.05E
LIST OF CONTENTS
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS.................................................................................................6
FLOWCHART OF INSTALLATION ..........................................................................................7
2.1
Flowchart Installation of DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100) ...................................................8
2.2
Flowchart Installation of DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105) ..................................9
2.3
Flowchart Installation of DX-S System as separate Components .......................................10
PREPARING THE INSTALLATION........................................................................................11

3.1
Preparing the Installation ........................................................................................................11
3.2
Inspecting the Delivery............................................................................................................12
3.3
Unpacking the Components....................................................................................................13
3.4
Checking the Scope of Delivery..............................................................................................13
3.4.1
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S Digitizer (Type 5160/100) .....................................................14
3.4.2
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)...................................................15
3.4.3
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)..................................15
3.5
Controls, Connectors and User Interface of the Digitizer .......................................................16
3.5.1
Locations.................................................................................................................................16
3.5.2
Touch Screen..........................................................................................................................17
3.5.3
Status Indicator and Audio Signals.........................................................................................22
INSTALLING THE DX-S ALL IN ONE (TYPE 5163/100) .......................................................23

4.1
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S All in One System

(including Isolation Transformer) ............................................................................................23
4.2
Required Time & Tools ...........................................................................................................23
4.3
Installing Monitor and Keyboard .............................................................................................24
4.4
Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) .............................................................29
4.5
Connecting the Control PC .....................................................................................................30
4.6
Placing the Digitizer onto the All in One Cart (AIO) ................................................................32
4.7
Adjusting Height of Monitor and Keyboard .............................................................................34
4.8
Adjusting Monitor Inclination ...................................................................................................35
4.9
Preparing the Digitizer ............................................................................................................36
4.9.1
Removing the Shipping Brackets............................................................................................36

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 3
DD+DIS014.05E
4.9.2
Installing the Scan Head .........................................................................................................38
4.10
Installing the Digitizer..............................................................................................................45
4.11
Completing electrical Installation ............................................................................................48
INSTALLING DX-S CUT DOWN ALL IN ONE (TYPE 5163/105)...........................................50

5.1

5.2
5.3
Installing and connecting Cables ............................................................................................51
5.4
Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) .............................................................53
5.5
5.6
Placing the Digitizer onto the Cut Down All in One Cart.........................................................56
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.8
Installing the Digitizer..............................................................................................................66
5.9
Completing electrical Installation ............................................................................................68
INSTALLING THE DX-S SYSTEM AS SEPARATE COMPONENTS ....................................71

6.1
Mandatory and optional Components.....................................................................................71
6.2
Overview possible Configurations of the DX-S System as separate Components ................72
6.3
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S Digitizer (without Isolation Transformer) ...............73
6.4
Installation within Patient Environment ...................................................................................73
6.5
6.6
Unpacking and placing the Components ................................................................................76
6.7
Installing and connecting Mouse, Monitor and Keyboard.......................................................76
6.8
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2
6.10
Connecting the Digitizer..........................................................................................................78
6.11
Connecting Mains Cables of Components .............................................................................80

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 4
DD+DIS014.05E
6.11.1
Configuration 1: Connecting Digitizer, Isolation Transformer and UPS..................................81
6.11.2
Configuration 2: Connecting Digitizer and Isolation Transformer (without UPS)....................83
6.11.3
Configuration 3: Connecting Digitizer (without UPS and without Isolation Transformer) .......85
PREPARING THE DIGITIZER BEFORE FIRST USE ............................................................86

7.1
Cleaning Image Plates............................................................................................................86
7.2
Configuring Site-Specific Data ................................................................................................87
7.3
Performing Scan Head Focus Calibration ..............................................................................91
7.4
Performing Scan Line Calibration ...........................................................................................93
7.5
Specific Cassette Positioning for Full Leg Full Spine Application...........................................94
CONCLUDING THE INSTALLATION.....................................................................................96

8.1
Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System ............................................................96
8.1.1
Exposing a Flatfield.................................................................................................................96
8.1.2
Importing the Limit Pattern (optional)......................................................................................97
8.1.3
Evaluating a Flatfield...............................................................................................................98
8.2
Performing Test Cycles.........................................................................................................103
8.3
Running Hand-Over Test (HOT) ...........................................................................................103
INSTALLATION STEPS IN CASE OF SOFTWARE MISMATCH ........................................104

9.1
Uninstalling the previous DX-S Software Version.................................................................104
9.2
Installing the DX-S Software on the Control PC ...................................................................105
9.3
Updating the Software on the Digitizer .................................................................................109
9.4
Restarting the System...........................................................................................................111
10
PREPARING THE DIGITIZER FOR THE USE ON SITES BETWEEN 2000

AND 3000 M ABOVE SEA LEVEL .......................................................................................112
11
CHECKLIST FOR INSTALLATION AND START-UP...........................................................115

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 5
DD+DIS014.05E
The following documents are referenced in this chapter.
Document
Hyperlink
DX-S Service Manual, Chapter 5, Spare Parts List

DX-S Cut Down All in One
Intranet Link / Extranet Link
DX-S Service Manual, Chapter 9, Maintenance
DX-S Service Manual, Chapter 11, Installation

Planning
NX 1.0 Service Manual, Chapter 5, Installation and

Configuration
NX 2.0 Service Manual, Chapter 5, Installation and

Configuration
NX 2008 Service Manual, Chapter 4, Installation and

Configuration
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 Service Manual, Chapter 4,

Installation and Configuration
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 Service Manual, Chapter 4,

Installation and Configuration
DX-S Service Bulletin No. 26, DD+DIS215.07E.

Modified Pump Unit released for Use on Sites
between 2000 and 3000 m above Sea Level.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 6
DD+DIS014.05E
Flowchart of Installation
Depending on the order of the customer the following three installation scenarios
are possible:
The installation of the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
The installation of the DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
The installation of the DX-S System as separate components

(Digitizer without All in One cart)
For each scenario a flowchart providing an overview of installation procedures

guides through the whole installation.
The flowcharts can be found on the following three pages.
Check which procedure applies to the present situation and follow the instructions
step by step.
NOTE:
The Installation Checklist at the end of this chapter gives an overview of all steps and
guides throughout the complete installation process.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 7
DD+DIS014.05E
2.1
Flowchart Installation of DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 4.5 hours for a complete installation
Preparing the Installation, Tasks
Section
Preparing the Installation
3.1
Inspecting the Delivery
3.2
Unpacking the Components
3.3
Checking the Scope of Delivery
3.4
Installing the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100), Tasks
Section
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S All in One System (including Isolation
Transformer)
4.1
Required Time & Tools
4.2
Installing Monitor and Keyboard
4.3
Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
4.4
Connecting the Control PC
4.5
Placing the Digitizer onto the All in One Cart
4.6
Adjusting Height of Monitor and Keyboard
4.7
Adjusting Monitor Inclination
4.8
Preparing the Digitizer
4.9
Installing the Digitizer
4.10
Completing electrical Installation
4.11
Preparing the Digitizer before first Use, Tasks
Section
Cleaning Image Plates
7.1
7.2
Performing Scan Head Focus Calibration
7.3
Performing Scan Line Calibration
7.4
Concluding the Installation, Tasks
Section
Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System
8.1
Performing Test Cycles
8.2
Running Hand-Over Test (HOT)
8.3

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 8
DD+DIS014.05E
2.2
Flowchart Installation of DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)

REQUIRED TIME:
Section
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Installing DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105), Tasks
Section

(including Isolation Transformer)
5.1
5.2
Installing and connecting Cables
5.3
5.4
5.5
Placing the Digitizer onto the Cut Down All in One Cart
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
Section
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Section
8.1
8.2
8.3

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 9
DD+DIS014.05E
2.3
Flowchart Installation of DX-S System as separate Components

REQUIRED TIME:
The required time depends in this case on the customers individual order of
components and the requirements at the installation site.
Section
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Installing the DX-S System as separate Components, Tasks
Section
Mandatory and optional Components
6.1
Overview possible Configurations of the DX-S System as separate Components
6.2
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S Digitizer (without Isolation Transformer)
6.3
Installation within Patient Environment
6.4
6.5
Unpacking and placing the Components
6.6
Installing and connecting Mouse, Monitor and Keyboard
6.7
6.8
6.9
Connecting the Digitizer
6.10
Connecting Mains Cables of Components
6.11
Configuration 1: Connecting Digitizer, Isolation Transformer and UPS
6.11.1
Configuration 2: Connecting Digitizer and Isolation Transformer (without UPS)
6.11.2
Configuration 3: Connecting Digitizer (without UPS and without Isolation

Transformer)
6.11.3
Section
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Section
8.1
8.2
8.3

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 10
DD+DIS014.05E
3.1

Before visiting the Installation Site
Ensure that the Installation planning (see Chapter 11) is concluded.
Ensure to have the current DX-S software (Check in MedNet GSO Library,
Path: Computed Radiography CR Digitizers
DX-S
Freeware).
At Installation Site
The devices must be delivered and unpacked (see sections 3.2 3.4).
The current DX-S software must be installed on the Control PC.
NOTE:
The operation of DX-S without connection to a Control PC with installed
DX-S software is not possible.
NOTE:
For the customization of a staged Control PC, including its configuration for the DX-S,
please refer to the Chapter Installation and Configuration of the relevant Service
Documentation:
NX 1.0, Chapter 5
NX 2.0, Chapter 5
NX 2008, Chapter 4
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000, Chapter 4
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200, Chapter 4
For details refer to section 1.

Only a technician, who is trained on the Processing Station software, can accomplish
the DX-S installation.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 11
DD+DIS014.05E
3.2

Normally the carrier takes the following actions upon delivery of the system
components.
(1)
Check completeness of the shipment by means of the bill of material

(number of pallets).
(2)
Compare the labels on the boxes with the customer's order list and the
shipping papers.
(3)
Check the packing material for visible transport damage such as

a. Dented edges
b. Damage on the box
c. Torn fixing elements (metal straps, screws).
NOTE:
If damage is visible from the outside, contact the local AGFA representative.
(4)
Check the attached safety indicators on the packing boxes, if present.
Figure 1
If the machine was tilted, the circle in the arrow head

of the TILTWATCH changes from white to red.
If the machine was subjected to shocks, the square field

in the middle of the SHOCKWATCH changes from white to red.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 12
DD+DIS014.05E
3.3

Normally the carrier takes the following actions upon delivery of the
system components.
(1)
Remove the outer packing material.
(2)
Take out the boxes and store them in a safe place.
(3)
Take the DX-S off the pallet and transport it to the installation site.
(4)
Dispose of the packing material.
NOTE:
For lifting the DX-S All in One System off the pallet and unpacking,
an area of minimal 200 x 450 cm (79 x 178) is required.
If the available space at the installation site is limited,
the devices can be unpacked beforehand and rolled to the installation site.
3.4

At the customer's site, the FSE (Field Service Engineer) has to check the scope of
delivery.
Compare the inventory of every component with the packing list that specifies the
complete scope of delivery.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 13
DD+DIS014.05E
3.4.1
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S Digitizer (Type 5160/100)
Pieces
Description
Digitizer, without scan head
Scan head, separately in a box
Installation procedure
Certificates
Installation Report
FireWire cable (IEEE 1394), 4.5 m (not used in All in One)
Mains cables (not used in All in One)
CD with Digitizer software
CD with the user manual
Limit Pattern CD
NOTE:
Depending on the customer selection, additionally components can be ordered for the
DX-S system configuration as separate components.
For an overview of available components, refer to chapter 11, Installation Planning of
the DX-S Service Documentation. See section 1.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 14
DD+DIS014.05E
3.4.2
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
Pieces
3.4.3
Description
PC with keyboard, mouse, and documentation, NX software installed
LCD flat Monitor
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
Cassettes 24 x 30 cm
Network cable
All in One cart (Type 5163/100)
Service bridge / ramp
Isolation transformer
Accessories box with two mains cables and technical documentation
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
Pieces
Description
PC with keyboard, mouse, and documentation, NX software installed
LCD flat Monitor
Network cable
Cut Down All in One cart (Type 5163/105)
Accessories box with two mains cables and technical documentation,

additionally extension cables for keyboard, mouse and monitor (2 pieces)

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 15
DD+DIS014.05E
3.5
Controls, Connectors and User Interface of the Digitizer
3.5.1
Locations
Front View
Touch screen
Status indicator
Line switch
Figure 2
Rear View
Figure 3

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 16
DD+DIS014.05E
3.5.2
Touch Screen
General Definition of the Touch Screen Pictographs:
Depending on the operational mode of the Digitizer, the touch screen display shows the
following pictographs. The size of the pictographs covers the entire active display area.
Following displays are also used as entry keys. The size, positioning and meaning of
the keys will be explained by the shown pictograph:
Message
Pictograph on Touch Screen
Standard screen
Emergency Screen
with Cancel Option
Description
This screen is shown

when the Digitizer is in
standby mode.
Press the upper left key

to activate the Emergency
mode.
This will allocate default
demographic data to the
next processed image.
Press the lower right key

to access the More
Functions screens.
This pictograph shows

that the Emergency mode
is active:
While active, an inserted
cassette will be handled
as Emergency cassette.
Exposure class will be set
according to the settings
in the NX Configuration
Tool.
Press Cancel key <x> to

quit the screen and to
return to Standard
screen.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 17
DD+DIS014.05E
Message
More Functions:
Erase
Erase Screen with

Cancel Option
More Functions:
Display
Description
Press this key to start the

erase function.
Press arrow key to scroll

through other More
Functions.
Press Cancel key <x>

to quit the screen and
to return to Standard
screen.
This pictograph shows

that the erase function
was selected and the
Digitizer is waiting for a
cassette.

screen.
Upper line:
press <> or <+>
to change the display
contrast.
Lower line:
press <> or <+>
to change the display
brightness.
Press arrow key

to access the other More
Functions screens.

screen.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 18
DD+DIS014.05E
Message
More Functions:
Audio
Description
Press the audio keys

to enable or disable audio
signals.
Press arrow key

to access the other More
Functions screens.

screen.
The More Functions screens have a timeout. If the user does not press any key within
1 minute, the Digitizer returns to the Standard screen.
The touch screen can display the following information pictographs during
normal operation:
Message
Description
Warm up
Digitizer runs self-test.
Busy
Cassette is detected and IP is

being scanned, erased and
returned into the cassette.
The bar graph indicates the
progress of the process in
several steps.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 19
DD+DIS014.05E
Message
Description
Cassette is unlocked and can
be removed.
Eject
The touch screen can display the following information pictographs for error
conditions without consultation of the Control PC:
Message
Description
Connection between Digitizer
and processing software is
interrupted.
Interrupt
Code XXXXXXXXXX
The Control PC is running and
FireWire connection is
detected, but the Processing
Station software is not
running.
Processing
Software down

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 20
DD+DIS014.05E
The touch screen can display the following information pictographs

with consultation of the Control PC:
Message
Description
Check PC for status message
and detailed instructions.
Check
PC Message
Pictograph indicates an error

condition.
The device is in service mode.
Service
The service mode can only be

initiated from the Control PC.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 21
DD+DIS014.05E
3.5.3
Status Indicator and Audio Signals

Status Indicator
Lights are visible on the top of the Digitizer to display its status.
Constant /
Flashing
Color
Green
Red
Status
Action
Constant
Standby mode, Device is

ready.
Proceed.
Flashing
Busy with scanning,

erasing and returning
IP into cassette
Wait.
Cassette is ready for

removal.
Remove cassette.
Warm up / Self-test
Service mode
Processing software
down
Check Control PC for

further information and
detailed instructions.
Error
Flashing
Audio signals
A short beep means that the Digitizer has accepted the key command and is
starting the operation.
An interval beep accompanies an error message. This signal stops when the user
presses any pictograph on the touch screen display.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 22
DD+DIS014.05E
Installing the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
4.1
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S All in One System (including
Isolation Transformer)
The DX-S All in One Systems are already provided with an isolation transformer.
According to IEC 60601-1-1 the system can also be used within patient environment.
Figure 4
4.2

REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 4.5 hours
This time span includes:
Function
Description
Duration / h
Physical installation of
DX-S All in One cart
Unpacking, removal of the transport locks,

positioning, connection to power
0.5
Digitizer

positioning, connection to power and
processing station; scan head installation,
possibly software update, calibration
2.0
the Control PC
Unpacking, mechanical installation to the

All in One cart, cable connections
1.0
UPS
Unpacking, cable connections; switching

on
0.5
Basic image quality test Exposure and evaluation of a flatfield
0.5

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 23
DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
If the machine was exposed to extreme temperature or humidity conditions during
transport then it needs at least one day to acclimatize at the installation location prior
to installation.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
4.3
Phillips screwdriver
Screwdriver
Socket wrench 7 mm
Socket wrench 10 mm
Allen key 8 mm
Allen key 3 mm
Allen key 2.5 mm
Cutter
Installing Monitor and Keyboard

CAUTION:
Sharp edges on the All in One cart may cause cut injuries!
Heavy components may cause crush injuries!
Always work with hand and foot protection!
(1)
Activate rear wheel brakes of All in One

cart.
(2)
At front side, unscrew two screws (A) with

Phillips screwdriver and remove the cover
plate.
Figure 5

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 24
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Unscrew five screws with

Phillips screwdriver and remove the
perforated rear plate.
Figure 6
(4)
Unscrew four screws (A) on the

horizontal cover with Phillips screwdriver.
(5)
Remove the horizontal cover
Figure 7
(6)
Unscrew four screws (A) on the

vertical cover with Phillips screwdriver.
(7)
Remove the vertical cover
Figure 8
(8)
Unpack the Control PC keyboard and

mouse.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 25
DD+DIS014.05E
(9)
Loop the keyboard cable through the

appropriate hole in the keyboard hutch.
Figure 9
(10) Put the keyboard into its predefined

position.
Figure 10
(11) Put the mouse pad into its predefined

position and place the mouse on it.
Figure 11
(12) Loop the mouse cable below the monitor

bracket.
Figure 12

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 26
DD+DIS014.05E
(13) Unpack the monitor and fix it to the monitor

rack with four Philips screws.
Mind that the image beside is an example:
Installation of other monitors, e.g. with
adapter plates, may look different.
Figure 13
(14) Plug the DVI-connector and

POWER-connector into the
corresponding sockets of the monitor.
(15) Loop both connector cables below the
monitor bracket.
Figure 14
(16) Pull the keyboard, mouse and monitor

connectors through the channel.
Figure 15

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 27
DD+DIS014.05E
(17) Loop the connector cables through the

cable clamp (A) to ensure strain relief.
Screw them tightly to prevent them from
coming loose (socket wrench 7 mm).
NOTE:
Ensure that the mouse has enough space to
operate.
Figure 16
(18) Loop the connector cables through the

hole at the vertical channel.
Figure 17
(19) Put the connector cables through the

rectangular cutout to allow them in place
for connection to Control PC and UPS.
Figure 18
(20) Loop three connector cables through the

cable clamp (A) to prevent them from
coming loose, and close it.
Figure 19
Result
Monitor and keyboard are installed.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 28
DD+DIS014.05E
4.4

CAUTION:
The UPS is damaged by inappropriate input voltage!
Install only the 230 V version of the UPS!
CAUTION:
Heavy UPS may cause crush injuries when falling down.
Lift UPS always carefully.
Do not slide the UPS over cables.
(1)
Unpack the UPS.
(2)
Slide the UPS into the upper rack of the

All in One cabinet.
Figure 20
(3)
Connect the UPS to one of the

isolation transformer sockets.
Figure 21

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 29
DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Attach the serial connector to the COM

port at rear side of the UPS.
(5)
Thread the UPS serial connector cable

alongside the isolation transformer and
pull it down through the rectangular
cut-out beside the transformer.
Figure 22
(6)
Loop the serial connector cable through the

cable clamp (A) to prevent it from coming
loose.
Figure 23
Result
4.5
The UPS is connected.

(1)
Unpack the Control PC.
(2)
Slide the Control PC into the lower rack of

the All in One cabinet.
Figure 24

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 30
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Push the Control PC from behind until it

hits the bracket (A).
(4)
Plug the mains connector into its

receptacle at the rear side of the
Control PC.
Figure 25
NOTE:
Observe correct plug-in directions!
(5)
Plug in the UPS serial connector (A).
(6)
Plug in the keyboard connector (B).
(7)
Plug in the mouse connector (C).
(8)
Plug in the FireWire connector (D).
(9)
Plug in the network cable

(E, RJ45-connector).
(10) Plug the monitor connector into the

corresponding socket of the Control
PC (F).
Figure 26
Result
The Control PC is connected.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 31
DD+DIS014.05E
4.6
Placing the Digitizer onto the All in One Cart (AIO)

(1)
Make sure that rear wheel brakes of

the AIO are activated.
(2)
Loosen the screws

the AIO.
(3)
Push the plate to the

and remove it
left side
at the front of
.
Figure 27
(4)
Unscrew two screws from the rear

handle bar of the Digitizer and remove
handle bar.
(5)
Unscrew two screws (A) at service

bridge and remove support (B).
Now the service bridge can be used
as a ramp.
Figure 28
(6)
Hook the ramp onto the AIO.
(7)
Ensure cables in the AIO will

not impede installation of the Digitizer.
Figure 29

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 32
DD+DIS014.05E
(8)
Push the Digitizer up the ramp onto

the cart.
Figure 30
(9)
Re-fasten the support (B) to the ramp

with two screws (A). See Figure 28.
(10) Put the service bridge back in the lower

bracket of the AIO.
Result
The Digitizer is installed in the AIO.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 33
DD+DIS014.05E
4.7
Adjusting Height of Monitor and Keyboard

The monitor is placed at a height that should suit most customers.
Due to monitor weight, height adjustment is not recommended.
When a height adjustment is essential, please pay attention to the following notes.
CAUTION:
Device is heavy and may cause crush injuries. If it falls down, sensitive
components are damaged.
Height adjustment has to be carried out by at least two persons.
Take care that lengths of the used cables permit the desired
height adjustment.
Three positions are available for the height adjustment:
An upper position (plus 6 cm)
The central position (delivery condition; recommended to be used)
A lower position (minus 6 cm)
NOTE:
The Digitizer must be released and shifted onto the ramp / service bridge prior to
height adjustment. See section 4.6.
(1)
Unscrew two interior screws (A) which

are located on the left side next to
isolation transformer.
(2)
Release two nuts (B) and remove screws.
Figure 31

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 34
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Unscrew eight screws at left and right side

(figure shows left side) and remove them.
(4)
Adjust height and fasten the screws in

reverse order.
Figure 32
Result
4.8
The height of monitor and keyboard is adjusted.
Adjusting Monitor Inclination

Adjust the inclination of the monitor by using
the lever at the rear side:
(1)
Support the monitor by holding it at the

bottom side.
(2)
Loosen lever by turning counterclockwise.
(3)
Adjust the inclination.
(4)
Fix the lever by turning clockwise.
lever
free
lever
locked
loose
fixed
Figure 33
NOTE:
The lever is a quick-fix system: To change the fixed or loose position pull the lever.
There is no need to open the Allen screw at the axis for the adjustment of the monitor.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 35
DD+DIS014.05E
4.9
4.9.1
Removing the Shipping Brackets

NOTE:
Remove all cushioning parts and shipping brackets prior to first operation.
(1)
Remove top cover and left side panel.

The scan head carrier is fixed with
a plate (A) and two brackets (B).
Figure 34
CAUTION:
The vacuum seals at the IP platform can be damaged by the shipping brackets.
While removing the brackets, take care not to damage the vacuum seals.
(2)
Cut the cable tie at the left side of

the plate.
Figure 35

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 36
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Unscrew the four Allen screws fixing

the plate (see position of screws in
Figure 36, see the two screws at left
side in Figure 37).
Figure 36
Figure 37
(4)
Unscrew the screws fixing the plate to

the brackets, one at each side,
and the nuts at the bottom of the
bracket, two at each side (Figure 38 shows
the left hand scan head fixing bracket).
Figure 38
(5)
Result
Take out the plate and brackets carefully.
The shipping brackets are removed.

NOTE:
Do not discard the shipping brackets.
They will be needed whenever the Digitizer has to be transported and shock and
vibrations cannot be excluded.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 37
DD+DIS014.05E
4.9.2
Installing the Scan Head

To avoid transport damage, the scan head of the Digitizer is delivered in a separate
box and has to be installed in the Digitizer at the installation site.
CAUTION:
Scan Head is fragile: Risk of damage.
When installing the Scan Head care must be taken.
Wear a grounding strap, whenever you handle the scan head.
Touch the scan head only at the red handles of the installation bracket.
See circles in Figure 39.
(1)
Unpack the scan head from the box.
Figure 39

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 38
DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Completely open screws (A) and (C). They are secured against loss.
Loosen screw (B). Be careful as this screw is not secured against loss.
B
A
C
Figure 40

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 39
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Insert the scan head carefully in its bearings: First insert in bearing top left
(no mechanical fixation at top right), then swivel the lower part of the scan
towards the bottom bearings till the scan head has engaged
head
completely.
Figure 41

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 40
DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Slightly fasten Allen screws (2.5 mm) at the left and right side of the scan head
a little bit. Tension may occur.
Figure 42

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 41
DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Slightly fasten Allen screw (2.5 mm) at the upper left and right side of the
scan head. Tension may occur.
Fasten all three Allen screws more strongly in the same order as given
above.
Figure 43
(6)
Remove the installation bracket of the scan head by opening the screws
on the left and right by hand.
Figure 44

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 42
DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Perform the following steps:

Connect the cable leading to the scan head control board on lower side of
scan head (A).
and fix with metal clip
(B).
Insert mounting plate
Connect cables of laser diodes board and e-label (C).
Figure 45

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 43
DD+DIS014.05E
(8)
Fasten grounding connection at the left side of the scan head.
Figure 46
(9)
Result
Re-insert cover and left side panel of the Digitizer.
The scan head is installed.

CAUTION:
When transporting the scan head care must be taken.
Do not discard the transport box and the installation bracket of the scan head!
Remove the scan head whenever the Digitizer needs to be transported and shock and

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 44
DD+DIS014.05E
4.10

(1)
Plug the pre-cabled mains connector in the

Digitizer receptacle.
Figure 47
(2)
Unscrew three screws (see Figure 49, labeling B) of the cover of the Digitizer's
FireWire connector (socket wrench 7 mm).
(3)
Loop the FireWire cable through the cover

of the Digitizer's FireWire connector.
NOTE:
Observe correct plug-in direction.
See Figure 49, labeling A.
(4)
Attach the FireWire-connector to the

corresponding socket at the Digitizer.
(5)
Fasten the cover of the Digitizer's

FireWire connector with screws (B)
using an Allen key.
(6)
Fix FireWire cable with the clamp

below the cover (C) using a 7 mm
socket wrench.
Figure 48
Figure 49
(7)
Push the Digitizer onto the cart.
(8)
Remove the service bridge from the All in One.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 45
DD+DIS014.05E
(9)
Slide the service bridge alongside the

Control PC into the lower bracket of
the All in One cabinet.
Figure 50
(10) Apply the plate at the front of the

All in One and push to the right .
(11) Fasten the screws with a Phillips

screwdriver.
Figure 51
(12) Refit the vertical cover carefully
(13) Fasten four screws (A)

with a Phillips screwdriver.
Figure 52

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 46
DD+DIS014.05E
(14) Refit the horizontal cover carefully
(15) Watch out for jammed cables! Put them

aside into the right cut-out (A) and
fasten the four screws (B)
(Phillips screwdriver).
Figure 53
(16) Loop the Digitizer cable loom into

the vertical channel.
(17) Fasten the cover plate to the
All in One with two screws
Figure 54
Result
The Digitizer is installed.

NOTE:
For service interventions, uninstall the Digitizer in reverse order.
It is not required to remove the support from the service bridge.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 47
DD+DIS014.05E
4.11

(1)
Attach each of the monitor, Digitizer and

Control PC cables to one of the load
segments 1 - 3 of the UPS.
(2)
Plug the isolation transformer adapter

cable into the UPS.
Figure 55
NOTE:
Obtain information on country specific voltage requirements.
(3)
Set country-specific input voltage at the

On delivery, input voltage is set to 230 V.
NOTE:
Check jumper setting according to
country-specific mains voltage.
See the labels at the isolation transformer for
jumper positions.
CAUTION:
Output voltage at isolation transformer must
be 230 V!
Figure 56
Never change jumper settings on output side.

Use only an UPS with 230 V input voltage.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 48
DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Ensure that the output voltage at the isolation transformer is 230 V.
(5)
Mount the perforated rear plate with 5 screws.
(6)
Obtain an appropriate mains cable according to country-specific needs

and the technical specifications.
CAUTION:
Components of the DX-S system can be damaged if wall outlet does not
conform to the installation planning instructions.
Check that installation planning checklist is completed.
In USA: Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable to connect the All in One with the
wall outlet.
(7)
Result
Connect the isolation transformer input to the mains connector which is provided
by the customer.
The electrical installation is complete. Continue with section 7 and 7.5.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 49
DD+DIS014.05E
Installing DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
5.1

(including Isolation Transformer)
Figure 57
5.2

REQUIRED TIME:
This time span includes:
Function
Description
Cut Down All in One
(Type 5163/105)

positioning, connection to power.
Digitizer
Duration / h

positioning, connection to power and
processing station; scan head installation,
possibly software update, calibration
0.5
2.0
Physical installation of the Unpacking, mechanical installation to the

Cut Down All in One cart, cable
Control PC
connections
1.0
UPS
Unpacking, cable connections; switching

on
0.5
Basic image quality test
Exposure and evaluation of a flatfield
0.5

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 50
DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
If the device was exposed to extreme temperature or humidity conditions during
to installation.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
5.3
Screwdriver
Socket wrench 7 mm
Socket wrench 10 mm
Allen key 8 mm
Allen key 3 mm
Allen key 2.5 mm
Cutter
Installing and connecting Cables

CAUTION:
(1)
Activate front wheel brakes of

Cut Down All in One cart.
Figure 58

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 51
DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Unscrew six screws with

Phillips screwdriver and remove the
perforated rear plate to have access to
the rear side of the cabinet.
Figure 59
(3)
Unpack Control PC, monitor, keyboard and

mouse.
(4)
Place keyboard, mouse and monitor on

desired place.
(5)
Plug the DVI-connector and POWERconnector into the corresponding sockets

of the monitor.
Figure 60
Result
(6)
Connect keyboard, mouse and two monitor

connectors with extension cables.
(7)
Adjust monitor inclination.
Monitor and keyboard are installed.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 52
DD+DIS014.05E
5.4

CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Lift UPS always carefully.
Do not slide the UPS over cables.
(1)
Unpack the UPS.
(2)
Slide the UPS into the upper rack of the

Cut Down All in One cabinet.
Figure 61
(3)
Connect the UPS to one of the isolation

transformer sockets.
Figure 62

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 53
DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Attach the serial connector to the COM

port at rear side of the UPS.
(5)
Thread the UPS serial connector cable

alongside the isolation transformer and
pull it down through the rectangular
cut-out beside the transformer.
Figure 63
(6)
Loop the serial connector cable through

the cable clamp (A) to prevent it from
coming loose.
Figure 64
Result
5.5
The UPS is connected.

(1)
Unpack the Control PC.
(2)
Slide the Control PC into the lower rack

of the Cut Down All in One cabinet.
Figure 65

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 54
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Push the Control PC from behind until it

hits the bracket (A).
(4)
Plug the mains connector into its

receptacle at the rear side of the
Control PC.
Figure 66
NOTE:
Observe correct plug-in directions!
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)

(10) Plug the monitor connector into the

corresponding socket of the Control PC (F).
Figure 67
Result

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 55
DD+DIS014.05E
5.6
Placing the Digitizer onto the Cut Down All in One Cart
NOTE:
Ensure that required space is available for the ramp to pull the Digitizer on the cart.
(1)
Make sure that front wheel brakes

of the Cut Down All in One are
activated.
(2)
at the
Loosen the two screws
front of the Cut Down All in One.
(3)

left side
and remove it
.
Figure 68
(4)
Identify the U-Profiles in the

packaging.
(5)
Take the smaller U-Profile and

place it in front of the Cut Down
cart.
(6)
Fasten one ramp element with

provided screws and hook it in
the slots of the Cut Down cart.
(7)
Hook the other ramp element in

the slots of the U-profile.
Figure 69
(8)
Ensure the cables in the All in One

will not complicate installation of the
Digitizer.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 56
DD+DIS014.05E
(9)
Mind that ramp and Digitizer stand

parallel to each other and that the
wheels of the Digitizer meet exactly
the rails of the ramp.
(10) Push the Digitizer up the ramp onto

the Cut Down All in One cart.
(11) Unhook ramp and screw off the
smaller U-Profile.
Figure 70
(12) Place the bigger U-Profile (B) in front

of the Cut Down All in One cart.
(13) Fasten one element of the two
identical ramp elements with
provided screws (A).
A
A
(14) Hook ramp onto the Cut Down All in

One cart in such a way that the ramp
is in a horizontal position
(service bridge).
Figure 71
(15) Pull the Digitizer onto the service

bridge to have access to remove
top cover, left and right side panel.
Figure 72
Result
The Digitizer is placed on the ramp in service position.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 57
DD+DIS014.05E
5.7
5.7.1

NOTE:
Remove all cushioning parts and shipping brackets prior to first operation.
(1)
Remove top cover and left side panel.
The scan head carrier is fixed with

a plate (A) and two brackets (B).
Figure 73
CAUTION:
(2)
Cut the cable tie at the left side

of the plate.
Figure 74

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 58
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Unscrew the four Allen screws fixing

the plate (see position of screws in
Figure 75, see the two screws at the
left side in Figure 76).
Figure 75
Figure 76
(4)
Unscrew the screws fixing the plate to

the brackets, one at each side,
and the nuts at the bottom of the bracket,
two at each side (the Figure 77 shows
the left hand scan head fixing bracket).
Figure 77
(5)
Result
Take out the plate and brackets carefully.
The shipping brackets are removed.

NOTE:
Do not discard the shipping brackets.
They will be needed whenever the Digitizer has to be transported and shock and

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 59
DD+DIS014.05E
5.7.2

To avoid transport damage, the scan head of the Digitizer comes in a separate box and
has to be installed in the Digitizer at the installation site.
CAUTION:
When installing the Scan Head care must be taken.
Touch the scan head only at the red handles of the installation bracket
(see circles in Figure 78).
(1)
Unpack the scan head from the box.
Figure 78
(2)
Completely open screws (A) and (C). They are secured against loss.
Loosen screw (B). Be careful as this screw is not secured against loss.
B
A
Figure 79

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 60
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Insert the scan head carefully in its bearings: First insert in bearing top left
(no mechanical fixation at top right), then swivel lower part of scan head
towards bottom bearings till scan head has engaged completely.
Figure 80

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 61
DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Slightly fasten Allen screws (2.5 mm) at the left and right side of the scan head
a little bit. Tension may occur.
Figure 81

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 62
DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Slightly fasten Allen screw (2.5 mm) at the upper left and right side of the
scan head. Tension may occur.
Fasten all three Allen screws more strongly in the same order as given above.
Figure 82
(6)
Remove installation bracket of the scan head by opening the screws

on left and right by hand.
Figure 83

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 63
DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Perform the following steps:
Connect the cable leading to the scan head control board on

the lower side of the scan head (A).
and fix with metal clip
(B).
Insert the mounting plate
Connect cables of laser diodes board and e-label (C).
Figure 84

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 64
DD+DIS014.05E
(8)
Fasten grounding connection at the left side of the scan head.
Figure 85
(9)
Result
Re-insert cover and left side panel of the Digitizer.
The scan head is installed.

CAUTION:
Remove the scan head whenever the Digitizer needs to be transported and shock and

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 65
DD+DIS014.05E
5.8

(1)
Plug the pre-cabled mains connector

in the Digitizer receptacle.
Figure 86
(2)
(3)
Loop the FireWire cable through the

cover of the Digitizer's FireWire
connector.
NOTE:
Observe correct plug-in direction
(see Figure 88, labeling A).
(4)

(5)

using an Allen key.
(6)
Fix FireWire cable with the clamp

socket wrench.
Figure 87
Figure 88

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 66
DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Push the Digitizer onto the cart.
(8)
Ensure that the Digitizer is centered

by distance piece and bolt.
Figure 89
(9)
Apply the plate at the front of the

All in One and push to the right .
(10) Fasten the screws with a Phillips

Screwdriver.
Figure 90
(11) Dismount the support (B) from the

service bridge by loosening the
2 screws (A).
A
A
Figure 91
(12) Store the ramp elements and U-profiles

next to the Control PC in the Cut Down
All in One cart:
The two ramp elements on the
hooks facing each other.
Small U-profile in the rear
Big U-profile in front
Figure 92

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 67
DD+DIS014.05E
5.9

(1)
Plug each of the monitor, Digitizer and

Control PC cables to any of the load
segments 1 - 3 of the UPS.
(2)
Plug the isolation transformer adapter

cable into the UPS.
Figure 93
NOTE:
(3)
Set country-specific input voltage at

the isolation transformer.
On delivery, input voltage is set
to 230 V.
NOTE:
country-specific mains voltage
(see labels at isolation transformer for jumper
positions).
Figure 94

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 68
DD+DIS014.05E
CAUTION:
Output voltage at isolation transformer must be 230 V!
(4)
Ensure that the output voltage at the

isolation transformer is 230 V.
(5)
Loop mouse, keyboard and two

monitor cables through cutout
of perforated rear plate.
(6)
Loop Digitizer mains cable and

of
firewire cable through cutout
perforated rear plate.
2
3
Figure 95
(7)
Mount the perforated rear plate with

six screws.
CAUTION:
In USA: Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable to connect the All in One with the wall outlet.
(8)
Connect the isolation transformer input (see Figure 95, circle ) with
appropriate mains cable to the wall outlet which is provided by the customer.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 69
DD+DIS014.05E
(9)
Place Cut Down All in One cart at

its final place and activate brakes.
Figure 96
(10) Mount the cover plate to the

Cut Down All in One with screws
on the left and right side
Figure 97
Result
The electrical installation is complete and the Digitizer is at its final place.
Continue with section 7 and 7.5.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 70
DD+DIS014.05E
Installing the DX-S System as separate Components
6.1
Mandatory and optional Components

The configuration of the DX-S System as separate components depends on the order
and the requirements at installation site.
The DX-S system can be composed with following mandatory and optional hardware
components:
Mandatory DX-S Hardware Components:
DX-S Digitizer (Type 5160/100)
NX Workstation
CR Touch Monitor
CR HD 5.0 General Detector 35 x 43 cm (2 pieces)
CR HD 5.0 General Detector 24 x 30 cm (2 pieces)
Optional DX-S Hardware Components:
DX-S Isolation Transformer
DX-S UPS Powerware 5125 2200i, 230 V
CR HD 5.0 General Detectors

(18 x 24 cm, 15 x 30 cm)
The order numbers of all available components can be found in

chapter 11, Installation Planning of this Service Documentation.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 71
DD+DIS014.05E
6.2
Overview possible Configurations of the DX-S System as separate

Components
Configuration 1:
UPS
NX Workstation
CR Touch Monitor
Isolation Transformer
Uninterruptible Power Supply

Powerware 5125 2200i
Isolation
Transformer
Monitor
DX-S
NX
Figure 98: Overview configuration 1
Configuration 2:
NX Workstation
CR Touch Monitor
Isolation
Transformer
Monitor
DX-S
NX
Configuration 3:
NX Workstation
CR Touch Monitor
Monitor
DX-S
NX

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 72
DD+DIS014.05E
6.3
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S Digitizer (without Isolation

Transformer)
The DX-S Digitizer in conjunction with the IT-Components like PC and Monitor
complies with the EN 60950 standard for Information Technology. This means that,
although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact with the
equipment. Therefore, all DX-S components must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m
(6 feet) around the patient.
Figure 101
6.4
Installation within Patient Environment

IMPORTANT:
If the DX-S system (Digitizer, PC, Monitor) is operated within the patient environment
(see Figure 101) an isolating transformer has to be used according to
IEC60601-1-1 standard. All components must be connected to this isolating
transformer, which guarantees the demanded additional separation. Such an isolation
transformer is available as an option by Agfa.
For specification of the transformer refer to section Chapter 11 Installation Planning
of this Service Manual.
Configuration
Within Patient
Environment
UPS
DX-S System
as
separate
components
Yes
Mandatory in case DX-S

is operated within
patient environment
closer to
1.5 meters (5 feet).
No
Optional
UPS can only be

ordered and used in
the separate
components
installation if coupled
with transformer order.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 73
DD+DIS014.05E
R = 1.5 m (1.83 m*)
Patient environment
h= 2.5 m
(2.29 m*)
Patient environment
Without UPS
With UPS
Wall Outlet
Wall Outlet
Monitor
UPS
NX
DX-S
Monitor
NX
DX-S
Figure 102: Possible configurations within patient environment

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 74
DD+DIS014.05E
6.5

REQUIRED TIME:
This required time can vary depending on the individual configuration of the
DX-S System.
Function
Description
Duration / h
Unpacking and positioning of

system components
Unpacking and positioning of system

components
0.5
standalone Digitizer
Removal of the transport locks,

connection to power and processing
station; scan head installation
1.0
Physical installation of the

Control PC
Unpacking, mechanical installation,

cable connections
0.8
Optional:
isolation transformer
Unpacking, cable connections, check

setting input and output voltage
Optional:
Physical installation of UPS
Unpacking, cable connections
0.2
if applicable
System start
Switching on the DX-S system, SW

version check of components, DX-S
calibration
0.8
Basic image quality test
Exposure and evaluation of a flatfield
0.5
NOTE:
transport, it needs at least one day to acclimatize at the installation location prior to
installation.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Socket wrench 7 mm
Socket wrench 10 mm
Allen key 8 mm
Allen key 3 mm
Allen key 2.5 mm

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 75
DD+DIS014.05E
6.6
Unpacking and placing the Components

CAUTION:
6.7
(1)
Unpack all components.
(2)
Place components at their place, but ensure

that there is enough free space for the
service tasks.
Installing and connecting Mouse, Monitor and Keyboard

(1)
Plug the DVI-connector and POWERconnector into the corresponding sockets of

the monitor.
Figure 103
Result
(2)
Connect keyboard, mouse and two monitor

connectors with extension cables.
(3)
Adjust monitor inclination.
Monitor, mouse and keyboard are installed.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 76
DD+DIS014.05E
6.8

WARNING:
Using different power circles may lead to ground potential differences:
In this case the leakage current via FireWire cable may exceed the limits
as defined by IEC 60601:
Confirm that both, NX Workstation and Digitizer are connected to the same
ground, e.g. via multiple socket or UPS.
WARNING:
Using a FireWire cable > 4.5 m may lead to unstable or no communication
between Digitizer and NX Workstation: Retakes possible.
Do not use a FireWire cable between Digitizer and NX with a length > 4.5 m or > 15 ft
respectively.
(1)
Plug the mains cable into its receptacle

at the rear side of the Control PC.
NOTE:
Observe correct plug-in
directions!
Result
(2)

Only necessary in case of using an UPS.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(7)
Plug the monitor connector into

the corresponding socket of the
Control PC (F).
Figure 104

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 77
DD+DIS014.05E
6.9
6.9.1

(1)
6.9.2

(1)
6.10
Remove the shipping brackets as described in section 4.9.1 (or section 5.7.1).
The procedure is exactly the same for the DX-S System as for separate
components.
Install the scan head as described in section 4.9.2 (or section 5.7.2).
The procedure is exactly the same for the DX-S System as for separate
components.
Connecting the Digitizer

(1)
Plug appropriate mains connector in the

Digitizer receptacle.
Figure 105
(2)

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 78
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Loop the FireWire cable through the cover

of the Digitizer's FireWire connector.
NOTE:
Observe correct plug-in direction
(see Figure 107, labeling A).
(4)

(5)

using an Allen key.
(6)
Fix the FireWire cable with the clamp

socket wrench.
Figure 106
Figure 107

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 79
DD+DIS014.05E
6.11
Connecting Mains Cables of Components

As the configuration of the DX-S System as separate components depends on
the order and the requirements at the installation site there are three possible
configurations.
Check which of the following three configurations applies to the present situation
and follow the instructions step by step:
If the DX-S System has to be configured as separate components:
with isolation transformer and with UPS,

then continue with section 6.11.1.
UPS
Isolation
Transformer
COM
Cable
DX-S
Appropriate
mains cable
Monitor
Wall
Outlet
NX
Firewire
Figure 108: Configuration 1
with isolation transformer but without UPS,

Isolation
Transformer
Appropriate
mains cable
Wall
Outlet
Monitor
DX-S
NX
Firewire
Multiple
Socket
without isolation transformer and without UPS,

Appropriate
mains cable
Wall
Outlet
Monitor
DX-S
NX
Firewire

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 80
DD+DIS014.05E
6.11.1
Configuration 1: Connecting Digitizer, Isolation Transformer and UPS
UPS
Isolation
Transformer
COM
Cable
DX-S
Monitor
Appropriate
mains cable
Wall
Outlet
NX
Firewire
Figure 111: Cable connections configuration 1
WARNING:
(1)
Connect mains cable of DX-S, NX and monitor to UPS sockets

(see Figure 111).
(2)
Connect mains cable of UPS to one socket of isolation transformer

(see Figure 111).
(3)
Attach the serial connector to the COM port at rear side of the UPS and
connect it with the Control PC.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 81
DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
(4)
Set country-specific input voltage

(On delivery, input voltage is set to 230 V)
at the isolation transformer.
NOTE:
positions).
CAUTION:
be 230 V!
Figure 112

(5)
Ensure that the output voltage at the

isolation transformer is 230 V.
CAUTION:
In USA:
Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable to connect the isolation transformer with the wall
outlet.
Result
(6)
Obtain appropriate mains cable according to country-specific needs and the

technical specifications.
(7)
Connect appropriate mains cable of isolation transformer to wall outlet.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 82
DD+DIS014.05E
6.11.2
Configuration 2: Connecting Digitizer and Isolation Transformer (without UPS)
Isolation
Transformer
Appropriate
mains cable
Wall
Outlet
Monitor
DX-S
NX
Firewire
WARNING:
(1)
Connect mains cable of DX-S, NX and monitor to isolation transformer sockets

(see Figure 113).

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 83
DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
(2)
Set country-specific input voltage

(On delivery, input voltage is set to 230 V)
at the isolation transformer.
NOTE:
positions).
CAUTION:
be 230 V!
Figure 114

(3)
Ensure that the output voltage at

the isolation transformer is 230 V.
CAUTION:
In USA:
Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable to connect the isolation transformer with the wall
outlet.
Result
(4)
Obtain appropriate mains cable according to country-specific needs and the

technical specifications.
(5)
Connect appropriate mains cable of isolation transformer to wall outlet.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 84
DD+DIS014.05E
6.11.3
Configuration 3: Connecting Digitizer (without UPS and without Isolation

Transformer)
IMPORTANT:
This configuration may not be used in patient environment.
When the DX-S System as separate components is used within the patient
environment (closer to 1.5 meters = 5 feet) an isolation transformer (ABC code:
EZJT3) must be used to guarantee the demanded additional separation.
Multiple
Socket
Appropriate
mains cable
Wall
Outlet
Monitor
DX-S
NX
Firewire
WARNING:
(1)
Connect mains cable of DX-S, NX and monitor to multiple socket

(see Figure 115).

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 85
DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
A country-specific multiple socket is not part of the delivery and has to be obtained
locally for the DX-S System as separate components'.
(2)
Result
Connect multiple socket with appropriate mains cable to wall outlet according to
the country-specific needs and the technical specifications (see Figure 115).
Preparing the Digitizer before first Use
7.1

CAUTION:
The needle image plate (IP) is fragile and very expensive:
Risk of damage.
When replacing or cleaning the needle IP great care must be taken.
Never put an image plate down on its phosphor-coated side.
Never moisten the image plate itself!
Visual
Check
Cleaning
Check if there are scratches on the surface.
Use CR Phosphor IP Cleaner 1P (order number*: CM+9 9999 9288 0).

* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, a different revision of the spare part may be delivered.
Use a moistened, lint free tissue.

The surface will be dry again after approximately 5 minutes. The IP can then be

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 86
DD+DIS014.05E
in
Press the lock-mechanism
cutout of cassette with a blunt tool
(not sharp-edged).
(1)
(2)
A
2
Open shutter (A) carefully with both

thumbs.
B
3
NOTE:
Ensure that the image plate
(B) is not scratched by the
shutter.
(3)
7.2
pressure
even surface
Slide out the image plate on an even

surface , e.g. a desk.
The image plate must lie flat on the
surface (see Figure 116).
pressure
even surface
Figure 116
Configuring Site-Specific Data

(1)
Switch on the Digitizer and wait for completion of the self test.
(2)
The following error message may be displayed:
Figure 117
If it is displayed, proceed with

section 9, "Installation Steps in Case of Software Mismatch".
Otherwise proceed with the next step.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 87
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Check that the current DX-S software is installed.

For this, open the service client and navigate to
<General Device Info
SW-Versioning
versions>.
Get installed
If software version is not current, proceed with

section 9, "Installation Steps in Case of Software Mismatch".
Otherwise proceed with the next step.
NOTE:
The e-labels of the Digitizer bear the correct serial number.
The Control PC is delivered with the dummy serial number 9999 stored in the
Infocounter (file DDMData.xml).
During the Digitizer installation the serial number stored on the Control PC must be
updated.
(4)
The following message appears:

This message should only pop up, when the DX-S and the Control PC have
been connected for the first time or e.g. the hard disk of the Control PC has
been changed.
Figure 118
Start the Service Client by opening Windows menu <Start

Agfa DX-S
DX-S Service Client>.
Programs

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 88
DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
The entry of user name and Service password is requested:
Figure 119
(6)
In the tree view, go to: <Configuration Site Specific Data>
(7)
Click button <Configure Site with new EMS serial number>.

The correct SN is updated and written into the Stored in DDM field.
Figure 120

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 89
DD+DIS014.05E
(8)
Connection is interrupted, and then Digitizer and Control PC connect

automatically.
If automatic connection fails, restart the Digitizer.
(9)
The following message appears (file name may differ):
Figure 121
Click button <OK>.

Result
The serial number is now updated.

(10) Fill in the required data.
Figure 122
(11) Click button <Update Site Specific Data> to save the input.
Result
Site-specific data is configured.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 90
DD+DIS014.05E
7.3

NOTE:
For this procedure the Digitizer and the Control PC must be running and the FSE
must be logged in as administrator.
Scan head focus calibration must be carried out prior to the scan line calibration in
section 7.4.
(1)
Erase an image plate of the biggest format available at the customer site.
(2)
Expose this plate with a dose of 10 Gy, rotate by 180 and expose again
with 10 Gy.
In case Full Leg Full Spine cassettes are used for calibration, follow the
positioning instructions in section 7.5 of this chapter.
NOTE:
Select the following exposure parameters to obtain a dose of 10 Gy:
1.5 mm Cu filter (order number *: CM+9 5155 1015 2)

* The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document.
12 mAs
75 kVp
1.3 m (51,2) distance
Large focus
The values are approximate and may vary among the X-ray devices.
(3)
Go to: <Start
Program
Agfa DX-S
Open DX-S Service Client>
(4)
Select <Preventive Maintenance
DX-S Service Client
Calibration>.
The calibration dialog is open with <Focus calibration> selected by default.

(5)
Click <Calibrate>
The bullet in screen gets green. The DX-S is ready for calibration now.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 91
DD+DIS014.05E
(6)
Insert exposed cassette.

The Image plate is scanned and erased.
(7)
The resulting calibration line is automatically stored in the e-label of the scan head
control board.
As an example for the resulting calibration lines see Figure 123:
Figure 123
(8)
Result
Remove cassette from Digitizer.
The scan head focus calibration is finished.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 92
DD+DIS014.05E
7.4

For this procedure the Digitizer and the PC need to be started and the User is logged in
as administrator.
(1)
Erase an IP of the biggest format used at the customer site.
(2)
Expose this plate with a dose of 4 * 10 Gy.

Rotate by 180 and expose again with 4 * 10 Gy.
In case Full Leg Full Spine cassettes are used for calibration, follow the
positioning instructions in section 7.5 of this chapter.
(3)
Go to: <Start
Program
Agfa DX-S
Open DX-S Service Client>
(4)
Select <Preventive Maintenance
(5)
The current calibration line for gain and offset is loaded from the Digitizer and is
displayed.
(6)
Select <Scan line calibration> (takes a while).
DX-S Service Client
Calibration>.
Click button <Calibrate>.
Figure 124

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 93
DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Insert exposed cassette.

The IP is scanned and erased.
(8)
Wait until calibration data for gain and offset is transferred

(needs several minutes).
(9)
Check, if the calibration lines are stored in the Control PC.

NOTE:
Additionally to the storage in the e-label, the files of the calibration
(Gain.stc and Offset.stc) are stored in the following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Agfa\DX-S\.
The calibration files will be overwritten by newer ones. If the calibration
files should be kept, save them with another name.
(10) Remove the cassette from the Digitizer.

Result
7.5
The scan line calibration is finished.
Specific Cassette Positioning for Full Leg Full Spine Application

REQUIRED CASSETTE:
Use the largest available cassette.
If Genrad and FLFS cassettes of size 35 x 43 cm are available, use

a Genrad cassette.
If no Genrad cassette in size 35 x 43 cm is available, however a FLFS cassette

(FLFS cassettes are only available in size 35 x 43 cm), use the FLFS cassette.
Example 1:
The customer uses 3 x FLFS cassettes 35 x 43 cm, plus 3 x Genrad
cassettes 24 x 30 cm use the 35 x 43 cm FLFS cassette.
Example 2:
The customer uses 2 x Genrad cassettes 35 x 43 cm plus 3 x FLFS
cassettes 35 x 43 cm use the 35 x 43 cm Genrad cassette.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 94
DD+DIS014.05E
Procedure
(1)
Select the largest available cassette.

If possible, use a Genrad cassette.
(2)
Open the cassette and check the image plate (IP) for scratches. If no
scratches are visible, select this IP.
(3)
Expose the IP:

If a FLFS cassette is used for shading calibration, put two cassettes
underneath the FLFS cassette. This covers the area where the cassette has
no backscatter protection. Only this area has to be covered, it is used by the
Digitizer to determine the shading calibration curves, see Figure 125.
Exposure 1
180 rotation
Exposure 2
FLFS cassette
Area used by
shading calibration
Area used by
shading calibration
5160_ch3.6_010.cdr
Put a cassette underneath this area.

This prevents, that the missing
backscatter protection falsifies the
shading calibration result.
Figure 125

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 95
DD+DIS014.05E
Concluding the Installation

NOTE:
The installation of the DX-S can be concluded only when the NX Workstation software
on the Control PC is configured and customized.
Please refer to the relevant Service Documentation. See section 1.
8.1
8.1.1
Exposing a Flatfield
(1)
Place a cassette of the biggest format used at customer site

in line to the X-ray tube, see Figure 126.
Rotating
Anode
X-ray tube
Cathode
OK
NOK
Figure 126
(2)
Expose the cassette with 10 Gy.

NOTE:
Select the following exposure parameters using a
1.5 mm Cu filter (order number *: CM+9 5155 1015 2) to obtain a dose
of 10 Gy:
12 mAs
75 kVp
Large focus

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 96
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Turn cassette by 180.
(4)
Expose again with 10 Gy.
(5)
Identify the cassette on the NX Workstation with the following parameters:
Exam Group:
<System Diagnosis>
Exposure Type: <Flat Field>
Detector Sensitivity: <200>
Figure 127
8.1.2
Importing the Limit Pattern (optional)

NOTE:
In case the limit pattern CD has been ordered, the following steps can be performed,
otherwise continue with step 8.1.3.
The limit pattern represents the lowest acceptable image quality in slow scan and fast
scan direction.
The Limit Pattern CD can be ordered with order number*: CM+9 5160 9120 0

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 97
DD+DIS014.05E
(1)
Insert the software CD ROM of the Digitizer into the CD ROM Drive.
(2)
On the NX Workstation select the Main Menu.
(3)
Select <Import images>.
(4)
Browse to the CD ROM drive.
(5)
Select folder <SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS-Flat Field- >.
(6)
Select <OK>.
(7)
Wait till the image is imported (approximately 30 seconds).
(8)
Select the <Examination> menu.
(9)
Print the image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
IMPORTANT:
On the NX Workstation the image is displayed rotated to portrait.
Definitions
Evaluating a Flatfield
Slow scan direction
represents the movement of the scan head
on the scan head carrier.
Fast scan direction
is the line by line reading of the scan head.
Slow scan direction
8.1.3
Fast scan direction

Figure 128
(1)
Inspect the scanned image for homogeneity. If there are no lines visible,
(see Figure 128), the image quality is acceptable.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 98
DD+DIS014.05E
IMPORTANT:
If a FLFS cassette is used for flatfield exposure, the image will be slightly darker in the
upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed
(approximately 1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image quality
evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette
Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Genrad Cassette
HD5.0
FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
Protection
HD5.0 FLFS
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 129
(2) If some lines are visible:

Either compare the flatfield with the sketches of:
Calibration Lines
Banding
Dust
Or compare the flatfield with the limit pattern (refer to section 8.1.2 for details).
NOTE:
Following image distortions should not be considered as reference image information:
White spots
Scratches
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 99
DD+DIS014.05E
8.1.3.1
Without
"Limit
Pattern"
Calibration Lines
Sharp white lines in slow scan
direction showing the transition lines
from one CCD element to the other.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Figure 130
With
"Limit
Pattern"
Find the Region of Interest (ROI),

marked with green rectangles,
showing the typical limit pattern for
calibration lines.
Figure 131
If sharp white lines in slow scan direction or the typical limit pattern for calibration lines
can be seen:
(1)
Redo the calibration.
(2)
Expose another flatfield and check the image quality again.
NOTE:
If there are unacceptable image flaws, please contact the
Regional Support Network (RSN). For external partners: Please contact your local
Agfa representative.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 100
DD+DIS014.05E
8.1.3.2
Without
"Limit
Pattern"
Banding
Blurred white lines parallel to fastscan direction on the flatfield:
This can happen due to
inhomogeneities in the slow-scan
process (e.g. stepper motors, air
bearings, steel ropes, etc.).
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Figure 132
With
"Limit
Pattern"
Find the Region of Interest (ROI),

marked with red rectangles, showing
the typical limit pattern for banding.
Figure 133
If stripes parallel to fast scan direction or the typical limit pattern for banding
can be seen:
(1)
Check diagnostic images.
(2)
Check that during scanning no vibration has occurred on the device.
NOTE:
If there are unacceptable image flaws, please contact the Regional Support Network
(RSN). For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa representative.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 101
DD+DIS014.05E
8.1.3.3
Dust
Pale stripes in slow-scan direction.
In the example in Figure 134 the dust lines
have been pointed out for a better illustration.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Figure 134
(1)
Check if scan head is dusty.

If it is, clean the scan head according to the description in Chapter 9,
Maintenance of this Service Manual. See section 1.
(2)
Expose another flat field and check the image quality.
NOTE:
(RSN). For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa representative.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 102
DD+DIS014.05E
8.2

Carry out at least three complete test cycles with each detector
via the Service functionality <Endurance run> in the Service Client.
8.3

The current settings have to be written to the hand-over test (a file saving the
installation settings of the Digitizer):
Result
(1)
Go to: <Start
(2)
Select <Reporting / HOT Report>.
(3)
Insert a cassette in the Digitizer.

A normal scan cycle is started and the successful completion is recorded.
(4)
Click <Save HOT report as>.
(5)
Save HOT file in C:/Documents and settings all users /Application Data/DX-S/
log/
Save as HOT_ddmmyyyy.txt.
Programs
Agfa DX-S
DX-S Service Client>
The technical installation is successfully completed!

The HOT file documents the successful completion of the technical installation of the
Digitizer as well as the successful connection to the Control PC.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 103
DD+DIS014.05E
Installation Steps in Case of Software Mismatch

NOTE:
The following scenario only applies if the DX-S software on the Control PC and the
Digitizer report different software versions.
When starting the Control PC and then switching on the Digitizer,
an error message may appear:
Figure 135
(1)
9.1
Click button <Ok>.
Uninstalling the previous DX-S Software Version

(1)
Close the NX application.

For this, select the
<Main Menu> and click button
<Exit NX>.
Figure 136
(2)
Stop the NX service.

For this, open Windows menu <Start
Agfa NX
A console window pops up. Press <Enter> key.
Service
Stop NX>.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 104
DD+DIS014.05E
Result
9.2
(3)
Open Windows menu <Start

Settings
double-click <Add or Remove Programs>.
(4)
Remove DX-S from the system.
(5)
Restart Control PC and log in with the service account.
Control Panel>,
The DX-S software on the Control PC is uninstalled now.
Installing the DX-S Software on the Control PC

(1)
Stop the NX service, if still running.
(2)
Create folder D:\Installer, if it does not exist.
(3)
Copy the files DX-SInstaller_xxxx.msi and vjredist.exe

to D:\Installer on the hard disk of the Control PC.
(4)
Double-click DX-SInstaller_xxxx.msi file.

The DX-S Setup Wizard starts.
(5)
The message in Figure 137 is displayed if DX-S software version STR_xxxx is

installed for the first time and Microsoft Visual J#.Net is not already installed.
If it is not displayed, proceed with step (10).
Figure 137
(6)
Click <No>.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 105
DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Double-click the vjredist.exe file in D:\Installer.

The Microsoft Java VM is installed.
(8)
Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.
(9)
Double-click DX-SInstaller_xxxx.msi file.

(10) Click <Next>.

Window <DX-S Communications Interface> pops up.
(11) Check radio button <DIFO (via IEEE 1394)>.
Figure 138
(12) Click <Next>.

The dialog <Select Installation Folder> is displayed.
Figure 139
(13) Check radio button <Everyone>.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 106
DD+DIS014.05E
(14) Click button <Next>.

Dialog <Confirm Installation> appears.
Installation is started.
After a while the <DX-S Installer> window pops up.
NOTE:
Do not press <OK> unless having checked the credentials by clicking the button
<Check>.See Figure 140.
Entering the wrong password and continuing the installation makes the
Agfa Service Manager inaccessible. The service could not be started or
stopped.
(16) Enter the Network Domain the Control PC belongs to.

(17) Enter crservice account data in <User Name> and <Password>.
Figure 140
(18) Check the credentials with button <Check>.

Only if check was successful, click button <OK> in <DX-S Installer>
window.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 107
DD+DIS014.05E
(19) In the subsequent dialog, click button <Close> and restart the Control PC.
(20) Log in with crservice account.
(21) Close the NX application.
(22) Stop the NX service.
(23) Restart the Digitizer.
When it establishes the connection with the Control PC, an error message
appears on the PC screen:
The firmware version is incorrect
Figure 141

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 108
DD+DIS014.05E
9.3
Updating the Software on the Digitizer

(1)
In the tree view, go to: <Modification
SW Upload>
Figure 142
(2)
Click button <Get installed versions>.

<different> is shown in most Status fields of the nodes table.
(3)
Click button <Select all>.
(4)
Click button <Upload selected nodes>.

The system starts uploading the nodes (duration: 15 20 minutes).
NOTE:
Failure messages are displayed during nodes upload. They are due
to the upload itself and do not indicate a malfunction.
They can be ignored.
Typical error codes during the upload are:
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
Failure at air supply / vacuum module

Failure at IP handling module
Failure at cassette handling module
Failure at scan head controller module
Failure at user interface module
Failure at erasure module
Failure at power supply module

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 109
DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Wait until the animation in the Activity bar is stopped and the message
<Restart of DX-S Service or of Digitizer required> is
displayed in the last line of the Activity textbox.
(6)

<OK> is shown in all Status fields of the nodes table. Only the current
software version is shown for all nodes, except the second one.
This verifies that Digitizer software is correctly installed.
Figure 143
(7)
In the tree view, go to: <General Device Info
Info Counter>
<Software Master Version> has to be e.g. STR_1404

This verifies that for example the Digitizer software STR_1404 is
correctly installed.
Figure 144
(8)
Result
Close the Service Client.
The software on the Digitizer is now updated and the system can be started again.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 110
DD+DIS014.05E
9.4
Restarting the System

(1)

A console window pops up.
Agfa
NX
Service
Start NX>.
Figure 145
(2)
Follow the instructions given in the console window until it is closed

automatically.
The NX application opens.
(3)
Restart the Digitizer.

Self test and establishment of the connection between DX-S and Control PC
may need several minutes.
Finally the Digitizer displays state Ready.
Result
The installation of Digitizer software is complete.

The DX-S system is ready to process cassettes.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 111
DD+DIS014.05E
10
Preparing the Digitizer for the Use on Sites between 2000

and 3000 m above Sea Level
NOTE:
In contrast to former Digitizer Software, versions > STR_1404 are additionally
intended for the use on sites which are located on an altitude between 2000 and
3000 m above sea level.
For those sites between 2000 and 3000 m additionally a modified pump unit is
required. The release of the modified pump unit is still in preparation and therefore the
feature to use the Digitizer on an altitude between 2000 and 3000 m is not yet
applicable.
The modified pump unit can be recognized by a label. The label is located on the
upper left side of the pump unit and indicates the part number which must be
F8.5160.8100.4 (index 4 or higher).
Detailed information about availability of the modified pump unit will be communicated
in the DX-S Service Bulletin, DD+DIS215.07E. See section 1.
For sites below 2000 m the previous pump unit and the modified pump unit can be
used in combination with STR_1404.
If the DX-S Digitizer is intended to be used on sites between 2000 and 3000 m
following setting has to be made in the DX-S Service Client:
IMPORTANT:
For sites below 2000m this setting neednt be set in the DX-S Service Client.
(1)

DX-S Service Client>
(2)
Enter the <User Name> and Service <Password>.
Programs
Agfa DX-S
Figure 146

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 112
DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
The Service Client window opens.

In the tree view, go to: <Configuration
Site Specific Data>
Figure 147
(4)
Check that button <Installation site is located higher than

2000m/6562ft> is set.
Figure 148
(5)
Result:
Click button <Update Site Specific Data>.
DX-S Digitizer Software is prepared for the use on sites located between 2000 and
3000 m.
Additionally, the modified pump unit is required.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 113
DD+DIS014.05E
To check whether the Digitizer hardware is prepared for the use on sites located
between 2000 and 3000 m the pump unit must be checked.
NOTE:
The modified pump unit can be recognized by a label on its surface.
To check whether the modified pump unit is already installed, proceed as follows:
(1)
Switch off DX-S and NX Workstation.
(2)
Unplug DX-S from the mains.
(3)
Remove right side panel of the DX-S.
(4)
Check, whether modified pump unit is installed.

The label is located on the upper left side of the pump unit and indicates the
part number which must be F8.5160.8100.4 (index 4 or higher).
(5)
If a modified pump unit is installed, the Digitizer is prepared for the use on an
altitude between 2000 and 3000 m.
If no modified pump unit is installed, the last index of the part number is < 4 and
the pump unit has to be replaced by the modified one.
Detailed information about availability of the modified pump has been
communicated via DX-S Service Bulletin, DD+DIS215.07E. See section 1.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 114
DD+DIS014.05E
11
No.
(1)
Checklist for Installation and Start-up

Step
Task
Code
OK
Preparations for Installation

Concluded pre-installation checklist
INS
Inspected delivery, unpacked components, checked scope of delivery

(sections 3.2 3.4)
INS
Check which installation (2.1 or 2.2 or 2.3) applies to the present situation and check whether all
steps have been done.
(2.1)
(2.2)
(2.3)
Mechanical and Electrical Installation of DX-S All in One

Installed monitor and keyboard (section 4.3)
INS
Connected UPS and Control PC (sections 4.4, 4.5)
INS
Placed Digitizer on All in One cart (sections 4.6)
INS
Checked and adjusted monitor and keyboard (sections 4.7, 4.8)
INS
Prepared and installed Digitizer (sections 4.9, 4.10)
INS
Completed electrical installation (section 4.11)
INS
Mechanical and Electrical Installation of DX-S Cut Down All in One

Cables installed and connected (section 5.3)
INS
Connected UPS and Control PC (sections 5.4, 5.5)
INS
Placed Digitizer onto Cut Down All in One cart (5.6)
INS
Prepared and installed Digitizer (section 5.7, 5.8)
INS
Completed electrical installation (section 5.9)
INS
Mechanical and Electrical Installation of DX-S System as Separate Components

Unpacked and placed components (section 6.6)
INS
Monitor, mouse and keyboard connected (section 6.7)
INS
Connected Control PC (sections 6.8)
INS
Prepared and installed Digitizer (section 6.9)
INS
Connected Digitizer (section 6.10)

Connected mains cables of respective components (section 6.11.1 or
section 6.11.2 or section 6.11.3, depending on configuration)
INS

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 115
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
(3)
(4)
(5)
Task
Code
Step
OK
Configuration of DX-S
Configured site -specific data (section 7.2)
INS
As necessary: Installed DX-S software (section 9)
INS
Digitizer Calibration
Performed scan head focus calibration (section 7.3)
INS
Performed scan line calibration (section 7.4)
INS
Conclusion of Installation
Checked the technical image quality of the DX-S system
(section 8.1)
INS
Performed test cycles (section 8.2)
INS
Performed hand-over test (section 8.3)
INS
Handed over the CR system to the application manager
INS
Filled in the form "Site and System Data" and sent it to national data
administrator
INS
Sent the completed "Installation Report" to the regional support manager
INS

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 1 / 116
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 2
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160
Content of Chapter 2 Functional Description

This chapter contains the instructions for all Functional Descriptions.
They are listed in chronological sequence:
Contents
Edition.
Revision
July DD+DIS014.05E
2.3
Aug. DD+DIS294.07E
Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart

DX-S System
2.4
Timeline
Document No.
2008
2009


eq_06_accessories_toc_e_template_v06
DD+DIS014.05E

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 2
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 2
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160

This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies always under normal conditions without any problems (nominal functional
sequence).
Furthermore it describes the structure and function of specific individual assemblies.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.3
07-2008
NX 2008 is available for DX-S.
Document
Title
Chapter 1
Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures, DD+DIS014.05E
Chapter 6
Service Documentation DX-S All in One

and DX-S Cut Down All in One, DD+DIS421.05E
Chapter 11
Installation Planning, DD+DIS387.06E
SIB No. 29
Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) Phase 1b released for

DX-S Systems, DD+DIS324.07E


eq_02_functional_e_template_v06
DD+DIS014.05E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 2
DD+DIS014.05E
LIST OF CONTENTS
DX-S DIGITIZER AS A PART OF THE CR SYSTEM ..............................................................5

1.1
CR Components .......................................................................................................................5
1.2
Workflow of the CR System ......................................................................................................6
DX-S VERSUS CR 25.0, CR 35-X, CR 75.0 AND CR 85-X.....................................................7

2.1
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................7
2.2
Conventional CR Systems ........................................................................................................8
2.2.1
Scan Principle - one point-at-a-time .........................................................................................8
2.3
DX-S System.............................................................................................................................9
2.3.1
Scan Principle - one line-at-a-time............................................................................................9
DX-S CASSETTES.................................................................................................................13
3.1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................13
3.2
Properties................................................................................................................................14
3.3
Cassette Formats....................................................................................................................15
3.4
Applications.............................................................................................................................16
DX-S IMAGE PLATE ..............................................................................................................17

4.1
DX-S Image Plate Principle ....................................................................................................17
4.2
Properties of the NIP (Needle Image Plate) ...........................................................................17
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF THE MAIN MODULES ....................................................19

5.1
Cassette Handling Unit ...........................................................................................................20
5.2
IP Handling Unit ......................................................................................................................24
5.3
Transport Unit .........................................................................................................................30
5.4
Air Supply Unit ........................................................................................................................32
5.5
Scan Head ..............................................................................................................................38
5.6
Erasure Unit ............................................................................................................................42
5.6.1
Flashlight Erasure Unit (SN < 1402) .......................................................................................42
5.6.2
LED Erasure Unit (SN 1402)................................................................................................44
5.6.3
Circuit Diagram for Flashlight Erasure Unit and LED Erasure Unit ........................................45

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 3
DD+DIS014.05E
PRINCIPLE OF DISTANCE ADJUSTMENT OF SCAN HEAD ..............................................46
CYCLE OF AN IP IN THE DIGITIZER....................................................................................46
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................63

8.1
Overview .................................................................................................................................63
8.2
Function of the CAN Bus ........................................................................................................63
8.2.1
About the CAN Bus in General ...............................................................................................63
8.2.2
The CAN Bus in the DX-S.......................................................................................................64
8.3
The DX-S Service Client .........................................................................................................65
8.4
Function of the E-labels ..........................................................................................................65

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 4
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S Digitizer as a Part of the CR System
1.1
CR Components
DX-S Detector
A DX-S detector is a MD50 cassette with a needle image plate (NIP) inside.
The MD50 cassette is the container for the image plate. During the handling outside
the digitizer (e.g. exposing the plate) the image plate is in the cassette. It is only
opened inside the digitizer.
The image plate takes the place of the X-ray film in a conventional system. It receives
the X-ray radiation and stores a latent image. The image plates can be reused
thousands of times. The actual restriction of utilization is the mechanical robustness.
The image plate has an internal chip card which holds cassette settings and
scan parameters belonging to a certain X-ray exposure.
NX Processing station
NX is a stand-alone CR/DR Processing station meaning that it operates completely
on its own. It does all the work by itself on one single PC:
Acquiring images,
Processing images,
Displaying images and
Distribution of the released images.
The digitizer and the NX Processing station are directly linked by a
FireWire connection. This is advantageous as the radiographer can stay all the time in
the room, together with the patient.
DX-S Digitizer
The DX-S is used to read the latent image on the image plate (IP). After the cassette
is exposed, it is inserted into the digitizer. Then it is identified via Direct ID on the
NX processing station. The digitizer reads the data on the ID chip, opens the
cassette, takes out the image plate and scans it line by line. The latent image on the
image plate is stimulated by means of a laser beam that emits light according to the
X-ray exposure.
The data from the ID chip is used to set the scan parameters correctly (e.g. speed
class, image plate size, thickness of IP, etc.) for this individual X-ray exposure.
The emitted light is converted into 16 bit, dose linear image data. This image is
transmitted on the fly via FireWire connection to the NX processing station.
After scanning / transmitting is finished the image plate is erased with very bright light
to make it ready for the next exposure. The IP is put back into the cassette, returned
to the user and ready for the next examination.
07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 5
DD+DIS014.05E
1.2
Workflow of the CR System
X-Ray Device
DX-S
All in One
Archive
Station
Type 5163/100
DX-S Cut Down

All in One
Type 5163/105
Printer
figure 1
The above example shows the digitizer connected via FireWire cable to a
NX processing station with installed ASAP (AGFA Scanner Access package).
The digitizer reads the latent image on the image plate. At the DX-S the
demographic data are always entered via Direct ID.
This data can be entered manually or by retrieving the data from a
Hospital or Radiology Information System (HIS/RIS).
There is no ID-tablet used.
After an exposed cassette was inserted into the digitizer, the demographic data have to
be entered in the NX Processing station. As soon as the green ID button in the
NX user interface was clicked, the digitizer starts scanning the image plate.
The digitizer then sends the image data to the NX processing station. If required, a fast
preview option can be activated. On the NX processing station the raw image data are
processed by the MUSICA software. From there the processed images can be sent to
a PACS station for softcopy reporting.
The images can also be sent from the NX processing station to a printer. The images
then can be used for hardcopy reporting and be stored physically.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 6
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S versus CR 25.0, CR 35-X, CR 75.0 and CR 85-X

This section describes the differences of the scanning principles of CR 25.0, CR 35-X,
CR 75.0 and CR 85-X digitizers (see section 2.2) compared to a DX-S digitizer
(see section 2.3).
2.1
Introduction
Below we give a short introduction of the new scanning principle and provide a
comparison of flying spot scanning in conventional CR systems and the
new scan head technology in DX-S.
In DX-S, a new scanning principle is employed for the first time:
the line-at-a-time instead of the point-at-a-time scanning
This line-at-a-time scanning is put into practice with a new scan unit, the so called
scan head, which provides:
a linear, laser-diode based stimulation source.
a light collection/detection system with specially designed optics and multiple,
linear, asymmetric charge coupled devices (CCDs).
Compared to flying spot systems, the scan process is executed at a
stationary fixed image plate.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 7
DD+DIS014.05E
2.2
Conventional CR Systems
2.2.1
Scan Principle - one point-at-a-time
CR
5160_chap02_002.cdr
figure 2
In hitherto existing CR systems the flying spot principle is applied.

The rough processing steps are:
A tightly focused laser beam stimulates the latent image on a moving storage
screen one point-at-a-time.
The emitted light from each point is collected and then converted into an
analog electrical signal by a photo detector the photo multiplier tube (PMT).
These signals are sampled and quantized to produce a digital image.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 8
DD+DIS014.05E
2.3
DX-S System
2.3.1
Scan Principle - one line-at-a-time

As described in section 2.2.1, the image quality of a CR system is a complex
combination of, and often a trade-off between, material properties, hardware design
and processing software.
A number of the limitations shared by flying-spot scanners can be circumvented by a
one line-at-a-time scanning technique.
The following figure shows the new scanning concept:
Scanhead
5160_chap02_003.cdr
figure 3

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 9
DD+DIS014.05E
5160_chap02_004.cdr
figure 4
The Scan Head is one compact unit and consists of the following components:
laser sources (see section 2.3.1.1),
beam shaping optics (see section 2.3.1.1),
intensity control (see section 2.3.1.1),
light collector (see section 2.3.1.2),
filter (see section 2.3.1.3),
photo detectors,
control electronics for pre-processing the captured signal.
In the following, the major components of this scan head are described.
2.3.1.1
Laser Sources, Beam Shaping and Intensity Control

Since an entire line must be scanned at once, a linear array of laser diodes is used.
The diodes are placed in that way, that the strongly diverging (horizontal) beams
overlap along the scan head axis, producing a continuous line of stimulating light with
sufficient power to reach an acceptable read-out depth in the IP.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 10
DD+DIS014.05E
Two plan-convex cylindrical lenses are used to focus the less diverging (vertical) beam
to maintain reasonable detected quantum efficiency (DQE) in slow-scan direction.
Intensity control is needed to minimize static and dynamic exposure fluctuations to the
IP, which cause visible banding artifacts in the image.
Due to variability of laser diode outputs, static intensity variations can be calibrated by
measuring the scanned line profile for a flat-field exposure and correcting the
subsequent scanned data according to the measured profile.
Since the laser diodes are driven directly, dynamic intensity fluctuations are corrected
by using an active feedback.
Laser Diode
Linear CCD
Photodetector
Cylindrical Lenses
Optical filter
Collection Optics
Image Plate
5160_chap02_005.cdr
figure 5
To achieve the usual beam geometry of a flying-spot scanner the stimulation and
detection sections in the scan head are also on the same side of the IP and therefore
angled relative to the plate (see figure above as a view along the scan head axis).
Suitable angles for the stimulation and collection sections were determined by
balancing the optical behavior of the incident beam, the signal output at the
photo detector and DQE.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 11
DD+DIS014.05E
2.3.1.2
Light Collection Optics

The purpose of the light collection optics is to collect and guide as much of the
emitted (blue) light as possible onto the active surface of the photo detector. In
opposition of flying-spot scanners, where light collection is performed by fiber optics,
the scan head uses linear lens arrays.
Two preconditions are achieved. On the one hand the entrance of the collection optics
is as close to the IP surface as possible. On the other hand, the exit surface has to be
close to the photo detector.
Linear
CCD Array
Emitted
Light
Linear Array
Scan Line
5160_chap02_006.cdr
figure 6
2.3.1.3
Optical Filter
The purpose of the optical filter is to block all light that is not stimulated on the IP. This
means, that the filter needs to have high transmission characteristics for the emitted
wavelengths (400-450 nm) and extreme low transmission for all other wavelengths.
The requirements for the optical filter are higher than the ones for flying-spot scanners,
because when the IP is stimulated, IR radiation is also produced. In contrast to the
photo multiplier tube (PMT) of flying-spot scanners, the CCD photo detectors are
sensitive for the wavelength in the IR-range.
07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 12
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S Cassettes
3.1
Introduction
The cassettes for the DX-S are completely different from ADC cassettes.
The rear side color of the cassette shows the type of image plate inside, e.g. gray is
used for the needle image plates (NIP).
The tube side is black.
NOTE:
It is not possible to use other ADC cassettes (e.g. ADC 70, ADC Solo etc.) in
the DX-S.
WARNING:
If you drop a cassette, the needle image plate (IP) may
be damaged and cause severe damage in the digitizer.
Always check the detector (cassette with IP) thoroughly
after it has been dropped.
Note the warning label.
figure 7
5160_chap02_007
CAUTION:
Risk of damage.
NOTE:
Sometimes you may find the term detector in this context.
Detector is used as a superordinate for the entity of cassette and needle IP.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 13
DD+DIS014.05E
3.2
Properties
The cassettes have the following properties:
The cassette name is DX-S HD5.0 detector.
The tube side is made of carbon fiber. (see figure 8)
figure 8
5160_chap02_009
A fleece inside the cassette protects against scratches and a lead foil serves as
back scatter protection.
There is no chip to store patient or examination data. This chip is part of the
image plate.
The cassette can be replaced without initialization.
It has a re-writeable label for grease pen. (see figure 9)
Rubber corners protect cassette and image plate; anyway cassette and
image plate are drop sensitive! (see figure 9)

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 14
DD+DIS014.05E
18 x 24
Clip
Warning
label
Shutter-opening
mechanism
Label
Rubber
corner
protections
Sealing lip
for
Light tightness
figure 9
3.3
Standard formats fit into bucky.
Cassette Formats
DX-S cassettes are available in the following formats:
18 x 24 cm
24 x 30 cm
30 x 15 cm
35 x 43 cm
NOTE:
Only the 35 x 43 detector format is supported for FLFS application.
For more details on FLFS refer to section 3.4.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 15
DD+DIS014.05E
3.4
Applications
The following applications for the cassettes have to be regarded:
The patient can stand on top of the cassette (but avoid the patient standing on the
hinge of the cassette).
Bed side exposures are possible (the physical bending is acceptable).
Wheel chair exposures are possible.
No CR Mammography is supported.
No CR Radiotherapy is supported.
NOTE:
Full Leg Full Spine (= FLFS) is supported.
Mandatory prerequisites for FLFS with the DX-S System are digitizer software
STR_1404 or higher and a NX software version 2.0.68xx or higher.
Please refer to DX-S Service Information Bulletin No. 29 Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) Phase 1b released for DX-S Systems, DD+DIS324.07E
within MedNet GSO Library.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 16
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S Image Plate

After having been exposed in the x-ray modality, the needle image plate contains the
latent image of the patient.
The DX-S takes the scan parameters directly from the exam tree of the
NX processing station.
NOTE:
The cassette and image plate have a warranty period of 1.5 years.
4.1
DX-S Image Plate Principle

The sandwich structure of the IP consists of the following layers:
4.2
Layer
Purpose
Top layer:
Protection against mechanical damages
Coating
(parylene layer):
Protects the phosphor against humidity; thickness 10 m
Phosphor:
Absorption of the latent X-ray image; thickness 500 m
Base:
Aluminum plate
Properties of the NIP (Needle Image Plate)

The NIPs have the following properties:
The IP is built of needles instead of grains and binder.
The material is CsBr.
Less light scattering in phosphor guarantees a sharper or deeper readout.
A thicker phosphor layer allows higher absorption compared with ADC cassettes.
It is sensitive for bending.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 17
DD+DIS014.05E
Same kV dependency as image plates with a powder phosphor layer.
Ghosting: The NIP has to be erased after 2 days of not using.
Fading: About 75% of the image is faded after 1 hour.
The IP is sensitive against mechanical bending.
The sensitivity may change on temperature, humidity and age.
A chip to store the image plate and ID data is included. (see figure 10)
figure 10
5160_chap02_011
For a flat field exposure (2 x 10 Gy) a 1.5 mm Cu filter (spare part number*:
CM+9 5155 1015 2) is used to obtain a dose of 10 Gy.
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
The following exposure parameters have to be selected:
- 12 mAs
- 75 kVp
- 1.3 m (51,2) distance and
- Large focus.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 18
DD+DIS014.05E
Functional Description of the Main Modules
The following overview lists the main modules of the DX-S digitizer:
Assembly No. 100
Frame
(without figure)
Assembly No. 200
Cassette handling unit
(see section 5.1)
Assembly No. 300
IP handling unit
(see section 5.2)
Assembly No. 400
Air supply unit
(see section 5.4)
Assembly No. 500
Scan head
(see section 5.5)
Assembly No. 600
Erasure unit
(see section 5.6)

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 19
DD+DIS014.05E
5.1
Cassette Handling Unit

(Assembly No. 200)
General Overview Cassette Handling Unit:
3
4
5
6
8
5160_chap02_012.cdr
figure 11

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 20
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
fixer clamp-position
sensor
The sensor is located at the left side of the

cassette handling unit. It detects, when the shutter is in
clamp position.
No light can enter into the digitizer and the cassette
in the slot cannot be moved.
ID engine
The ID engine reads the ID and image-specific data

out of the ID chip of the cassette.
The ID engine is also known as RF tag reader.
dimension 24
control sensor
This sensor is a light barrier sensor and detects

cassettes introduced into the cassette slot
(format 18 x 24 cm).
dimension 30
control sensor

(format 30 x 24 cm, 30 x 15 cm).
dimension 35
control sensor

dimension 43
control sensor

fixer home-position
sensor
This sensor detects when the shutter is in

home position.
stepper motor fixer

with break
The stepper motor moves a shutter that fixes the

cassette inside the cassette slot. The shutter prevents
the entrance of light into the digitizer and holds the
cassette in its position.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 21
DD+DIS014.05E
General Overview II Cassette Handling Unit:
16
17
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
5160_chap02_013.cdr
figure 12

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 22
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
opener homeposition sensor
This sensor detects when the opener for the

cassette cover is in home position.
10
cover-opener
control sensor
This sensor monitors the opening of the

cassette cover.
11
cassette handling
board
The cassette handling board controls the data coming

from all sensors of the cassette handling unit.
12
IP adapter board
The IP adapter board controls the data coming from all

sensors of the IP handling unit. Although the
IP adapter board is mounted on the
cassette handling unit it belongs to the IP handling unit
(assembly no. 300, see section 5.2).
13
stepper motor
opener
The stepper motor opens the cassette, so the

image plate can be taken out.
14
locking end control

sensor
This sensor detects when the pin for unlocking the

cassette has unlocked the cassette. In this position the
image plate is fixed inside the cassette cover, so it can
not be removed or fall out.
15
locking cassette
contact sensor
This sensor detects when the pin for unlocking the

cassette gets in contact with the cassette.
16
locking homeposition sensor
The sensor detects when the pin for unlocking the

cassette is in home position.
17
stepper motor
locking
The stepper motor is responsible for the opening of the

cassette locking.
At the bottom side of the cassette handling unit (not visible):

--
dual pulsed
transmitter for snap
hooks
--
dual pulsed receiver

for snap hooks
--
Z-sensor
These two components are placed at the bottom side

of the cassette handling unit and can thus not be seen
on the figure.
The transmitter communicates with the stepper motor
locking, as soon as the snap hooks have clamped
the IP.
The receiver communicates with the stepper motor
linear transport, as soon as the snap hooks have
released the IP.
The light barrier detects when the linear transport has
reached the position in which it is ready to clamp
the IP.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 23
DD+DIS014.05E
5.2
IP Handling Unit
(Assembly No. 300)
Front View IP Handling Unit:
7
2
6
5
5160_chap02_014.cdr
figure 13

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 24
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
sliding rails sensor
The sensor detects when the sliding rails are in

home position.
segments (11x)
In order to fix the image plates of different formats to

the IP handling platform, 11 segments are supplied
independently from each other with vacuum.
linear transport unit

with snap hooks
For the functional description refer to section 5.3.
distance sensor (2x)
The two distance sensors on the right and

left scan head carrier report the distance of the
scan head from the image plate.
stepper motor linear

transport
The stepper motor is responsible for the

linear transport of the image plate which is hold by the
snap hooks.
rubber bumper (2x)
The rubber bumpers prevent shocks and vibrations of

the IP handling unit, which is especially important
during the scan process.
pressure sucker
valve
The valve fixes the image plate to the

IP handling platform with vacuum and releases it after
the scanning process with pressure air.
snap hooks (2x)
For the functional description refer to section 5.3.
sliding rails
The sliding rails guide the image plate when it is

moved to scan position. This prevents scratches on the
IP platform. When the image plate is sucked to the
IP platform, the sliding rails are withdrawn into the
IP platform. After the scanning they lift the image plate
from the IP handling platform.
The sliding rails are moved by the
stepper motor snap hooks.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 25
DD+DIS014.05E
Rear View I IP Handling Unit:
6
7
8
5160_chap02_015.cdr
figure 14

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 26
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
slow scan steel

ropes
The steel ropes fix the IP handling platform in

its position.
Be always careful not to damage the coating on the
steel ropes as it can result in bending on the images.
air supply board
The air supply board controls all modules providing

either compressed air for the air bearings of the
scan head carrier or vacuum to fix the IP to the
IP platform.
vacuum distribution
plate
The vacuum distribution plate consists of

11 vacuum segment valves, 11 vacuum sensors
(comparator circuit), status LEDs, e-labels and
two magnetic valves. Although it is mounted on the
IP handling unit it belongs to the air supply unit
(assembly no. 400).
pressure-sucker
valve
The pressure-sucker valve is a magnetic valve that

sucks the IP to the IP platform as soon as it has
reached scan position. After that the different
segments on the IP platform build up vacuum and hold
the IP consistently in scan position.
begin of scan
sensor
(BOS sensor)
This sensor reports to the scan head when the

image plate is in scan position. Only then the
scanning process can start. (The light barrier detects
the IP because of its L-shape cut-out at the bottom.)
stepper motor slow

scan
The slow scan motor (with gear box and

steel rope drum) moves the scan head carrier with
scan head smoothly over the IP.
slow scan home

position sensor
The light barrier controls the home position of the

scan head carrier.
bottom-end control
sensor
The light barrier prevents the scan head carrier from

crashing to the frame in case of a software failure or
defective upper-end control sensor (10). As soon as
the bottom-end control sensor is interrupted, the
IP handling board is powered off.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 27
DD+DIS014.05E
Rear View II IP Handling Unit:

18
19
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
5160_chap02_016.cdr
figure 15

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 28
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
air bearings
The scan head is bedded in air bearings with a

pressure of 2.5 bar. These bearings prevent any
shocks and vibrations to the scan head.
The air bearings thus allow a smooth movement of the
scan head.
10
upper-end control
sensor
This sensor controls the upper end of the range of the

scan head carrier.
11
collision control
sensor
This sensor prevents the scan head carrier from

crashing into the erasure unit in case of a
software failure or defective light barrier
(10, upper end control sensor). As soon as this sensor
is interrupted, the IP handling board is powered off.
12
connector homeposition sensor
The light barrier controls the home position of the

connector assembly.
13
steel ropes
IP platform
The steel ropes have predefined tension and lift the

IP platform in order to decrease its weight on the
rubber bumpers.
14
stepper motor snap

hooks
The stepper motor is responsible for the opening and

closing of the snap hooks. It also moves the lift-off bars
that lift the image plate from the IP handling platform
after scanning.
15
snap hook homeposition sensor
The light barrier detects when the snap hooks have

reached their home position.
16
IP handling board
The IP handling board controls all data coming from

the sensors of the IP platform.
17
stepper motor
connector
The connector moves the two bolts of the connector

unit till they engage in the respective holes in the
cassette unit. Cassette handling unit and IP platform
are connected to each other only during IP transport.
They are disengaged during scanning. Meanwhile, the
IP platform only rests on 3 rubber bearings
18
connector
The connector acts as an adjustment bolt, which drives

into the cassette unit when the IP is taken out or into
the cassette. This assures a high accuracy between
the cassette unit and the IP platform.
19
slow scan system
The following components are part of the

slow scan system:
The steel ropes with defined tension,
The slow scan stepper motor with gear and
The scan head carrier with air bearing.

Do not make any changes to this unit and take care
not to damage any parts.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 29
DD+DIS014.05E
5.3
Transport Unit
General Overview Transport Unit:
4
5
5160_chap02_017.cdr
figure 16

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 30
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
stepper motor snap

hooks
The stepper motor is responsible for the opening and

closing of the snap hooks. It also moves the
sliding rails that lift the image plate from the
IP handling platform after scanning.
snap hooks (2x)
The snap hooks clamp the image plate.
linear transport
The linear transport with snap hooks takes the

image plate out of the cassette cover, moves it to the
scan position and after the scan process takes it back
into the cassette cover.
The IP is held by the snap hooks during the complete
scan process.
linear transport
home position
sensor
The light barrier reports, when the linear transport is in

home position.
stepper motor linear

transport
The stepper motor is responsible for the

linear transport of the image plate which is held by the
snap hooks.
pulley with toothed

belt
The stepper motor linear transport moves the

linear transport by means of a pulley.
Slot A is open when the snap hooks have engaged properly with the IP. This
is important as the IP is not released until the stepper motor locking gets the
signal from the dual pulsed transmitter for snap hooks that the snap hooks
hold the IP securely.
Slot B is open when the snap hooks have completely released the scanned
and erased IP. This is important as the stepper motor linear transport does
not start to move the linear transport downwards until it has received the
signal from the dual pulsed receiver for snap hooks.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 31
DD+DIS014.05E
5.4
Air Supply Unit

(Assembly No. 400)
General Overview I Air Supply Unit:
8
9
13
10
5
6
11
12
5160_chap02_020a.cdr
figure 17

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 32
DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
The interior of the air supply unit contains no serviceable parts and must not
be opened.
In the air supply unit the vacuum for the suction of the IP and the air pressure for the
scan head air bearings are produced.
The air pressure produced is 2.5 bar, and the vacuum 0.6 bar.
No.
Name
Function
chimney
Leads the heated and humidified air from the

air supply unit out of the device.
condensation water spray

nozzle
Humidifies the heated air, which is coming

from the pumps with the water from
the dehumidifier.
pressure pump with vibration

damper
It provides pressure for the air bearings.
pressure pump start valve
Provides controlled pressure ramp up for

filling the pressure accumulator.
pressure safety valve
Safety valve for the increasing of

the overpressure.
pressure sucker valve
It sucks the IP when it has reached the

scan position.
exhaust air damper of the

vacuum pump
It reduces the noise of the exhaust air of the

vacuum pump.
vacuum accumulator valve
Its a valve to build up vacuum in the

vacuum accumulator.
vacuum airing valve
Its a valve to air the vacuum channel of the

sucked IP.
10
vacuum distributor
Connector of 4 vacuum hoses.
11
air pressure release button
To release compressed air from the

pressure tank before starting
service interventions.
12
drainage valves
A valve for outlet air, which is vaporized in

the vacuum channel, during the suction of
the IP.
13
vacuum pump with vibration

damper
Pump for building up vacuum in the

vacuum accumulator.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 33
DD+DIS014.05E
General Overview II Air Supply Unit:
19
16
17
18
15
14
5160_chap02_020b.cdr
figure 18

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 34
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
14
vacuum accumulator
(not visible)
The Vacuum accumulator is an integral part

of the air supply unit and not visible from
the outside.
15
vacuum pump start valve
Provides controlled vacuum ramp up for filling

the vacuum accumulator for the suction of
the IP.
16
air pressure conditioning unit
Cleans, dehumidifies and provides constant

pressure for the air bearings.
17
air inlet filter of the

pressure pump
Filters the air before it reaches the

pressure pump.
18
fan for pumps
Cools the pumps and leads heated air

through the chimney to the outside of
the device.
19
air control board
Controls the whole air flow in the DX-S.
The air pressure tanks are located in the frame of the digitizer and can thus not be
seen in figure 17 and 18.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 35
DD+DIS014.05E
Air Pressure Conditioning Unit:
3
4
6
5
5160_chap02_021.cdr
figure 19

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 36
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
micro filter 0.01 m
This micro filter is a compensation filter in case the

micro filter (4) should fail.
pressure sensor
It controls the air pressure.
dehumidifier
The humidity of the air is condensed and the

condensate water is sprayed via a
nozzle (2, air supply unit) into the chimney, from where
it is fed out of the digitizer.
micro filter 0.01 m
This very fine filter makes sure that the air used in the
digitizer is absolutely clean.
This is very important for the function of the
components and the cleanliness of the image plate.
micro filter 5 m
This very fine filter makes sure that the air used in the
digitizer is absolutely clean.
air bearing valve
Its a magnetic valve for the air bearings of the

scan head.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 37
DD+DIS014.05E
5.5
Scan Head
(Assembly No. 500)
General Overview Scan Head:
10
9
8
11
7
6
5
4
5160_chap02_018.cdr
figure 20

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 38
DD+DIS014.05E
The scan head scans the IP by stimulating and detecting the data. (see section 2.3)
It has several optical elements, a CCD array with 6 CCDs and 40 laser diodes with an
effect of 50 mW on the IP.
No.
Name
Function
stepper motor right

distance
It moves the spindle to set the focus distance on the

right hand side.
right precision
switch
It reports the distance of the scan head to the

image plate and is not exchangeable.
right air bearing for

the scan head
The air bearings allow a smooth movement of the

scan head carrier.
right distance homeposition sensor
The distance sensor reports when the scan head is in

home position.
laser diodes board
For linear scanning 40 diodes are mounted on

the board.
scan head control

board
It controls all scan head activities.
left precision switch
Reports the distance of the scan head to the

image plate. Not exchangeable.
left distance homeposition sensor

(not visible)
The distance sensor reports when the scan head is in

home position.
stepper motor left

distance
It moves the spindle to set the focus distance on the

left hand side.
10
left air bearing for

the scan head
The air bearings allow a smooth movement of the

scan head carrier.
11
E-label scan head
In the e-label, specific device data of the scan head

are stored. Access the data via the
DX-S service client.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 39
DD+DIS014.05E
Scan Head Carrier:
5160_chap02_019.cdr
figure 21

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 40
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
flexboard
The flexible PCB allows data transmission, while the

scan head is moving.
scan head control

board
It controls all scan head activities.
distribution board
Is the data interface between SHI board and

flexboard/scan head.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 41
DD+DIS014.05E
5.6
Erasure Unit
(Assembly No. 600)
5.6.1
Flashlight Erasure Unit (SN < 1402)

General Overview Flashlight Erasure Unit:
6
9
2
5
3
5160_chap02_022.cdr
figure 22

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 42
DD+DIS014.05E
No.
Name
Function
cover air outlet
The cooling air leaves the erasure unit.
light source
A stroboscopic light is used to erase the information on

the image plate.
front glass with filter
A filter behind the front glass protects the image plate

from heat dissipation.
fan
The fan moves the cooling air through the air duct.
cover air inlet
Bearing where the cooling air enters the erasure unit.
air duct
The erasure unit becomes very hot during the

erasure process. Therefore cooling air is led through.
glass fiber
connection I
The erasure unit and the IP handling unit are

connected via a glass fiber cable. From this port, data
is sent to the IP handling unit.
glass fiber
connection II
The erasure unit and the IP handling unit are

connected via a glass fiber cable. At this port, data is
received from the IP handling unit.
power connection
The erasure unit uses line voltage and transforms it to

high voltage internally.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 43
DD+DIS014.05E
5.6.2
LED Erasure Unit (SN 1402)

General Overview LED Erasure Unit:
1
2
5160_chap02_060.cdr
figure 23
No.
Name
Function
light source
LEDs are used to erase the information on the

image plate.
power connection
flat band cable
Main voltage.
The flat band cable connects the erasure unit to the
distribution board.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 44
DD+DIS014.05E
5.6.3
Circuit Diagram for Flashlight Erasure Unit and LED Erasure Unit
General Overview Power Supply:
Line voltage 85V-264V 50/60Hz
Chassis of main
Power supply
Inlet
Connector
IEC320/C14
85 264V 50/60Hz
Remote
ON/OFF
Line filter
(Maximal allowable current 264V/230A and
132V/130A)
Main power supply
Switch on/off the

line voltage for
the erasure unit
(Maximal allowable
current 264V/230A
and 132V/130A).
- Flashlight erasure unit:
Line voltage will be
transformed to high voltage
within the internal power unit.
- LED erasure unit:
Line voltage will not be
transformed to
high voltage.
ON/OFF
Outputs V1-V8
CTRL-lines
Integrated
circuit (see
Paragraph 7.0)
FAN
5160_chap02_023_new.cdr
figure 24

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 45
DD+DIS014.05E
Principle of Distance Adjustment of Scan Head

A very accurate distance adjustment of the scan head is essential for high
quality images.
For this, the elements of the scan head are arranged in a parallelogram. One rotation
of the spindles results in a very little step of the scan head towards the IP.
For an accurate distance adjustment, the spindles on the right and left hand side are
driven independently by two stepper motors.
Cycle of an IP in the Digitizer

(1)
Insert the cassette into the slot.
figure 25
After the cassette has been inserted into the slot the digitizer is performing the
following steps automatically:
1. The sensor R208 detects the
cassette in the slot.
R208
figure 26

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 46
DD+DIS014.05E
2. The different light barriers

detect the different possible
cassette formats:
B276:
B277:
B278:
B279:
24 x 18 cm
30 x 24 cm
35 x 35 cm
43 x 35 cm
B276
B277
B278
B279
figure 27
3. The light barrier B253 detects

when the shutter is in
home position.
B255
The light barrier B255 detects

when the shutter is in
clamp position no light can
enter into the digitizer and the
cassette is fixed in the slot.
B253
figure 28
4. Stepper motor M213 moves

the belts with the shutter until
it is in the clamp position.
M213
figure 29

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 47
DD+DIS014.05E
5. The cassette reader B258

reads out the cassette settings
and the examination specific
scan parameters.
B258
figure 30
6. The B256 detects when the

Pin for unlocking the cassette
is in home position.
M216
B256
Pin
The motor M216 unlocks the

cassette and fixes the IP with
the pin.
5160_chap02_030.cd
figure 31
7. The light barrier B252 detects

when the pin for unlocking the
cassettes gets in contact with
the cassette.
B252
5160_chap02_031.cd
figure 32

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 48
DD+DIS014.05E
8. The B257 detects when the pin

has unlocked the cassette.
Simultaneously the image plate
is fixed inside the
cassette cover.
B257
5160_chap02_032.cdr
figure 33
9. The motor M217 opens the

cassette, so that the image
plate can be taken out.
M217
figure 34

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 49
DD+DIS014.05E
10. The IP transport unit moves up

to clamp the image plate for the
following scan process.
figure 35

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 50
DD+DIS014.05E
11. The motor M320 is

responsible for opening and
closing of the snap hooks.
M320
5160_chap02_035.cdr
figure 36
12. The snap hooks clamp the

image plate.
5160_chap02_036.cdr
figure 37

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 51
DD+DIS014.05E
13. The IP is now being unlocked

and ready to be taken out of
the cassette
5160_chap02_037.cdr
figure 38
14. The IP transport unit takes the

image plate out of the
cassette cover and moves it to
the scan position.
During scanning the
snap hooks keep the
image plate always fixed.
5160_chap02_038.cdr
figure 39
07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 52
DD+DIS014.05E
15. The pressure sucker valve MG4

sucks the IP and fixes it with
vacuum to the IP platform.
MG4
5160_chap02_039.cdr
figure 40
16. To hold the IP smooth to the

platform the 11 valves of the
different segments together with
the MG4 suck the IP in a defined
order and release it after the
scanning process.
MG4
8
10
2
11
5160_chap02_040.cdr
figure 41

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 53
DD+DIS014.05E
17. The motors M510 / M511 move

the spindles to set the focus
distance on the right and left
hand side.
M510
M511
5160_chap02_041.cdr
figure 42
18. The B569 / B570

(home position sensors) detect
the home position of the
scan head.
B569
B570
5160_chap02_042.cdr
figure 43

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 54
DD+DIS014.05E
19. Before scanning, the two

distance sensors S505 / S506
report the distance of the
scan head to the image plate.
S505
S506
not visible
5160_chap02_043.cdr
figure 44
20. Board B574 bears 40 laser

diodes for linear scanning.
The B572 controls all
scan head activities.
B572
B574
5160_chap02_044.cdr
figure 45

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 55
DD+DIS014.05E
21. The scan head scans the IP

line-by-line while moving in
exactly defined slow-scan
steps.
After scanning, the scan head
returns to home position.
5160_chap02_045.cdr
figure 46
22. The light barrier B386 is the

upper end control sensor.
It limits the top range of the
scan head.
B386
5160_chap02_046.cdr
figure 47

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 56
DD+DIS014.05E
23. The light barrier B362 is the

lower end control sensor. It
limits the bottom range of the
scan head.
The scan head is now in its
home position.
B362
5160_chap02_047.cdr
figure 48
24. The B366 detects when the

sliding rails are in home
position.
The sliding rails guide the
image plate to scan position
when the IP moves. This
prevents from scratches on the
IP platform.
B366
When the image plate is sucked

to the IP platform, the sliding
rails are withdrawn into the
IP platform.
5160_chap02_048.cdr
figure 49

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 57
DD+DIS014.05E
25. After the scanning they lift the

image plate from the
IP handling platform.
The sliding rails are moved by
the stepper motor snap hooks.
5160_chap02_049.cdr
figure 50
26. The IP transport unit returns the

IP to the cassette.
5160_chap02_050.cdr
figure 51

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 58
DD+DIS014.05E
27. While passing the erasure unit

either a stroboscopic light in
the flashlight erasure unit or
LEDs in front of the LED
erasure unit erase the
information on the image plate.
stroboscopic light
(figure 52 shows the

stroboscopic light of the old
flashlight erasure unit)
figure 52
28. The image plate is returned into
the cassette.
figure 53

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 59
DD+DIS014.05E
29. After the image plate is back in

the cassette it gets fixed by the
locking mechanism again.
The motor M320 is responsible
for opening and closing of the
snap hooks.
The snap hooks release the IP
and return to their
home position.
M320
5160_chap02_035.cdr
figure 54
30. The stepper motor M217 closes

the cassette.
M217
5160_chap02_054.cdr
figure 55

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 60
DD+DIS014.05E
31. Stepper motor M216 moves

back the Pin and B257 detects
when the Pin is in
home position.
M216
B257
Pin
The cassette is now locked.
5160_chap02_055.cdr
figure 56
32. The ID engine B258 deletes the

examination specific
scan parameters from the
ID-chip on the IP.
B258
5160_chap02_056.cdr
figure 57

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 61
DD+DIS014.05E
33. Stepper motor M213 moves the

belts with the shutter back into
home position.
M213
5160_chap02_057.cdr
figure 58
34. Remove the cassette from the

slot.
The cassette and the inserted
IP are now ready for the
next exposure.
5160_chap02_058.cdr
figure 59

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 62
DD+DIS014.05E
Software Architecture
8.1
Overview
The NX software and the ASAP (Agfa scanner access package) incl. the
DX-S service client (DX-S service software) are installed on the NX processing station.
This PC is also called Control PC of the DX-S system.
Interaction between the NX processing station and the ASAP is done via a
TWAIN interface on the PC.
Connection to the SHI board of the digitizer takes place via FireWire cable.
From there, the software is distributed to the microcontrollers of the corresponding
hardware components via CAN bus.
Not only allows the software the full functionality of the digitizer, but also the easy
accessibility to service facilities and hardware components.
8.2
Function of the CAN Bus

For the information flow between the units of the DX-S a CAN bus is used. In this
section the basic function of a CAN bus will be explained.
8.2.1
About the CAN Bus in General

CAN (Control Area Network) is a communication protocol which allows the
communication between sensors and actuators (participants) via only one medium.
The CAN bus has been developed by Bosch in the 1980ies and is since then
successfully used in a wide range of technical applications.
The main advantages of the CAN bus compared to the traditional cabling between
various components are its high transmission reliability and speed as well as the
reduction of the number of cables and thus a reduction of the complexity and the
weight of the cabling.
The participants of the CAN bus can send and/or receive messages from/to
other participants.
A message is sent when:
another participant asks for information (remote request).
an event occurs (event triggered communication).

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 63
DD+DIS014.05E
8.2.2
The CAN Bus in the DX-S

The following boards and sensors/actuators of the DX-S are connected to the CAN bus
as participants:
User interface: LCD, touch panel and status indicator.
Cassette handling board: tag reader, cassette fixer, cassette opener and
cassette locking.
SHI board: connection to the Control PC via FireWire.
Power supply.
IP handling board: linear transport, snap hooks, slow scan and connector.
Air control board: vacuum fixation and air pressure conditioning unit.
Distribution board: scan head.
SHI
board
power
supply
scan head
QS station
cassette
handling
board
vacuum fixation
air pressure conditioning unit
tag reader
cassette fixer
cassette opener
cassette locking
user
interface
linear transport
snaphooks
slow scan
connector
LCD
touch panel
status indicator
Graphical overview of the CAN bus in the DX-S Digitizer:
IP handling
board
air control
board
distribution
board
CAN bus
5160_chap02_059.cdr
figure 60
In the DX-S, the user interface and the distribution board act as resistances.
Therefore the communication between the participants is only possible when these two
are connected to the CAN bus.
If one of the other participants fail, it automatically disconnects himself from the
CAN bus and the communication between the others is still possible.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 64
DD+DIS014.05E
Examples for the information flow via CAN bus in the DX-S digitizer:
(1) When the cassette opener has opened the cassette, the IP is fixed inside the
cassette to prevent it from falling down.
The cassette opener does not release the IP until it gets the information from the
snap hooks, that they have hooked the IP.
(2) The slow scan does not start to move the scan head towards the IP unless it gets
the confirmation that the vacuum has been built up holding the IP firmly to the
IP platform.
NOTE:
The SHI board and the control PC are linked via a FireWire cable. The SHI board gets
information from the other participants via CAN bus, and sends it to the
control PC via FireWire.
This information flow also works vice versa:
Information from the control PC is sent via FireWire to the SHI board and from there
via CAN bus to the other participants.
8.3
The DX-S Service Client

The DX-S service client is the main service tool of the field service engineer.
For a detailed description of its structure and functions refer to
Chapter 3.2 Tools and auxiliary means of this Service Manual.
8.4
Function of the E-labels

The main modules of the DX-S are equipped with e-labels which contain the
module-specific settings. The e-labels replace the hardware modification floppies
known from other digitizers.

07-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 2 / 65
Chapter 2
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
DX-S System
DX-S System
The Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart DX-S System informs the

Field Service Engineer about released DX-S System versions and their
components.
This document will be updated regularly.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.5
05-2010
Added NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100. For details see DX-S

system version 12.
Added NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200. For details see DX-S
system version 13.
Adapted layout.
Document
Title
NX Service Documentation
NX Software / Hardware Compatibility Charts
DX-S System Upgrade References: See section 2 of this document.


1

eq_02_functional__sw_hw_
compatibility_e_template_v02
DD+DIS294.07E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 2
DD+DIS294.07E
LIST OF CONTENTS
SOFTWARE / HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY CHART DX-S SYSTEM ..................................4

1.1
DX-S System Overview and Change History ...........................................................................5
1.2
DX-S System Components up to DX-System Version 9 ..........................................................6
1.3
DX-S System Components from DX-System Version 10 to Version 13...................................7
1.4
DX-S System Upgrade Possibilities..........................................................................................8
DX-S SYSTEM UPGRADE REFERENCES .............................................................................8

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 3
DD+DIS294.07E
Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart DX-S System

The Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart DX-S System
Provides an overview of all released DX-S System components, like

o
Software
Hardware
Supported applications
within a defined DX-S System.
Indicates the changes from one DX-S System version to another.
Indicates which DX-S System components are released for the respective
DX-S System Versions with `yes and `no answers.
Supports when a system is planned to be upgraded. The required system

components can be analyzed and identified based on the chart.
Informs about upgrade possibilities and references.
NOTE:
The DX-S System version contains a continuous number which will be increased when
one of the delivered system components changes.
NOTE:
Explanation to tables in sections 1.2 and 1.3:
The system version contains a continuous number which increases when one of the
delivered system components changes.
9
-
= Yes, component is compatible for this system version.

= No, component is not compatible for this system version.

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 4
DD+DIS294.07E
1.1
DX-S System Overview and Change History

The following table explains the changes that have been made to the listed DX-S
systems:
DX-S System Version
System changes compared to previous version
Not applicable
Not applicable
Introduction of digitizer software version STR_1306
Introduction of NX 1.0.3203 (SP1 SU1) and NX 1.0.3203 (SP1 SU2)
Introduction of NX 2.0.6805
Introduction of FLFS application and Cut-down cart
Introduction of NX 2.0.6805 (SU1) & CR HD5.0 FLFS Cassette
Introduction of digitizer software version STR_1404B

(LED erasure unit)
10
11
Introduction of NX 2008 and DELL 755 hardware + RAID,

Introduction of NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 on hardware
Dell Optiplex 960, HP DC 7800
Introduction of NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 SU1 on hardware
Dell Optiplex 960, HP DC 7900
12
Introduction of NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100 with digitizer software STR_1505.

For DX-D 500 system only.
13
Introduction of NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 with digitizer software STR_1505

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 5
DD+DIS294.07E
1.2
DX-S System Components up to DX-System Version 9

Hardware
and / or
Software
Compatibility of Components towards DX-S System

Versions
Component description
V4
V5
V6
V8
V9
9
9
Version 1.0.3203 (SP1 SU1)
9
9
9
9
Version 2.0.6805
9
9
9
9
DX-S
STR_1404
Digitizer with
software STR_1404B
version
STR_1504
STR_1505
Version 1.0.3203 (SP1)
Version 2.0.6805 (SU1)

NX
Workstation
software
Version 2008
Version 2.0.8000/3.0.8000
Version 2.0.8000/3.0.8000 (SU1)
Version 2.0.8100/3.0.8100
Version 2.0.8200/3.0.8200
CR HD5.0 General Detector (18 x 24cm) General Rad.
CR HD5.0 FLFS Detector (35 x 43 cm)3
CR HD5.0 FLFS Cassette (35 x 43 cm)3
Accessory: All-in-One cart
Accessory: All-in-One cart (Cut-down version)
-1)
-1)
-1)
-1)
Accessory: UPS
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Accessory: CR Full Body Cassette Holder
Accessory: Optional CR Anti-scatter grid version 2
Accessory: Optional CR EasyLift
General Radiology
Full Leg Full Spine
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
CR HD5.0 General Detector (35 x 43cm) GeneralRad.

Detector/
Cassette
Accessory
Application
V7
2)
V3
V1&2
STR_1306
not
applicable
Transformer
CR Touch monitor

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 6
DD+DIS294.07E
1.3
DX-S System Components from DX-System Version 10 to Version 13
Hardware
and / or
Software
Compatibility of
Components towards DX-S
System Versions
Component description
V 10
V 11
V 12
V 13
9
9
9
STR_1505
Version 1.0.3203 (SP1)

STR_1306
STR_1404
DX-S
Digitizer with STR_1404B
software
STR_1504
version
Version 2.0.6805
NX
Workstation
software Version 2008
Detector/
Cassette
Version 2.0.8000/3.0.8000
Version 2.0.8000/3.0.8000 (SU1)
Version 2.0.8100/3.0.8100
Version 2.0.8200/3.0.8200
9
9
CR HD5.0 FLFS Detector (35 x 43 cm)3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Accessory: All-in-One cart

Accessory: All-in-One cart (Cut-down version)
Accessory: UPS
Transformer
CR Touch monitor
Accessory: CR Full Body Cassette Holder
Accessory: Optional CR Anti-scatter grid version 2
Accessory: Optional CR EasyLift
Application
9
9
9
CR HD5.0 FLFS Cassette (35 x 43 cm)3
Accessory
9
9
General Radiology
Full Leg Full Spine
NOTE:
Remarks for overview tables DX-S System Components:
1)
= Accessory All-in-One cart (Cut-down version) has been released with DX-S System
version 7 but can be used with all DX-S System versions.
2)
= With the release of `DX-S System version 8 the `DX-S System version 7 is
obsolete as a new installation.
3)
= FLFS Detector (= NIP together with FLFS cassette) and FLFS cassette are
available via separate ABC-Codes.
05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 7
DD+DIS294.07E
NOTE:
For further information about the compatibility of the NX software (e.g. with the NX
workstation hardware), refer to the Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart of the
respective NX Service Documentation on MedNet GSO Library.
Path:
Computed Radiography CR Workstation Software <NX version> Technical
Documentation Chapter 01 - Software-Hardware Compatibility Chart
1.4
DX-S System Upgrade Possibilities

If upgrades of the DX-S System are planned, the selection of the components must
result in a valid DX-S System version as described in sections 1.2 and 1.3, DX-System
versions 3 13.
DX-S System Upgrade References

In case an upgrade is planned the following list provides references with details on how
to upgrade the respective DX-S System components.
Upgrade possibilities for NX Workstation Software:
NX 1.0: Chapter 09, Update Installation, Installation Instruction for update
to NX 1.0.3203 SU1, DD+DIS357.06E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NX 1.0: Chapter 09, Upgrade Installation, Installation Instruction for Update
NX 2.0: Chapter 09, Installation Instruction for upgrade of NX 1.0 or NX 2.0.1703 to
NX 2.0.68xx, DD+DIS049.07E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NX 2.0: Chapter 09, Installation Instruction for upgrade to Software Version 2.0.6805
(SU1), DD+DIS319.07E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NX 2.0: Chapter 09, Installation Instruction for Update from NX 2.0.6805/6805 SU1
NX 2008: Chapter 07, Installation Instruction for Upgrade of NX 1.0 or NX 2.0 to
NX 2008, DD+DIS054.08E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000: Chapter 07, Installation Instruction for Upgrade from
NX 1.0 / NX 2.0 / NX 2008 to NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000, DD+DIS265.08E
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 8
DD+DIS294.07E
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000: Chapter 07, Installation Instruction for Upgrade of QS to NX

2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000, DD+DIS264.08E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000: Chapter 07, Installation Instruction for Update to
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 Service Update 1 (SU1), DD+DIS 152.09E
NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100: Upgrades are not supported.
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200: Chapter 07, Installation Instruction for Upgrade from
NX 1.0 / NX 2.0 / NX 2008 or NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000, DD+DIS203.09E
Upgrade possibilities for DX-S Digitizer Software:
DX-S - Chapter 07 - Field Modifications. Installation Instructions for DX-S
Digitizer Software STR_1404, DD+DIS074.07E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
DX-S - Freeware - DX-S - Software - Device Software STR_1404B, Installation
Instructions can be found in the Read me.txt file attached to the software.
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
DX-S - Freeware - DX-S Software Device Software STR_1504, Installation
Instructions can be found in the enclosure Installation Instruction for STR_1504
(DD+DIS080.08E) attached to the software (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
DX-S - Freeware - DX-S Software Device Software STR_1505, Installation
Instructions can be found in the enclosure Installation Instruction for STR_1504 and
STR_1505 (DD+DIS086.10E) attached to the software
Upgrade to FLFS application for already installed DX-S Systems:

DX-S - Service Information Bulletin No. 29 - Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) Phase 1b
released for DX-S Systems, DD+DIS324.07E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).

05-2010
DX-S System
Chapter 2 / 9
Chapter 3.1
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Safety Guidelines / Generic Repair Instruction
DX-S
Type 5160

This document describes all safety information and instructions the field service
engineer must know when working with DX-S.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.2
09-2007
Changed Type Label description.

Details see section 2.5.
Added LED erasure unit to section 2.4.
Document
Title
Chapter 1
Chapter 11


eq_03-1_safety-repair_e_template_v07
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 2
DD+DIS014.05E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
INTENDED USE .......................................................................................................................4
LABELS IN AND ON THE DEVICE ..........................................................................................5
2.1
Supplementary Protective Earth Connector .............................................................................5
2.2
Laser Product............................................................................................................................6
2.3
FireWire Connector...................................................................................................................8
2.4
Erasure Unit ..............................................................................................................................9
2.5
Type Label ..............................................................................................................................10
2.6
Detector...................................................................................................................................11
2.6.1
Cassettes ................................................................................................................................11
2.6.2
Image Plates ...........................................................................................................................11
SAFETY NOTES FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................................................................12

3.1
Safety Notes for Installation ....................................................................................................12
3.2
Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work..............................................15
3.3
Safety Notes for Installation Planning.....................................................................................18
3.4
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S Digitizer (without Isolation Transformer) ...............19
3.5

3.6
Safety Notes for Cleaning the All in One System ...................................................................20

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Intended Use
The digitizer must only be used to scan exposed X-ray cassettes, containing an
erasable image plate (IP).
It is intended that the digitizer is only operated in a radiological environment by
qualified staff.
This device (digitizer) is part of a system, consisting of:
X-ray cassettes with erasable phosphor image plates

and
a workstation where the X-ray cassettes are identified and the resulting
digital image information is further processed and routed.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 4
DD+DIS014.05E
Repair and Service

Labels in and on the Device

Always take into account the markings and labels provided on the inside and outside of
the machine. A brief overview of these markings and labels and their meaning is given
below.
2.1
Supplementary Protective Earth Connector

WARNING:
Risk of electrical shock.
Remove the power supply before removing the supplementary earth
connector.
When reconnecting the supplementary earth connector or replacing the
power supply check the protective earth resistance according to the
national regulations.
The Supplementary protective earth connector provides a connection between the
digitizer and the potential equalization bus bar of the electrical system as found in
medical environments.
5160_chap31_001.cdr
figure 1

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 5
DD+DIS014.05E
2.2
Repair and Service

Laser Product
5160_chap31_002.cdr
figure 2
The corresponding label is located at the right bottom side on the rear side of the
digitizer (see figure 2).

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 6
DD+DIS014.05E
Subject
Repair and Service

Laser light when digitizer is opened.
WARNING:
Laser beam! Risk of serious eye
damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact.
Do not open the optic module.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam risk of reflection.
NOTE:
With covers closed the digitizer is a Class 1
laser product and not dangerous to the
human eye or skin.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
2.3
FireWire Connector
There is a label near the FireWire connection which indicates the direction of the
connector.
connector
direction
conn
dire ector
ctio
n
5160 chap31 003.cdr
figure 3

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 8
DD+DIS014.05E
2.4
Repair and Service

Erasure Unit
NOTE:
Digitizers with SN 1402 are equipped ex factory with the LED erasure unit.
If not replaced, digitizers with lower serial numbers are equipped with the
flash erasure unit.
Subject
Hot surface of flash and LED erasure unit
WARNING:
The erasure unit is hot - up to 200 C: Risk of burns.
Avoid contact with the Erasure Unit.
Observe the relevant sticker on the Erasure Unit.
5160_chap31_007.cdr
figure 4
Subject
Flash light of flash erasure unit
CAUTION:
Flash Light! Risk of eye damage!

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 9
DD+DIS014.05E
2.5
Repair and Service

Type Label
The type label contains various data.

The following are particularly
important for the field service engineer:
Type with subtype indication
Serial number
Date of manufacturing
5160_chap31_006.cdr
figure 5

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 10
DD+DIS014.05E
2.6
Detector
2.6.1
Cassettes
Task
Repair and Service

Sensitive cassettes and image plates.
WARNING:
If you drop a cassette, the needle image plate (IP) may be
damaged and cause severe damage in the digitizer.
Always check the detector (cassette with IP) thoroughly after it
has been dropped.
2.6.2
Task
Image Plates
Cleaning of image plate.
CAUTION:
The needle image plate (IP) is fragile and very expensive: Risk of damage.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Safety Notes for Service Activities

Check the following points visually with every service visit:
3.1
Condition of the insulation of the mains plug / mains cable
Efficiency of the protective earth on metal panel parts

(protective earth connected and spring contacts OK)
Correct condition of the protection covers
Safety Notes for Installation
Subject
Sharp edges at cart and transporting heavy components.

CAUTION:
Task
Setting input voltage at UPS.

CAUTION:
There are 230 V and 115 V versions of the UPS.
Task
Transporting the UPS.

CAUTION:
Lift UPS always carefully!
Do not slide the UPS over cables!

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 12
DD+DIS014.05E
Task
Repair and Service

Transporting isolation transformer, monitor or UPS.

CAUTION:
Task
Adjusting the height of the monitor.

CAUTION:
Device is heavy and may cause crush injuries. If it falls down, sensitive
components are damaged.
Height adjustment has to be carried out by at least two persons!
Take care that lengths of the used cables permit the desired
height adjustment!
Task
Removing the shipping brackets of the digitizer.

CAUTION:
Task
Mounting the scan head.

CAUTION:
When installing the scan head care must be taken.
Touch the scan head only at the red handles of the installation bracket

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 13
DD+DIS014.05E
Task
Repair and Service

Transporting the scan head.

CAUTION:
Remove the scan head whenever the digitizer needs to be transported and shock and
Task
Setting output voltage at isolation transformer.

CAUTION:
Output voltage at isolation transformer must be 230 V!
Never change jumper settings on output side!
Subject
Conformity of wall outlet.

CAUTION:
In USA:
Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable to connect the All in One with the wall outlet.
Task

CAUTION:
Risk of damage.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 14
DD+DIS014.05E
Task
Repair and Service

Ensuring same grounding.

WARNING:
In this case the leakage current via FireWire cable may exceed the limits as defined
by IEC 60601:
Confirm that both, NX workstation and digitizer are connected to the same ground,
e.g. via multiple socket or UPS.
Task
Ensuring proper communication between digitizer and NX.

WARNING:
Using a FireWire cable > 4.5 m may lead to unstable or no communication
between digitizer and NX workstation: Retakes possible.
Do not use a FireWire cable between digitizer and NX with a length > 4.5 m or > 15 ft
respectively.
3.2
Safety Notes for preventive and corrective Maintenance Work

Task
Performing an endurance run.

WARNING:
If the safety switch is overridden with a service key there are risks of injuries.
Keep your hair, hands and garments away from the device.
Remove service key before the device is handed over to the customer.
Laser beam!
Risk of serious eye damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact with the laser beam.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 15
DD+DIS014.05E
Task
Repair and Service

Replacements at the IP platform.

CAUTION:
The image plate platform is highly sensitive. Scratches will require replacement
of the digitizer.
Care must be taken when replacing the stepper motor slow scan with gear box.
Task
Protecting the scan head during maintenance.

CAUTION:
Parts falling on the scan head can lead to damage.
Protect the scan head with a film or other similar material.
Task
Replacing components at the IP platform.

CAUTION:
Damage of the coating of the slow scan steel ropes results in banding on the
images!
Care must be taken.
Task
Protecting the scan head from electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION:
Working on the scan head without a grounding strap can damage the scan
head electronics.
As a consequence, the scan head will have to be replaced.
Wear always a grounding strap when working on the scan head.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 16
DD+DIS014.05E
Task
Repair and Service

Replacing the flash erasure unit.

CAUTION:
During replacement of the flash erasure unit (built in ex factory up to SN 1401)
damage to the lower glass fiber cable can occur.
Follow the instructions carefully.
Task
Replacing fuses at isolation transformer.

WARNING:
Overload of isolation transformer can cause fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated above.
Task
Cleaning the scan head.

CAUTION:
Dust, scratches, and finger prints on the optical elements can cause artifacts
and result in worthless images.
As a consequence, the scan head will have to be replaced.
It is absolutely necessary to clean the scan head regularly.
Dont touch or wipe the optical elements of the scan head.
Task

CAUTION:
The needle image plate (IP) is fragile and very expensive: Risk of damage.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 17
DD+DIS014.05E
3.3
Subject
Repair and Service

Safety Notes for Installation Planning

Floor load
CAUTION:
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Subject
Climatic and ambient conditions

CAUTION:
Light of high intensity may intrude in the digitizer.
Image quality may be decreased.
DX-S and All in One must not be operated in direct sunlight! No influence on image
quality is guaranteed if operated in ambient light of max. 2500 Lux.
Subject
Mains cable connection DX-S All in One

CAUTION:
When an isolation transformer is used in USA, a wall outlet other than
NEMA 5-20R provides a wrong voltage.
As a consequence, the device may be damaged.
Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable for All in One mains connection and set input voltage
at the isolation transformer according country-specific mains voltage.
Subject
Using an UPS.
WARNING:
Connect the equipment to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 18
DD+DIS014.05E
3.4
Repair and Service


Transformer)
equipment. Therefore all DX-S components must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m
(6 feet) around the patient.
figure 6
IMPORTANT:
(see figure 1) an isolating transformer has to be used according to IEC60601-1-1 standard.
All components must be connected to this isolating transformer, which guarantees the
demanded additional separation. Such an isolation transformer is available as an option by
Agfa. For specification of the transformer refer to section chapter 11 Installation Planning of
the DX-S Service Documentation.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.5
According to IEC 60601-1-1. the system can also be used within patient environment.
figure 7
Only the DX-S All in One offers a limited mobility.

Therefore the following safety instructions have to be followed:
3.6
Switch the system off before moving it. When reaching the new position, switch the
system on again.
When rolling the pedestal away from its position, take care not to pull or put any strain
on power or network leads. When reaching the new position, apply the brakes.
When moving the DX-S All in One, take care that it remains stable at all times. In
particular, the following considerations should be kept in mind:
the nature of the floor and any floor-coverings, carpets, etc.;
any obstructions such as cables;
any slopes to be negotiated.
Safety Notes for Cleaning the All in One System

Pull the power plug out of the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment and switch off
the UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) if installed.

09-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.1 / 20
Repair and Service

Tools and auxiliary means
DD+DIS014.05E
Chapter 3.2
List of Contents
1
Recommended Tools and Test Equipment ...............................1
Service Tools for the DX-S ..........................................................1
2.1
Access to the Service Tools .......................................................................... 1
2.2
Overview of the Service Tools....................................................................... 2
2.3
Remote Access to the Service Tools ............................................................ 2
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
Service Tools for General Device Info .......................................................... 3

Info Counter ...................................................................................................... 3
E-Label.............................................................................................................. 6
SW-Versioning .................................................................................................. 7
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
Service Tools for Reporting........................................................................... 8

Service Activity Log........................................................................................... 8
Error Statistics................................................................................................... 9
HOT Report....................................................................................................... 9
2.6
2.6.1
Service Tools for Modification..................................................................... 10

SW Upload...................................................................................................... 10
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
Service Tools for Analysis & Repair ........................................................... 10

Module Self Test ............................................................................................. 10
Diagnose Cycle............................................................................................... 11
Explain Error Code.......................................................................................... 13
Endurance Run ............................................................................................... 14
Scan Head Access Position............................................................................ 16
2.8
2.8.1
Service Tools for preventive Maintenance ................................................. 17

Calibration....................................................................................................... 17
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
Service Tools for Configuration .................................................................. 17

Site Specific Data............................................................................................ 17
Device Specific Data....................................................................................... 18
2.10
Service Tool for Backup & Restore............................................................. 18

eq_03-2_tools-aux_e_template_v01
11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / I
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E

Chapter 3.2 / II
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
Recommended Tools and Test Equipment

In addition to the common tools every service engineer carries in his toolbox,
the following auxiliary equipment is required for the service on DX-S
components:
Special tool for fitting

segment seals into place.
Do not use other tools!
Order number:
10+9 9999 1175 0
figure 1
Service Tools for the DX-S
2.1
Access to the Service Tools

The DX-S is equipped with various service tools, which are all accessible from
its control PC.
To get access to the service tools,

Open Windows menu Start / Programs / Agfa DX-S / DX-S Service Client

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 1
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.2
Overview of the Service Tools

In the DX-S Service Client window, a tree structure gives an overview of all
service tools which are available on the control PC of the digitizer:
figure 2
The following sections give you detailed information on the service tools and
examples for their usage.
2.3
Remote Access to the Service Tools

In figure 3 you see all service tools
which are available from any
computer that has a network
connection with the control PC.
figure 3

Chapter 3.2 / 2
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.4
Service Tools for General Device Info

Definition
The digitizer node

is a software-controlled entity of the digitizer.
It provides the digitizer software with information about its work and can be
configured by parameters.
Examples are Entire Device, Flash Erasure Unit, or Air Supply.
2.4.1
Info Counter
The Info Counter provides device-specific information on:
the hardware components,
Purpose
the software components,
the modification history (installation, repair, maintenance),
the history of occurred errors, warnings, and retries, and
the used detectors (image plates, cassettes).
It thus facilitates recognition of failures and allows to reduce the repair time
in the field or the repair center.
The Info Counter information is arranged according to the digitizer nodes.
For the selected node it displays the following three tabs:
Structure
Tab "Values"
In this tab the characteristical values for the selected node are given,
e.g. the total number of flashes fired in the flash erasure unit.
figure 4

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 3
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E

Tab "Counters"
In this tab those events are counted which are specific for the current
digitizer node, e.g. the number of erasure operations performed by the flash
erasure unit.
figure 5
The Relative Count entries (see figure 5) can be reset to zero.

Thus you have the possibility to see how many times an event occurred
since your last service visit.
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows to reset relative counters:
(1) Select the event you want to reset by clicking once on the counter name.
(2) Click button <Reset Counter>.
(3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 with all events you want to reset.

Chapter 3.2 / 4
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
In this tab all events are listed which occurred in the selected digitizer node.
Tab "Lists"
figure 6
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows to analyze a list:
(1) Select a List Name, e.g. Error History with CBF by clicking once on the
desired entry in the left pane.
The entries of the list are displayed on the right pane.
(2) Select a List Entry Name by clicking once on the desired entry in the
right pane.
The attributes of the selected entry are displayed in the bottom pane.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 5
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.4.2
E-Label
E-Label contains data for the digitizer nodes.
Some data are site and device specific and are the same for all nodes.
Additionally you find node-specific data.
figure 7
Always check the entries 5 Most Frequent Device Errors and

10 Last Module Specific Errors.
These entries give you a hint where to start the troubleshooting.

Chapter 3.2 / 6
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.4.3
SW-Versioning
With this tool you can check if the software versions currently installed on the
control PC match those installed on the DX-S.
figure 8
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows to check and compare software versions:
(1) Click button <Select all>.
(2) Click button <Get installed versions>.
There are two possible results:
Result 1: OK is shown in all Status fields; in the Activity text field the
message Versions are current is displayed.
No further actions are required.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 7
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
Result 2: different is shown in part of the Status fields. An error message

pops up which requests to upload the software for different nodes.
Proceed with the following steps:
(3) Close error message by clicking button <Ok>.
(4) Click button <Upload selected nodes>.
The upload may need 15 20 minutes.
(5) When the message Versions are current is displayed in the
Activity text field then reset the digitizer.
NOTE:
You can also check if the nodes can be addressed by the software.
If the status on a node shows OK, then the data transfer (CAN bus) and the
nodes are functioning.
2.5
Service Tools for Reporting
2.5.1
Service Activity Log

All actions carried out by the service staff are logged.
With this tool you can retrace who did what and when. It shows actions of the
last 20 days. The oldest entries are replaced by the new ones
(first in, first out principle).
figure 9
When you click button <Save as> you can save the log entries as a file
to a destination of your choice.
Chapter 3.2 / 8
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.5.2
Error Statistics
This tool helps to determine the frequency of occurrence for specific errors.
It thus gives you a hint where to start with the troubleshooting.
figure 10
When you click button <Save Error List> then the statistics data is written
to a text file.
2.5.3
HOT Report
This tool gives a summary of the last cassette cycle. The most important
events that happened in the digitizer during this cycle are reported.
You can use the data to check if the digitizer has a connection to the control
PC (FireWire) and if the scan interface (TWAIN) is working.
figure 11

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 9
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.6
Service Tools for Modification
2.6.1
SW Upload
This tool allows to upload the software versions after a repair or replacement
of a digitizer node or if one of the nodes cannot be addressed. See figure 8.
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows to upload software versions:
(1) Click button <Select all>.
(2) Click button <Upload selected nodes>.
The system starts uploading (duration: approx. 15 20 min).
(3) When the message Versions are current is displayed in the
Activity text field then reset the digitizer.
2.7
Service Tools for Analysis & Repair
2.7.1
Module Self Test

This tool allows to run a self test procedure for each digitizer node.
figure 12
After running self tests always close the DX-S Service Client window and
switch the digitizer off and on again.

Chapter 3.2 / 10
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.7.2
Diagnose Cycle
This tool helps analyzing errors in the digitizer cycle by running its partial
actions step by step.
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows before starting the Diagnose Cycle tool:
(1) Ensure that the control PC is

running
<Exit NX>
For this, open Windows menu
Start / Agfa / NX / Service /
Stop NX.
Press <Enter> key.
figure 13
(5) Put a cassette into the digitizer.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 11
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
The Diagnose Cycle tool displays a flow graph of the complete digitizer cycle
(figure 14).
The currently activated status (A) is shown green on the screen.
The actions (B) you can activate from the current status are displayed as gray
rectangles. The actions start when you click on the referring symbol.
figure 14

Chapter 3.2 / 12
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.7.3
Explain Error Code

This tool explains you the meanings of the error codes reported by the
DX-S Service Client.
You can also use this tool offline on your service PC.
figure 15
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows to make this tool available on your service PC:
(6) Check if Microsoft .Net framework 1.1 or higher is installed on your
service PC. For this
(1.1) Open Windows menu Start / Settings / Control Panel /
Add/Remove Programs.
(1.2) Search for an entry Microsoft .Net framework.
(1.3) If it exists, check if the indicated version is 1.1 or higher.
(1.4) If it is then proceed with step (9); otherwise proceed with step (7).
(7) Download from www.microsoft.com the .Net framework 1.1 or higher.
(8) Install the .Net framework on your service PC.
(9) Download the current DX-S software from MedNet
GSO Library / Computed Radiography / CR Digitizers / DX-S / Freeware.
(10) Install the DX-S software on your service PC.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 13
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.7.4
Endurance Run
The Endurance Run tool allows to run any amount of cycles with/ without
scanning and/ or erasure. This can be helpful when investigating sporadic
image plate handling failures.
INSTRUCTION:
Proceed as follows when starting the Endurance Run tool:
running
<Exit NX>
Stop NX.
Press <Enter> key.
figure 16
(15) Now open the DX-S Service Client and open the Endurance Run tool.
figure 17
(16) Set the parameters and click button <Start>.

The endurance run is started when a cassette is inserted in the digitizer.

Chapter 3.2 / 14
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
The endurance run is also possible when the digitizer covers are removed.
CAUTION:
Moving parts and high intensity light may cause injury!
Keep away from moving parts.
Do not look directly into the digitizer as laser light and erasure flash light can
cause harm.
WARNING:
If the safety switch is overridden with a service key there are risks of
injuries.
Keep your hair, hands and garments away from the device.
Remove service key before the device is handed over to the customer.
Laser beam!
Risk of serious eye damage!
Avoid direct and indirect eye contact with the laser beam.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam - risk of reflection.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 15
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.7.5
Scan Head Access Position

If you do repair or maintenance works at the digitizer, you may need to move
the scan head from the parking position at the lower end of the IP platform to
the middle of the IP platform (scan head access position).
You achieve that by clicking on one of the buttons in the Scan Head Access
Position tool.
Scanhead Position
figure 18
ACTION:
Before using this tool, ensure that the digitizer is switched on and ready.
ACTION:
After having used this tool, restart the digitizer.

Chapter 3.2 / 16
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.8
Service Tools for preventive Maintenance
2.8.1
Calibration
You need this tool for the calibration of the scan head.
Refer to chapter 3.6 in this manual.
2.9
Service Tools for Configuration
2.9.1
Site Specific Data

With this tool you can view or edit the site specific data of the digitizer.
figure 19

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 17
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
2.9.2
Device Specific Data

With this tool you can view the device specific data.
The data are entered in production and can not be changed afterwards.
figure 20
2.10
Service Tool for Backup & Restore

This tool allows to store device specific settings in a backup Zip file and to
restore these settings when required.
We recommend saving the backup file in partition H: (Backup).
figure 21

Chapter 3.2 / 18
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
Protecting
the Backup File
By default the backup file is saved unencrypted.

If you want to protect the backup file with a password, check Encrypt/Decrypt
and enter a Password before doing the backup.
When restoring protected backup files, you must likewise check
Encrypt/Decrypt and enter the correct Password.
Backup
By default, all files in the folder C:\Documents and Settings\

All Users\Application Data\Agfa\CR 50.0\
are saved in the backup file.
If you check Backup only Infocounter then only the file
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
Agfa\CR 50.0\SSoF\ddm\DDMdata.xml
is saved in the backup file.
Click button <Backup selected files> to start the backup.
INSTRUCTION:
Before restoring data from a backup file, proceed as follows:
running
<Exit NX>
Stop NX.
Press <Enter> key.
figure 22

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.2 / 19
Repair and Service
DD+DIS014.05E
Restore
By default, all files in the backup file are restored to their location in folder
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\
Agfa\CR 50.0\.
If you check Exclude Logfiles then the files in the subfolder Log are not
overwritten by the restore procedure.
Click button <Restore selected files> to start the restore procedure.

Chapter 3.2 / 20
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Please note
The Chapter Troubleshooting Edition 2, Revision 0 has been replaced by the

separately available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS159.07E.
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:
MEDNET GSO Computed Radiography CR Digitizers
DX-S Trouble shooting guide


eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v05
Repair and Service

Troubleshooting
DD+DIS014.05E
Intentionally left blank

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 3.3 / 2
Electrical and mechanical

codings, fuses, LEDs
DD+DIS014.05E
Chapter 3.4
List of Contents
1
LEDs inside DX-S Digitizer ..........................................................1
Fuses .............................................................................................2

eq_03-4_codings_e_template_v01
11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.4 / I

DD+DIS014.05E
LEDs inside DX-S Digitizer
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
5160_chap34_001.cdr
figure 1

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.4 / 1

DD+DIS014.05E
In the table below the LED status and their meaning are explained.
Relevant Unit
Status of the LED
Meaning
laser diodes
3,5 6,8 V
lights temporarily green
the laser diodes of the

scan head are active
CAN bus
8V
lights green
normal operation
CCD scan board

9,2 V
lights green
normal operation
SHI board,
user interface
8V
lights green
normal operation
CCD analog
20 V
lights green
normal operation
distance adjustment
erasure needle IP
18 30 V
lights green
normal operation
air control board

24 V
lights green
normal operation
IP handling unit,
cassette handling unit
36 V
lights green
normal operation
over temperature
lights green
the maximum operation

temperature has been
exceeded
Fuses
NOTE:
There are no exchangeable fuses inside the DX-S digitizer.

Chapter 3.4 / 2
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
Chapter 3.5
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
DX-S
Type 5160

This document describes replacements and repair procedures for the digitizer.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.4
03-2010
Updated section 8.3.2 Mounting the Flexboard.
Document Number
Title
For the lists of referenced documents, refer to section 1 of this document.


eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v07
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 2
DD+DIS014.05E
Repair and Service

LIST OF CONTENTS
SAFETY NOTE.........................................................................................................................6
ASSEMBLY OVERVIEW ..........................................................................................................6
3.1
List of Replaceable Parts and Modules ....................................................................................7
3.2
Dismounting the DX-S from the All in One Cart........................................................................9
REPLACEMENTS AT THE MOUNTING RACK (ASSEMBLY 100) .......................................12

4.1
Removing the Panels..............................................................................................................13
4.2
Replacing the Front Panel ......................................................................................................14
4.3
Replacing the Display .............................................................................................................15
4.4
Exchanging the Rollers of DX-S .............................................................................................16
4.5
Removing the SHI-Board (Scan Head Integration-Board) (B146)..........................................17
4.6
Replacing the Power Unit (B101)............................................................................................19
4.7
Exchanging the Air Filter.........................................................................................................20
4.8
Removing the Machine Fan (M412) .......................................................................................22
REPLACEMENTS AT THE CASSETTE HANDLING UNIT (ASSEMBLY 200)......................23

5.1
Removing the Tunnel..............................................................................................................23
5.2
Removing the Complete Cassette Handling Unit (Assembly 200) .........................................24
5.3
Removing the IP-Adapter Board (B388) .................................................................................25
5.4
Removing the Cassette Handling Board (B250).....................................................................26
5.5
Removing the Cassette Reader (ID Engine) (B258)...............................................................27
5.6
Removing the Plate holding the Dimension Control Sensors (B276, B277, B278, B279,
B253).......................................................................................................................................29
5.7
Removing Stepper Motor Locking (M216) ..............................................................................31
5.8
Removing Stepper Motor Opener (M217) ..............................................................................33
5.9
Removing Stepper Motor Fixer with Brake (M213).................................................................33
5.10
Removing Holder of Light Barriers Opener Home-Position Sensor (B227) and Cover-Opener
Control Sensor (B251) ............................................................................................................36
5.11
Removing Dual Pulsed Transmitter (B389) and Receiver for Snap Hooks (B391) ...............37
5.12
Replacing the Z-Sensor (B267) ..............................................................................................38
REPLACEMENTS AT THE IP-HANDLING UNIT (ASSEMBLY 300) .....................................39

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 3
DD+DIS014.05E
10
Repair and Service

6.1
Replacing the Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box (M319)............................................39
6.2
Removing the Stepper Motor Snap Hooks (M320) and Snap Hook Home-Position Sensor
(B361) .....................................................................................................................................42
6.3
Removing the Traverse complete ...........................................................................................44
6.4
Removing the Stepper Motor Linear Transport (M318)..........................................................46
6.5
Removing the Sliding Rails Sensor (B366).............................................................................47
6.6
Removing the IP Handling Board (B365)................................................................................48
6.7
Removing Upper-End Control Sensor (B385) and Collision Control Sensor (B386).............49
6.8
Removing Slow Scan Home Position Sensor (B362) and Bottom-End Control Sensor (B384)51
6.9
Removing the Ramp Locking System.....................................................................................52
6.10
Removing Linear Transport Home Position Sensor (B359) ...................................................54
6.11
Removing Begin Of Scan (BOS) Sensor (B383) ....................................................................55
REPLACEMENTS AT THE AIR SUPPLY UNIT (ASSEMBLY 400) .......................................59

7.1
Replacing the complete Air Supply Unit .................................................................................59
7.2
Replacing the Maintenance Module (MG10) ..........................................................................63
7.3
Replacing the Lift Cylinder ......................................................................................................64
7.4
Replacing Segment Gaskets ..................................................................................................64
7.5
Replacing the Vacuum Distribution Plate (B439)....................................................................66
REPLACEMENTS AT THE SCAN UNIT (ASSEMBLY 500) ..................................................67

8.1
Removing the Scan Head .......................................................................................................67
8.2
Replacing the Scan Controller (B572) ....................................................................................73
8.3
Replacing the Flexboard .........................................................................................................74
REPLACEMENTS AT THE ERASURE UNIT.........................................................................79

9.1
Replacements at the Flashlight Erasure Unit .........................................................................79
9.2
Replacements at the LED Erasure Unit..................................................................................83
REPLACEMENTS AT CASSETTE: REPLACING A DEFECTIVE ID-CHIP ...........................89

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
The replacement of some parts requires additional information.
The relevant documents are listed in the table below.
Document Number
Title
DD+DIS046.07E
Enclosure - Replacement Instructions: Stepper Motor Slow

Scan with Gear Box
DD+DIS040.08E
Enclosure - Replacing the Front Panel
DD+DIS041.08E
Service Bulletin - New Front Panel
DD+DIS128.08E
Enclosure - Lift Cylinder
DD+DIS250.08E
Enclosure - Vacuum Distribution Board
DD+DIS070.09E
Enclosure - Z-Sensor Replacement Instruction
INSTRUCTION:
The Enclosures are delivered with the Spare Part.
For an overview of published Enclosures, please refer to:
GSO Library - General Info - Agfa HealthCare - Publications Enclosures - General Enclosures*
*
Only applicable for Agfa Employees.

For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa representative.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Safety Note
NOTE:
The replacement of some parts requires that the scan head is moved to
<scan head access> position in the DX-S service client (see chapter 3.2 - Tools
and Auxiliary means), before the digitizer is switched off. These parts are:
Scan head
BOS (Begin of Scan) sensor
Traverse
Stepper motor linear transport
Stepper motor slow scan with gear box
Scan head controller
Flexboard
Sensor "linear transport home position"
Segment gaskets
Assembly Overview
Figure 1

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.1
List of Replaceable Parts and Modules

NOTE:
For more information about the component numbers,
refer to chapter 4 - Reference and Circuit Diagrams
Mounting rack (100)
Front panel
Side panels
Top panel
Display
Rollers
SHI board (B146)
Power unit (B101)
Air filter
Machine fan (M412)
Cassette handling unit (200)
Tunnel
Complete cassette handling unit (200)
IP adapter board (B388)
Cassette handling board (B250)
Chip Reader (ID Engine) (B258)
Plate holding the "dimension control" sensors

(B276, B277, B278, B279, B253)
Stepper motor locking (M216)
Stepper motor opener (M217)
Stepper motor fixer with break (M213)
Light barriers cover opener (B227, B251)
Light barrier dual puls sensor (B389, B391)
Z-sensor (B267)

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
IP handling unit (300)
Stepper motor slow scan with gear box (M319)
Stepper motor snaphooks (M320)
Light barrier snaphooks home position (B361)
Traverse complete
Stepper motor linear transport (M318)
Sliding rails sensor (B366)
IP handling board (B365)
Light barrier upper end control (B385)
Light barrier collision control (B386)
Light barrier slow scan home position (B362)
Light barrier bottom end control (B384)
Ramp locking system
Light barrier "linear transport home position" (B359)
BOS (Begin of Scan) sensor
Air supply unit (400)
Complete air supply unit
Maintenance module (MG10)
Lift cylinder
Vacuum distribution board (B439)
Segment gaskets
Scan unit (500)
Complete scan head
Scan head controller (B572)
Flexboard

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.2
Dismounting the DX-S from the All in One Cart

Please follow the description below to get access to the DX-S when integrated in an
All in One.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that rear brakes of the DX-S All in One are activated before beginning the
repair or service intervention.
(1)
Shut down the DX-S and

NX workstation.
(2)
Unplug the mains connector

of the DX-S.
Figure 2
(3)
Unscrew three screws c

of the cover of the digitizer's
Firewire connector.
(4)
Loosen screw d .
1A
2
B
Figure 3

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Remove the cover and

unplug the Firewire cable
of the DX-S Firewire-connector.
Figure 4
(6)
Unscrew two screws

(Phillips screwdriver) and
remove the cover plate.
Figure 5
(7)
Loose the screws c at the

front of the All in One
(8)
Push the plate to the left

side d.
(9)
Remove the plate e.
Figure 6
(10) Take out the service bridge

from the lower bracket of the
All in One cabinet.
Figure 7

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(11) Install the service bridge at

the All in One.
Figure 8
(12) Move the DX-S carefully onto

the service bridge until it hits
the bridge edge.
Figure 9

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Replacements at the Mounting Rack (Assembly 100)
Figure 10: Cover and Panels
IMPORTANT:
Always observe the following safety directions when working with the digitizer.
WARNING:
Laser beam! Risk of serious eye
damage!
Do not open the optic module.
Do not hold any tools in the laser beam risk of reflection.
NOTE:
With covers closed the digitizer is a
Class 1 laser product and not dangerous to
the human eye or skin.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.1
Removing the Panels

NOTE:
Remove both panels from the digitizer, according to the following instruction.
(1)
Loosen two 4 mm Allen screws

(circles) at the rear of the machine.
(2)
Lift off the cover.
Figure 11
(3)
Push the left side panel to the rear side

and lift it up to free the bottom side hooks.
(4)
Move it gently downwards to remove it.
(5)
Repeat steps (3) and (4) for the right side panel.
(6)
Unplug power and data cables

(circles) off the display.
Figure 12

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Loosen two Phillips screws (small

size) at both sides of the front panel
(the circle shows the screw on the
digitizer's left side).
(8)
Carefully remove the front cover.
Figure 13
4.2
Replacing the Front Panel

INSTRUCTION:
The replacement is described in the Service Bulletin Number 33 DD+DIS041.08E and
in the Enclosure DD+DIS040.08E, delivered with the front panel
with order number*: CM+9 5160 1215 0
GSO Library - General Info - Agfa HealthCare - Publications Enclosures - General Enclosures**
*
The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of
** Only applicable for Agfa Employees.


03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 14
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.3
Replacing the Display

(1)
Remove the panels from the digitizer according the instructions

mentioned in section 3.1.
(2)
Remove the front panel.
(3)
Carefully unplug power and

data cable of the display.
Figure 14
(4)
Plug off the flat band cable by

pushing down the clamp c on
either side of the holding of the
band.
(5)
Screw off the 2 Allen screws d

with the Allen key (2.5 mm) and
remove the black plastic bar.
(6)
Screw off the 3 torx screws /

Phillips screws e.
51
62
Figure 15
NOTE:
For earlier units you find torx screws, later this has been changed to
Phillips screws. Torx screws have to be replaced by the Phillips screws,
which are scope of the delivery of the front panel.
The Phillips screws can be re-used.
(7)
Carefully remove the board.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(8)
Screw off the 4 screws f with a

medium Phillips-tip screw driver.
(9)
To mount the display again, follow

the same instructions in the other
way.
Make sure the rubber g is
fastened in its original position.
84
95
Figure 16
4.4
Exchanging the Rollers of DX-S

NOTE:
You need someone who lends you a hand, when exchanging the rollers of the digitizer.
(1)
Tilt the digitizer sideward (100 kg

someone has to assist you).
(2)
Remove the retainer on the axis of

the roller.
(3)
Draw the roller out.
Figure 17

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 16
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.5
Removing the SHI-Board (Scan Head Integration-Board) (B146)

The SHI board is located at the rear side
of the digitizer, as shown in figure 18.
Figure 18
(1)
At left side of the digitizer, unplug

four cables on SHI board:
Power supply c (ST22)
CAN-bus d
E-label e (BU10)
Distribution board f (ST21)
1A
B2
3C
D
4
1A
2B
3C
4D
Figure 19

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Loosen 5 hexagon screws g of

the plate on the rear side of the
machine.
(3)
Lift the plate, then lower it, turn

outside at the top.
(4)
Remove the plate which bears

the SHI board.
E
5
Figure 20

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 18
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.6
Replacing the Power Unit (B101)

(1)
At the rear side of the digitizer,

unscrew four hexagon screws c.
(2)
If necessary, also unscrew the

two screws d.
(3)
Lift the entire power unit

and pull it gently out of its bearing.
2
B
1
A
Figure 21
(4)
Unlock and unplug the four

cables (e, f, g, h) on top of
the power unit.
3
C
D
4
E
5
F6
Figure 22

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.7
Exchanging the Air Filter

IMPORTANT:
Replacement of the air filter (order number *: CM+9 5146 1799 2) is mandatory
whenever actions concerning dust & dirt are performed.
Depending on the serial number 2 different ways to replace the filter are to be applied:
Replacing the Air Filter: Up to Serial Number 1114
4.7.1
Replacing the Air Filter: From Serial Number 1115 on
Replacing the Air Filter: Up to Serial Number 1114

(1)
To have the filter accessible, make

sure that the scan head is not in the
<scan head access> position
(via the DX-S service client,
see chapter 3.2 - Tools and auxiliary
means).
(2)
Remove the left side panel.
(3)
Replace the air filter.
(4)
After replacement of the filter,

bring the scan head to
<scan head access> position
to continue.
(Scan head needs to be cleaned
separately afterwards,
see chapter 9 - Maintenance).
Figure 23: Air filter

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 20
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.7.2
Replacing the Air Filter: From Serial Number 1115 on

REQUIRED TOOLS:
Phillips screwdriver, small
Socket wrench, 7 mm
(1)
Unplug power and data cable

of the display.
Figure 24: Display cable
(2)
Loosen two Phillips screws

(small size) at both sides of the
front panel (the circle shows
the screw on the left side of
the digitizer).
Figure 25: Front cover
NOTE:
Mind the airflow direction (from outside to inside) of the dust filter
(see symbols on the side of the dust filter).
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Vacuum-clean the filter before

removing it to prevent from dirt
falling into the digitizer.
(4)
Loosen four hexagon nuts.
(5)
Turn out the frame of the dust filter.
(6)
Exchange the dust filter.
(7)
Remount the filter to the housing.

Figure 26: Air filter
4.8
Removing the Machine Fan (M412)

(1)
Remove the front panel (see 4.1).
(2)
Unplug power cable.
(3)
Loosen 3
hexagon screws
(socket wrench, 7 mm).
Figure 27

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 22
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Replacements at the Cassette Handling Unit (Assembly 200)
5.1
Removing the Tunnel

The tunnel is located on the
top of the digitizer, as shown in
figure 28.
5160_chap35_018.cdr
Figure 28
(1)
Remove all panels and

cover (see 4.1).
(2)
Unscrew three screws

(Phillips, small size) at
each side of the
cassette feed.
(3)
Remove the cassette

feed by lifting its front
part first. The rear part
is pivotable mounted.
Figure 29

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.2
Removing the Complete Cassette Handling Unit (Assembly 200)

(1)
Remove all covers and

panels (see 4.1).
(2)
Remove the erasure unit

(see 9).
(3)
Open cable ties.
(4)
At cassette handling
board, unplug
power-in cable c (ST31)
and CAN bus cable d
(ST1#5).
(5)
E
1
2
F
Figure 30
Carefully unplug the IP

adapter board e (ST1).
C
3
NOTE:
Attend that
brackets f be
not broken or bent.
4
D
Figure 31
(6)
Loosen four nuts gat the

frame which are
positioned as shown in
the figure on the right
side.
(socket wrench, 8 mm)
A5
B
6
NOTE:
Do not loosen the
screws h secured
by lacquer!
7
C
7
C
Figure 32
(7)
Free cables from cable clamps i. See figure 32.
(8)
Lift the cassette handling unit off.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 24
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.3
Removing the IP-Adapter Board (B388)

The IP-adapter board is located
on the top of the cassette
handling unit, as shown in
figure 33.
5160_chap35_023.cdr
Figure 33
(1)
Unplug all three cables at

the IP adapter board
(ST1, to IP handling
board, ST2, to snaphooks
sensor, ST3 to Z-sensor).
ST2
ST3
(2)
Loosen cautiously the

four plastic clips securing
the board.
ST1
Figure 34
(3)
Lift the board off the spike.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.4
Removing the Cassette Handling Board (B250)

The cassette handling board is
located on the top of the
cassette handling unit, as
shown in figure 35.
5160_chap35_025.cdr
Figure 35
(1)
Unplug all 12 cables on

the cassette handling
board.
Figure 36
(2)
Loosen cautiously the

six plastic clips securing
the board.
(3)
Lift the board off the

spike.
Figure 37

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 26
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.5
Removing the Cassette Reader (ID Engine) (B258)

The cassette reader
(ID Engine) is located on the top
of the cassette handling unit, as
shown in figure 38.
Figure 38
Figure 39: ID engine with e-label
(1)
Put the screw driver

through the hole (left
circle) and unscrew one
screw at ID engine
(Phillips screw driver,
small size).
Figure 40

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Turn stepper motor

opener until the axis
moves the ID engine to
the front.
Figure 41
(3)
Turn the ID engine and

pull it out of its socket.
Figure 42
(4)
Pull ID engine out.
Figure 43

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 28
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Unplug the
connector ST9.
Figure 44
5.6
Removing the Plate holding the Dimension Control Sensors (B276, B277,
B278, B279, B253)
The plate holding the
dimension control sensors
is located on the top of the
shown in figure 45.
5160_chap35_032.cdr
Figure 45
(1)
(2)
Remove mounting plate

of cassette handling
board (4 Allen screws,
3 mm).
ST39
Unplug ST39 at cassette

handling board.
Figure 46
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Remove the cable from

10 cable ducts.
Figure 47
(4)
Unscrew three Allen

screws (2.5 mm).
Figure 48
(5)
Unplug the sensor cables.
(6)
Remove the holding plate

with all sensors on it.
Figure 49

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 30
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.7
Removing Stepper Motor Locking (M216)

The stepper motor locking is
shown in figure 50.
NOTE:
Removal of M216 only
possible when cassette
handling unit is
dismantled.
5160_chap35_033.cdr
Figure 50
(1)
Unplug ST13 at cassette handling board.
(2)
Remove cables from cable duct.
(3)
Remove cables of light barriers (ST34).
ST34
ST13
Figure 51

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Loosen 2 Allen screw

(Allen key, 3 mm).
NOTE:
The 2 screws
have not the same
length.
(5)
Loose 1 Allen screw

(Allen key, 3 mm).
Figure 52
(6)
Remove the complete assembly.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 32
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.8
Removing Stepper Motor Opener (M217)

The stepper motor opener
is located on the top of the
shown in figure 53.
NOTE:
Removal of M217 only
possible when cassette
handling unit is
dismantled.
5160_chap35_34.cdr
Figure 53
5.9
(1)
Remove cables from cable duct.
(2)
Loosen four screws (Allen key, 3 mm).
Removing Stepper Motor Fixer with Brake (M213)

The stepper motor fixer with
brake is located on the top of
the cassette handling unit, as
shown in figure 54.
NOTE:
M213 can be removed
when cassette
handling unit is
mounted in frame.
5160_chap35_035.cdr
Figure 54

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 33
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(1)
Unplug ST15 at
cassette handling board.
(2)
Remove cables from

cable duct.
ST15
Figure 55
(3)
Unscrew one screw on

top of the assembly
(Allen key, 3 mm).
NOTE:
The screw is not at
the motor itself!
Figure 56

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 34
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Unscrew three screws on

bottom of the assembly
(Allen key, 3 mm).
NOTE:
The screws are not
at the motor itself!
Figure 57
(5)
Remove retaining ring

securing the toothed
wheel.
(6)
Remove the complete

assembly.
Figure 58

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 35
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.10
Removing Holder of Light Barriers Opener Home-Position Sensor (B227)

and Cover-Opener Control Sensor (B251)
The light barriers sensors are
shown in figure 59.
B227
B251
5160_chap35_039.cdr
Figure 59
(1)
Unplug ST38 at cassette

handling board.
(2)
Remove cable from the

cable duct.
ST38
Figure 60
(3)
Unscrew two screws

(Allen key, 2.5 mm) to
remove both sensors.
Figure 61

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 36
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.11
Removing Dual Pulsed Transmitter (B389) and

Receiver for Snap Hooks (B391)
The dual pulsed transmitter
and the receiver for snap
hooks are located at the rear
side of the cassette handling
unit, as shown in figure 62.
Figure 62:
Left border is front of device, right border is back of device
NOTE:
The dual pulsed
transmitter and receiver
for snap hooks are only
accessible from the
bottom of the dismantled
cassette handling unit.
Figure 63:
Left border is front of device, right border is back of device
(1)
Unplug ST2 at the

IP adapter board.
(2)
Pass the cable through

the frame.
(3)
Unscrew four screws

(Allen key, 2.5 mm).
ST2
Figure 64
(4)
Remove dual pulsed transmitter and receiver for snap hooks.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 37
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.12
Replacing the Z-Sensor (B267)

INSTRUCTION:
The replacement is described in the Enclosure DD+DIS070.09E,
delivered with the Z-Sensor with order number*: CM+9 5160 5250 0
*


03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 38
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Replacements at the IP-Handling Unit (Assembly 300)
6.1
Replacing the Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box (M319)
Only the main steps of the replacement procedure of the stepper motor slow scan with
gear box are described in this chapter. A detailed description can be found in the
document enclosed to the spare part.
NOTE:
The stepper motor slow scan can only be replaced together with the gear box.
These parts can't be replaced separately.
Only digitizers with SN 1235 are prepared for the replacement of the stepper motor
slow scan with gear box.
A replacement of the stepper motor slow scan with gear box requires the replacement
of the IP handling board which is in scope of the new spare part.
The enclosed IP handling board contains gear specific parameters which are stored on
the e-label of the board.
Depending on the Serial Number (SN) of the digitizer, different scenarios must be
performed by the Field Service Engineer (FSE) in case of a defective stepper motor
slow scan with gear box:
DX-S Digitizer with
Serial Numbers (SN):
What to do in case of a
defective Stepper Motor Slow
Scan with Gear Box?
Required Spare Part with

order number*:
SN 1000 SN 1100,
No spare part available
SN 1102 SN 1114
Replace complete
DX-S digitizer.
SN 1101,
SN 1115 SN 1234
Replace complete
IP platform.
IP platform complete
SN 1235 and higher
Replace
Stepper motor slow scan
with gear box
Stepper motor slow scan with

gear box
digitizer must be replaced

completely.
CM+9 5160 1950 0 or higher
CM+9 5160 9070 0 or higher
The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
IMPORTANT:
Contact your GSN** Global Support Network (Tier 2) for the approval for the
Replacement of a stepper motor slow scan with gear box.
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 39
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.1.1
Prerequisites
SPARE PARTS:
Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box with order number*: CM+9 5160 9070 0
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
SCOPE OF DELIVERY:
Spare part kit Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box consists of:
Spare part Stepper motor slow scan with gear box
Mounting plate
3 x Allen screws (M5)
2 x Allen screws (M4)
3 x washers (6.4)
2 x washers (4.3)
IP Handling Board
Enclosure - Installation Instructions for Replacement of Stepper Motor Slow

Scan with Gear Box, DD+DIS046.07E
Take all these parts with you when you plan to replace the stepper motor slow scan
with gear box.
NOTE:
NOTE:
The scan head must be in <scan head access> position to be able to replace the
stepper motor slow scan with gear box.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 40
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.1.2
Overview
A detailed description can be found in the Enclosure - Installation Instructions for
Replacement of Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box, DD+DIS046.07E which is in
scope of the spare part.
NOTE:
REQUIRED TIME:
The replacement procedure consists of following steps:

(1)
Prepare the digitizer before dismounting.
(2)
Dismount the DX-S from the All in One cart.
(3)
Remove cover, side and front panel.
(4)
Remove the Scan Head.
(5)
Remove the Air Supply Unit.
(6)
Remove the Pressure Sucker Valve.
(7)
Remove the Vacuum Distribution Board.
(8)
Replace the Stepper Motor Slow Scan with Gear Box.
(9)
Remount the Vacuum Distribution Board.
(10) Remount the Pressure Sucker Valve.

(11) Replace the IP Handling Board.
(12) Remount the Air Supply Unit.
(13) Remount the Scan Head.
(14) Remount cover, side and front panel.
(15) Remount the DX-S on the All in One cart.
(16) Recalibrate the digitizer.
(17) Expose and evaluate a flatfield.
(18) Perform test cycles and hand-over test.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 41
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.2
Removing the Stepper Motor Snap Hooks (M320) and

Snap Hook Home-Position Sensor (B361)
CAUTION:
The stepper motor snap hooks are

located at the top of the
IP handling unit, as shown in
figure 65.
M320
5160_chap35_051.cdr
Figure 65
(1)
Remove cover and side panels (see 4.1).
(2)
Unplug power cable coming

from IP handling board
(ST35).
ST35
Figure 66

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 42
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Unclip sliding rails from

the motor (at rear side of
IP platform).
Figure 67
(4)
Unscrew two screws

(Allen key, 3 mm) of
guiding bar in front of
the snaphooks motor
and remove it.
Figure 68
(5)
Unscrew four screws

(Allen key, 3 mm) at the
stepper motor.
(6)
Move stepper motor to

the front.
Figure 69

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 43
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Unplug light barrier

"snaphook home
position".
(8)
Remove stepper motor

completely.
Figure 70
6.3
Removing the Traverse complete

The traverse is located, as
shown in figure 71.
5160_chap35_57.cdr
Figure 71

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 44
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
The scan head
must be in <scan
head access>
position.
Figure 72
(1)
Unscrew four screws

(2)
Remove the traverse.
Figure 73

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 45
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.4
Removing the Stepper Motor Linear Transport (M318)

The stepper motor linear
transport is located, as shown in
figure 74.
NOTE:
The scan head must be
in <scan head
access> position.
M318
5160_chap35_060.cdr
Figure 74
(1)
Remove the power cable

ST38 at IP handling board.
(2)
Unscrew four screws (Allen

key, 3mm).
Access to the screws
marked with a cycle from
the front side.
Access to the screws
marked with arrows from
the rear side.
(3)
Remove the stepper motor.

Figure 75

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 46
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.5
Removing the Sliding Rails Sensor (B366)

CAUTION:
The sliding rail sensor is
located, as shown in figure 76.
To access the
sliding rails sensor the
erasure unit must be
removed (see 9).
B361
B366
5160_chap35_062.cdr
Figure 76
(1)
Unclip sliding rails from

motor, see section 6.2.
(2)
Move sliding rails to the

front.
(3)
Unscrew one
hexagon screw
(socket wrench, 2.5 mm).
(4)
Remove light barrier

cautiously.
Figure 77

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 47
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.6
Removing the IP Handling Board (B365)

The IP handling board is
NOTE:
To access the
IP handling board the
air supply unit must be
removed (see 7.1).
B365
5160_chap35_064.cdr
Figure 78
(1)
Unplug all cables at

IP handling board.
(2)
Unscrew one screw

(3)
Lift the IP handling board

cautiously off.
Figure 79

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 48
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.7
Removing Upper-End Control Sensor (B385) and

Collision Control Sensor (B386)
CAUTION:
The sensors are located, as
shown in figure 80.
B385
NOTE:
To access the upper
end control and
collision control
sensors, the air supply
unit must be removed
(see 7.1).
B386
5160_chap35_066.cdr
Figure 80
(1)
Unplug ST41 at
IP handling board.
(2)
Mark the cables so when

you reinstall the sensors
you know which cable
belongs to which sensor.
Figure 81

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 49
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Remove cable from

cable duct.
(4)
Unscrew two screws

(Allen key, 2.5 mm), one
at each light barrier.
(5)
Remove both
light barriers.
NOTE:
The two light barriers
always have to be
replaced together.
Figure 82

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 50
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.8
Removing Slow Scan Home Position Sensor (B362) and

Bottom-End Control Sensor (B384)
The sensors are located, as

shown in figure 83.
NOTE:
To access the
slow scan home position
and bottom end control
sensors, the air supply
unit must be removed
(see 7.1).
B362
B384
5160_chap35_069.cdr
Figure 83
(1)
Unplug ST43 at
IP handling board.
(2)
Remove cable from

cable duct.
(3)
Unscrew two screws

(Allen key, 3 mm) on the
mounting plate of the light
barriers barrier.
(4)
Remove the mounting

plate with the light barriers.
Figure 84

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 51
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.9
Removing the Ramp Locking System

The ramp locking system is
5160_chap_071.cdr
Figure 85
Connector assembly with:
Stepper motor connector

(M321)
Connector home-position
sensor (B360)
Figure 86
(1)
Press down the spring as

shown in figure 87 and
keep the spring in this
position.
Figure 87

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 52
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
Before you start removing the steel ropes of the IP platform, remember how it is
winded, eventually make a note. This is important for the tension of the steel ropes
after the reinstallation.
Figure 88
(2)
Unscrew the screws (Allen key, 2.5mm) shown in Figure 88.
(3)
Unscrew five screws

(Allen key, 3 mm) at each side of
the connector frame.
Figure 89
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 53
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.10
Removing Linear Transport Home Position Sensor (B359)

The linear transport home position sensor
is located, as shown in figure 90.
NOTE:
The scan head must be in
<scan head access>
position to be able to replace
the linear transport home
position sensor.
B359
Figure 90
(1)
Lift with your hand the traverse to

access the linear transport home
position sensor.
(2)
Unscrew (Allen key 2.5 mm) the

linear transport home position
sensor.
Figure 91

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 54
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.11
Removing Begin Of Scan (BOS) Sensor (B383)

The BOS sensor is located, as shown
in figure 92.
NOTE:
To access the BOS sensor,
the air supply unit must be
removed and the
scan head must be in <scan
head access> position.
Figure 92
CAUTION:
Damage of the rope can cause banding.
Be careful by removing the BOS that you do not damage the rope.
When the stepper motor is removed and the BOS accessible, remove the plate where
the BOS is fixed from her support and replace it with a new one.
NOTE:
According the SN of the DX-S, 2 different ways to replace the BOS are existing.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 55
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.11.1
Replacing the BOS Sensor: Up to Serial Number 1220

Up to SN 1220 the BOS sensor looks like
as shown on figure 93.
It is placed behind the steel ropes drum
on the left-hand side.
Figure 93
(1)
Replace the stepper motor with the

gear box. For this step, follow the
instructions in section 6.1.
(2)
Replace the BOS sensor.
Figure 94
6.11.2
Replacing the BOS Sensor: As of Serial Number 1221

As of SN 1221 the BOS sensor and the
IP platform design are modified and look
like as shown on figure 95.
It is placed behind the steel ropes drum
on the right-hand side.
Figure 95

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 56
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
IMPORTANT:
Before replacing the BOS sensor it is necessary to understand the required steps to
pull out the board of the holding plate.
Only to display these steps the figure 96 shows the removed BOS holder plate.
There is no need to remove the holder plate.
(1)
Press with your finger on the black extension c of the BOS sensor.
(2)
Pull the board with the BOS sensor d out of the holder plate.
1
1
2
Figure 96
Figure 97

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 57
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Carefully pull out the BOS sensor

as shown on figure 98.
Figure 98
NOTE:
If the cable is not long
enough, open the cable
ducts.
Figure 99
(4)
Unplug the ST1 on the BOS sensor

and replace the BOS sensor.
(5)
Plug ST1 in the new BOS sensor.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the sensor on the rear
side of the BOS does not sharp over the
holding plate during the reassembling.
Figure 100: Sensor on the rear side of the BOS

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 58
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Replacements at the Air Supply Unit (Assembly 400)

NOTE:
Release compressed air from the tank, before you start working
at the air supply unit.
There can be condensate in the pressure tank. By releasing the compressed air the
condensate will also be removed.
The occurrence of condensate is not an indication for damage to the DX-S.
The condensate should be removed at each maintenance cycle.
7.1
Replacing the complete Air Supply Unit

The air supply unit is located at the
right-hand side of the digitizer, as shown
in figure 101.
Figure 101

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 59
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(1)
Unplug the air outlet c.
(2)
Open the two quick

action closures d.
A
1
(3)
Release the compressed air by

pressing button e.
2B
2B
C
3
Figure 102
(4)
Unplug the power supply for the

machine fan f.
(5)
Unplug two vacuum hoses g left

and right at the suction unit.
4D
E
5
5
E
Figure 103

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 60
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(6)
Unplug h (ST1#1, CAN BUS),

i (ST5, power supply), and j
(ST9, suction unit) on the
air supply board.
6F
H8
7G
Figure 104
(7)
Unplug vacuum hose k including

the black angle piece.
(8)
Unplug three vacuum hoses l

and the grounding cable 11 .
9I
10
J
K
11
J
10
J
10
Figure 105

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 61
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
CAUTION:
The slow scan unit is sensitive!
It may be destroyed
inadvertently.
Take care not to damage the steel
rope 12 of the slow scan unit!
(9)
12
L
Swivel out the air supply unit and lift

it off the bearings.
(10) To install the air supply unit in the

new digitizer, proceed in reverse
order.
Figure 106

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 62
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
7.2
Replacing the Maintenance Module (MG10)

The maintenance module is located
at the front of the air supply unit, as
shown in figure 107.
MG10
5160_chap_080.cdr
Figure 107
(1)
Take the air supply unit out as described in section 7.1.
(2)
Unscrew three screws (Phillips).
(3)
Remove the plate with the

maintenance module.
(4)
To install the plate with the

maintenance module, proceed in
reverse order.
Figure 108

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 63
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
7.3
Replacing the Lift Cylinder

INSTRUCTION:
The replacement is described in the Enclosure DD+DIS128.08E, delivered with the lift
cylinder with order number*: CM+9 5160 9100 1
*

7.4
Replacing Segment Gaskets

REQUIRED TOOL:
Special tool for fitting segment gaskets into place
Order Number*: 10+9 9999 1175 0
*
The last digit in the order number indicates the spare part
revision at release of this document. When ordering, the actual
revision of the spare part is delivered.
Figure 109
Do not use other tools when replacing segment gaskets!

NOTE:
segment gaskets.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 64
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(1)
Remove defective segment gasket

cautiously without tools.
(2)
Put segment gasket in place and

press on gently:
First the corners
Then the long sides
NOTE:
Make sure that the segment
gasket fits exactly in its place.
Figure 110
(3)
Press the corners of the segment

gasket exactly in place with the help
of the special tool.
Figure 111

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 65
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(4)
Fit the long side of the segment gasket

exactly in place with the wheel of the
special tool.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage
the lip of the strip!
Figure 112
7.5
Replacing the Vacuum Distribution Plate (B439)
INSTRUCTION:
The replacement is described in the Enclosure DD+DIS250.08E,
delivered with the Vacuum Distribution Plate with order number*: CM+9 5160 2055 2
*


03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 66
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Replacements at the Scan Unit (Assembly 500)
8.1
Removing the Scan Head

CAUTION:
Working on the scan head without a grounding strap can damage the
scan head electronics!
Wear always a grounding strap when working at the scan head!
Use the scan head box which is included in the delivery, to put down the scan head
safely.
The scan head is accessible at

the left-hand side of the
digitizer.
NOTE:
The scan head must
be in <scan head
access> position to
be able to replace
the scan head.
Figure 113

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 67
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(1)
Fix the installation bracket on the scan head (two screws).
Figure 114
(2)
Loosen mounting plate (arrows) and carefully disconnect three cables (circles)
at the scan head.
Figure 115

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 68
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Disconnect grounding connection

at left side of the scan head (circle).
Figure 116
(4)
Unscrew one Allen screw (2.5 mm) at top side left (arrow).
Figure 117

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 69
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Unscrew one Allen screw (2.5 mm) at bottom side right (arrow).
Figure 118
(6)
Unscrew one Allen screw (2.5 mm) at bottom side left (arrow).
Figure 119

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 70
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(7)
Remove the scan head carefully from its bearings (arrows):

First tilt the scan head upwards out of the lower bearings.
Then carefully pull it out of the bearing top left.
Figure 120
(8)
Clean the scan head according to Service Manual DX-S:

Chapter 9 - Maintenance (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
(9)
Perform a calibration according to Service Manual DX-S:

Chapter 3.6 - Adjustments & Calibrations (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
(10) Check image quality according to Service Manual DX-S:

Chapter 9 - Maintenance (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 71
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
IMPORTANT:
Additional cleaning can be necessary if pale stripes in slow-scan direction are visible
after the scan head has been cleaned. This may result from dust in the gap under the
optical elements of the scan head.
In this case order Sensor Cleaning Swaps via order number*: 10+ 9 9999 1266 0
Follow the instruction in the Enclosure DD+DIS256.08E, delivered with the

Cleaning Swaps.

*
**
Only applicable for Agfa Employees.

(11) If the Flexboard also should be removed skip step (12).

(12) For installation of new scan head please follow the instructions above vice
versa.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 72
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
8.2
Replacing the Scan Controller (B572)

NOTE:
scan controller.
(1)
Unscrew 5 screws (Allen key 2.5 mm).
(2)
Unplug the cables.
Figure 121

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 73
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
8.3
Replacing the Flexboard

The flexboard is located on
the scan head carrier, as
Flexboard c
Scan Head Controller d
Distribution Board e
3
3
1
22
5160_chap3.5_001.cdr
Figure 122

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 74
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
8.3.1
Removing the Flexboard

NOTE:
The scan head must be in <scan head access> position to be able to remove
the flexboard.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Open the cable holders

and remove the 3 cables
c from the distribution
board.
D
4
Remove the
grounding cable d
(Socket wrench 5.5 mm)
from the distribution
board.
1
A
Remove the pressure

on the air unit
(see section 7).
(4)
Remove the pressure

hose e by pushing
down the blue ring and
pulling out the hose.
(5)
Carefully, unscrew
4 Allen screws f
(Allen key, 2.5 mm),
so the block can be
removed from the
scan head unit.
2
B
A
1
3
C
A
1
NOTE:
Figure 123
Do not drop the

block with the
slow scan steel
ropes and the
flat cable when
unscrewing the
forth screw.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 75
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
CAUTION:
Damage of the coating of the slow scan steel ropes results in banding on the
images!
Care must be taken.
(6)
(7)
Unscrew the
3 screws g
(Allen key, 7 mm)
of the flexboard
mounting
(see figure 124).
51
Remove the
flexboard by
pushing it upward
and then pulling it
outward.
5
1
5160_chap3.5_002.cdr
Figure 124

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 76
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
8.3.2
Mounting the Flexboard

NOTE:
The scan head must be in <scan head access> position to be able to mount the
flexboard.
(1)
Insert the new flexboard.

Fasten the 3 screws (see figure 125)
(Allen key, 7 mm) of the flexboard mounting.
(2)
Unscrew the captive

socket screws c
(socket wrench, 3 mm)
located at the flexboard.
NOTE:
1E
Do not drop the

block with the
slow scan steel
ropes and the
flat cable when
unscrewing the
forth screw.
Figure 125

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 77
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
(4)
Carefully, fasten the

4 Allen screws e
(Allen key, 2.5 mm), so
the block is mounted to
the scan head unit.
D
3
Plug in the pressure hose
f by pushing down the
6
A
blue ring and pushing in

the hose.
(5)
(6)
Screw on the
grounding cable g
(Socket wrench 5.5 mm)
to the distribution board.
5
B
A6
Plug in the 3 cables h

to the distribution board.
C
4
A
6
Figure 126
(7)
For reinstallation of the scan head, if applicable,

please follow the instructions of section 8.1 vice versa.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 78
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Replacements at the Erasure Unit
NOTE:
Two different Erasure Units are used in the digitizers ex factory:
For SN < 1402 the Flashlight Erasure Unit (see section 9.1)
For SN 1402 the LED Erasure Unit (see section 9.2)
9.1
Replacements at the Flashlight Erasure Unit
9.1.1
Removing the Flashlight Erasure Unit

CAUTION:
During replacement of the erasure unit damage to the lower glass fiber cable
can occur.
IMPORTANT:
During replacement of the erasure unit a malfunction (Service Client message:
Failure at erasure unit, Error 1080) can occur if the optical cables are connected
in the wrong way.
Mark the two optical glass fiber cables that when you reinstall the cables you know
which cable belongs to which plug.
(1)
Disconnect the two optical

glass fiber cables c, d and
then the power supply e.
1A
2
B
3
C
Figure 127

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 79
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Press down the lever on the upper

side of the flashlight erasure unit to
unlock the flashlight erasure unit.
Figure 128
(3)
Pull out the complete unit:

Begin pulling straight, then a
bit oblique, with left side (side of
connectors) ahead.
Figure 129
9.1.2
Replacing the Filter Glass

(1)
Loosen six slotted-head screws

and lift off the plate which bears
the two fans.
Figure 130

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 80
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Pull out the front glass.
Figure 131
9.1.3
Replacing the Lamp

(1)
Unscrew six screws (slotted-head

screwdriver).
(2)
Lift off the side plate which bears

the two fans.
Figure 132
(3)
Move out board as far as

necessary to have better access
to the plugs.
Figure 133
(4)
Unplug K306, K204, K107, K101 on the board.
(5)
Loosen six screws

(slotted-head screwdriver), as
(6)
Lift off the side plate.
(7)

to the plugs.
Figure 134

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 81
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(8)
Unplug K305 on board and fiber

optic cables on the side plate.
Figure 135
(9)
Figure 136
(10) Catch the lamp on both exterior

sides and take it out.
Figure 137

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 82
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
9.2
Replacements at the LED Erasure Unit
NOTE:
There are no spare parts for the LED Erasure Unit.
If a part of the LED Erasure Unit is broken (e. g. LEDs) it has to be replaced
completely.
CAUTION:
During replacement of the erasure unit damage to the LEDs
can occur if they hit the DX-S housing.
(1)
Disconnect first the flat band cable

and then the power supply c.
1
A
Figure 138
(2)
Press down the lever on the

upper side of the LED erasure unit
to unlock it.
Figure 139

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 83
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Pull out the complete unit: Begin

pulling straight, then a bit oblique,
with left side (side of connectors)
ahead.
Figure 140
9.2.1
Prior to Mounting the LED Erasure Unit in a DX-S up to SN1402

IMPORTANT:
Loosely hanging optical glass fiber cables can disturb the function of the DX-S or even
damage moving parts inside the DX-S.
Make sure that all optical glass fiber cables are fastened with the cable clips.
(1)
Fasten the free end of the optical

glass fiber cables with the cable clips
so that the motion of machine parts
cannot be disturbed.
Figure 141

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 84
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(2)
Remove the two optical glass fiber cables c from the sockets (RX and RT) d
on the IP handling board.
1
2
Figure 142
(3)
Put the two light tight caps e onto the sockets (RX and RT) d of the
fiber optic cables at the IP handling board.
B2
C
3
Figure 143

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 85
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
IMPORTANT:
The air inlet and the air outlet of the former Flashlight erasure unit are no longer used.
Make sure they are completely closed by the delivered foam parts.
The light sealing foam parts must not protrude inside the DX-S case.
CAUTION:
The image quality is reduced if light falls on the scan unit of the DX-S.
All light sealing foam parts have to be placed in a position, that no light can enter
the DX-S case.
(4)
Place two of the big light sealing

foam parts f at the place of the
recesses of the air outlet at the
inner rear side of the DX-S case.
E
4
E4
Figure 144
(5)
Place one of the big light sealing

foam parts f and the little light
sealing foam part g at the recesses
of the air inlet openings at the inner
front side of the DX-S case.
E4
5F
Figure 145
NOTE:
DX-S digitizers with the LED erasure unit already installed in production (SN > 1402)
feature a metal plate instead of the air outlet device.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 86
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
9.2.2
Mounting the LED Erasure Unit

IMPORTANT:
During replacement of the erasure unit, the unprotected LEDs can be damaged, if they
hit the DX-S housing.
Carefully feed the unit into the guidelines.
(1)
Feed in the right side of the

LED erasure unit with the right
black slider c first along the
right guideline for the
erasure unit.
Figure 146
(2)
Push in the complete unit:

Begin pushing with right side
ahead, then a bit oblique and
then straight.
The three guidelines at the top
of the unit will position the unit
in the right way.
Figure 147

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 87
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(3)
Connect the flat band cable d of

the connector side of the unit to
the socket e on the distribution
board and fix it with the cable clip
f above.
H2
J4
Figure 148
(4)
Connect the power supply g

to the erasure unit.
B5
Figure 149

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 88
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
10
Replacements at Cassette: Replacing a defective ID-Chip
REQUIRED TOOL:
Small blunt tool
(not sharp-edged) for
opening DX-S cassettes.
This tool is delivered with the
shipped DX-S cassette.
Figure 150
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Press the lock mechanism

c in cutout of cassette
with a blunt tool
(not sharp-edged).
Open shutter d carefully

with both thumbs, so the IP
cannot be scratched by the
shutter.
Take out the IP e very
cautiously and make sure
that it is not scratched by
the shutter d.
2
3
pressure
even surface
pressure
even surface
Figure 151
Place the IP flat on the

edge of a table.
Figure 152

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 89
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Release the ID-chip with

the help of a pointed tool
(e.g. a ball pen).
Figure 153
(6)
Insert the new ID-chip.
(7)
Note down the IP serial

number, starting with 302.
Figure 154: Example of a IP serial number
(8)
Insert IP in cassette and close cassette.
(9)
Re-initialize the ID-chip

with the RF Tag
Initialization Tool which:
Figure 155: Example of a IP serial number
Up to NX 2.0 has to be installed separately on the NX.

The Tool can be downloaded from:
GSO Library - Computed Radiography - CR Workstation Software NX 1.0 - Freeware
The download (approximately 13,6 MB) contains the software itself and
its documentation.
As of NX 2.0 can be find in the NX workstation in the menu:

<Start - Agfa - NX - Service - Install Tools - RF Tag
Initialization Tool>

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.5 / 90
Chapter 3.6
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160

This document describes the DX-S calibration procedures.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
2.2
04-2008
Changes
compared to previous Version 2.1:
Added:
- Information on exposing a flat field,
refer to section 4.1.
- Exposure parameters, refer to section 4.1.
Layout and structural improvements.
Document
Title
n.a.
n.a.


eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v05
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 2
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
LIST OF CONTENTS
PERFORMING A SCAN HEAD FOCUS CALIBRATION .........................................................4
PERFORMING A SCAN HEAD SCAN LINE CALIBRATION ...................................................6

2.1
Scan Line Calibration Procedure ..............................................................................................6
2.2
Possible Reasons for Failing a Scan Line Calibration..............................................................8
SPECIFIC CASSETTE POSITIONING FOR FULL LEG FULL SPINE APPLICATION............9
VERIFICATION.......................................................................................................................11
4.1
Exposing a Flat Field ..............................................................................................................11
4.2
Evaluating a Flat Field ............................................................................................................12
4.2.1
Calibration Lines .....................................................................................................................13
4.2.2
Banding ...................................................................................................................................13
4.2.3
Dust.........................................................................................................................................14

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
There are two different calibrations necessary on DX-S digitizer:
the scan head focus calibration and
the scan head scan line calibration
Scan head focus calibration must be carried out prior to the scan head scan line
calibration (see section 0).
Calibrations have to be carried out after the first installation of the scan head and
whenever the scan head has been removed.
Performing a Scan Head Focus Calibration
NOTE:
For the procedure the digitizer and the Control PC need to be started and
the user is logged in as Administrator.
1.
Erase an image plate of the biggest format available at customer site.
2.
Expose the cassette with a dose of 10 Gy.

(In case Full Leg Full Spine cassettes are used for calibration,
follow the positioning instructions in section 3 of this chapter.)
NOTE:
1.5 mm Cu filter (CM+9 5155 1015 x) to obtain a dose of 10 Gy:
12 mAs
75 kVp
1.3 m (51,2) distance and
large focus.

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.
Turn the cassette 180
4.
Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed by a dose of
20 Gy in total.
5.
Go to
Start Program Agfa DX-S DX-S Service Client
Open DX-S Service Client.
6.
Select Preventive Maintenance Calibration.
7.
The current calibration line for gain and offset is loaded from the digitizer and
is displayed.
8.
Select <Focus calibration> (takes a while).
9.
Click <Calibrate>.
(bullet in screen gets green ready for calibration now)
10. Insert exposed cassette.

IP is scanned and erased.
11. The resulting calibration line is automatically stored in the e-label of the
scan head control board.
As an example for the resulting calibration lines see figure 1:
figure 1
04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
12. Remove cassette from digitizer.

The scan head focus calibration is finished now.
Performing a Scan Head Scan Line Calibration

NOTE:
For the procedure the digitizer and the Control PC need to be started
and the user is logged in as administrator.
2.1
Scan Line Calibration Procedure

1.
Erase an IP of the biggest format available at the customer site.
2.
Expose the cassette with a dose of 40 Gy.

(In case Full Leg Full Spine cassettes are used for calibration,
follow the positioning instructions in section 3 of this chapter.)
NOTE:
12 mAs
75 kVp
large focus.
3.
Turn the cassette 180
4.
Expose the cassette again.

After the second exposure the cassette has been exposed by a dose of
80 Gy in total.

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
The plate can also be exposed with a dose of 8 x 10 Gy = 80 Gy.
5.
Go to Start Program Agfa DX-S DX-S Service Client Open DX-S Service
Client.
6.
Select Preventive Maintenance Calibration.
7.
The current calibration line for gain and offset is loaded from the digitizer and is
displayed.
8.
Select <Scan line calibration> (takes a while).

Click Calibrate (bullet in screen gets green ready for calibration now).
figure 2
9.
Insert the exposed cassette.

IP is scanned and erased.
10. Wait until calibration data for gain and offset is transferred
(needs several minutes).
11. Check, if the calibration lines are stored in the Control PC.

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
NOTE:
Additionally to the storage in the e-label, the files of the calibration
(Gain.stc and Offset.stc) are stored in the following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\\Application Data\Agfa\DXS\Offset.stc or Gains.stc
The calibration files will be overwritten by the newer ones. If you want to keep them,
you have to save them with another name.
12. Remove cassette from digitizer

The scan head scan line calibration is finished now.
NOTE:
Workflow of scan line calibration:
The image plate is being scanned and the gain calibration curve is determined
(blue calibration line).
The image plate is being erased and
Scanned for a second time to find out the offset calibration curve (red calibration
line)
The gain calibration curve (blue) calibrates for homogenous flat fields.
The offset calibration curve (red) detects the background noise of the CCD element.
The values calculated during the second scan show this background noise. Thats
why this curve is written after the image plate has been erased.
In a second step the background noise of the CCD elements is eliminated in order to
obtain a good image quality.
2.2
Possible Reasons for Failing a Scan Line Calibration

There are mainly three possible reasons for a failed Scan Line Calibration:
One or more CCD elements are defective.
The offset value (red value) is not accepted, because it is too high.
The installation position of the scan head is completely out of tolerance.

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Specific Cassette Positioning for Full Leg Full Spine

Application
REQUIRED CASSETTE:
Always use the largest available cassette.
If Genrad and FLFS cassettes of size 35x43 cm are available, use a Genrad
cassette.
If no Genrad cassette in size 35x43 cm is available, however a FLFS cassette

(FLFS cassettes are only available in size 35x43 cm), use
the FLFS cassette. Observe special procedure described below.
Example 1:
The customer uses 2 x Genrad cassettes 35x43 cm plus 3 x FLFS
cassettes 35x43 cm use the 35x43 cm Genrad cassette
Example 2:
The customer uses 3 x FLFS cassettes 35x43 cm, plus 3 x Genrad
cassettes 24x30 cm use the 35x43 cm FLFS cassette
Procedure
1.
Select the largest available cassette.

If possible, use a Genrad cassette.
2.
Open the cassette and check the image plate (IP) for scratches.
If no scratches are visible, select this IP.

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.
Expose the IP.

If you use a FLFS cassette for shading calibration, put 2 cassettes underneath
the FLFS cassette: This covers the area where the cassette has no backscatter
protection. Only this area has to be covered, which is used by the digitizer to
determine the shading calibration curves, see figure 3.
Exposure 1
180 rotation
Exposure 2
FLFS cassette
Area used by
shading calibration
Area used by
shading calibration
5160_ch3.6_010.cdr
Put a cassette underneath this area.

This prevents, that the missing
backscatter protection falsifies the
shading calibration result.
figure 3

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Verification
NOTE:
For the verification of the calibration a flat field has to be exposed.
4.1
Exposing a Flat Field
(1)
Place a cassette of the biggest

format used at customer site in
length direction to the X-ray tube,
see figure 4.
(2)
Rotating
Anode
x-ray tube
Cathode
5155_reg01_006.cdr
figure 4
NOTE:
12 mAs
75 kVp
large focus.
(3)
(4)

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
(5)
Identify the cassette on the NX Processing Station with the following parameters:
Exam Group:
<System Diagnosis>.
Exposure Type: <Flat Field>.
Detector Sensitivity: <200>.
figure 5
Definitions
Evaluating a Flat Field

Slow scan direction
represents the movement of the scan head on
the scan head carrier.
Fast scan direction
slow scan direction
4.2
fast scan direction
figure 6
(3)
Inspect the scanned image for homogeneity.

If there are no lines visible (see figure 6), the image quality is acceptable.
(4)
Compare with the following sketches, if there are unacceptable effects:
Calibration Lines (see section 4.2.1)
Banding (see section 4.2.2)
Dust (see section 4.2.3)

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.2.1
Calibration Lines
Sharp white lines in
slow scan direction showing the transition
lines from one CCD element to the other.
(1)
(2)

Expose another flat field and check the
image quality.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
NOTE:
If there are unacceptable image flaws,
please contact the
Regional Support Network (RSN).
figure 7
4.2.2
Banding
Blurred white lines in fast-scan direction on
the flat field. This can happen due to
inhomogeneities in the slow-scan process.
(e. g. stepper motors, air bearings, steel
ropes,)
(1)
(2)
Check that during scanning no

vibration has occurred on the device.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
NOTE:
If there are unacceptable image flaws,
please contact the
figure 8

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.2.3
Dust
(1)
(2)

If it is, clean scan head according to
chapter 9 of the service manual.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Expose another flat field and check the

image quality.
(For a better illustration the dust lines have

been pointed out in figure 9).
NOTE:
If there are still unacceptable image flaws,
please contact the
figure 9

04-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.6 / 14
Chapter 3.8
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches
DX-S
Type 5160

This document describes software releases and patches for the DX-S digitizer.
It also describes open and solved bugs of software releases.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.3
06-2008
Added Release Info for STR_1504,

details see section 1, page 6.
Document
Title
Chapter 8
Manufacturing Standard Modifications; DD+DIS014.05E
SB No. 33
New DX-S Digitizer Software STR_1504 released;

DD+DIS081.08E


eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v06
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 2
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
LIST OF CONTENTS
RELEASE INFO FOR STR_1504.............................................................................................6

1.1
Solved Bugs ..............................................................................................................................6
1.2
Solved Bugs - Extended or Modified Functionality ...................................................................7
1.3
Open Bugs ................................................................................................................................7
RELEASE INFO FOR STR_1404B ..........................................................................................9

2.1
Solved Bugs - Digitizer Operation.............................................................................................9
2.2
Open Bugs ................................................................................................................................9
2.2.1
Open Bugs Digitizer Operation ..............................................................................................9
2.2.2
Open Bugs - Software Update on the Digitizer.......................................................................10
RELEASE INFO FOR STR_1404...........................................................................................11

3.1
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................11
3.1.1
Solved Bugs - Digitizer Operation...........................................................................................11
3.1.2
Solved Bugs - Wrong Handling of Digitizer Errors..................................................................11
3.1.3
Solved Bugs - Digitizer does not recognize Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures ....11
3.1.4
Solved Bugs - User Interface ..................................................................................................12
3.1.5
Solved Bugs - Wrong Descriptions and Naming.....................................................................12
3.2
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................13
3.2.1
Open Bugs Digitizer Operation ............................................................................................13
3.2.2
Open Bugs - Software Update on the Digitizer.......................................................................13

4.1
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................14
4.1.1
Solved Bugs in Digitizer Operation .........................................................................................14
4.2
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................14
4.2.1
Bugs in Digitizer Operation .....................................................................................................14
4.2.2
Wrong Handling of Digitizer Errors .........................................................................................15
4.2.3
Digitizer does not recognize Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures............................15
4.2.4
User Interface Bugs ................................................................................................................15
4.2.5
Bugs during Software Update on the Digitizer........................................................................16
4.2.6
Wrong Descriptions and Naming ............................................................................................16

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 3
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E

5.1
What is new in STR_1305? ....................................................................................................17
5.2
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................17
5.2.1
Solved Bugs in Digitizer Operation .........................................................................................17
5.2.2
Solved Bugs in Handling of Digitizer Errors............................................................................18
5.2.3
Solved Bugs in recognizing Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures.............................18
5.2.4
Solved Bugs during Configuration of the Control PC for DX-S...............................................18
5.2.5
Corrected Descriptions and Naming.......................................................................................19
5.3
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................19
5.3.1
Bugs in Digitizer Operation .....................................................................................................19
5.3.2
Wrong Handling of Digitizer Errors .........................................................................................20
5.3.3
Digitizer does not recognize Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures............................20
5.3.4
User Interface Bugs ................................................................................................................20
5.3.5
Bugs during Software Update on the Digitizer........................................................................20
5.3.6
Wrong Descriptions and Naming ............................................................................................21

6.1
What is new in STR_1207? ....................................................................................................22
6.2
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................22
6.2.1
Hardware.................................................................................................................................22
6.3
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................22
6.3.1
Error Messages.......................................................................................................................22
6.3.2
Hardware.................................................................................................................................23
6.3.3
Software ..................................................................................................................................24

7.1
What is new in STR_1206? ....................................................................................................25
7.2
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................25
7.2.1
Error Messages.......................................................................................................................25
7.2.2
Hardware.................................................................................................................................26
7.2.3
Software ..................................................................................................................................26

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 4
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
7.3
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................27
7.3.1
Error Messages.......................................................................................................................27
7.3.2
Hardware.................................................................................................................................28
7.3.3
Software ..................................................................................................................................28
RELEASE INFO FOR STR_1102B ........................................................................................29

8.1
What is new in STR_1102B? ..................................................................................................29
8.2
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................29
8.3
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................29
8.3.1
Error Messages.......................................................................................................................29
8.3.2
Hardware.................................................................................................................................29
8.3.3
Software ..................................................................................................................................30
RELEASE INFO FOR STR_1102A ........................................................................................31

9.1
What is new in STR_1102A? ..................................................................................................31
9.2
Solved Bugs ............................................................................................................................31
9.2.1
Error Messages.......................................................................................................................31
9.2.2
Hardware.................................................................................................................................31
9.2.3
Software ..................................................................................................................................32
9.3
Open Bugs ..............................................................................................................................32
9.3.1
Error Messages.......................................................................................................................32
9.3.2
Hardware.................................................................................................................................32
9.3.3
Software ..................................................................................................................................33

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 5
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Release Info for STR_1504
1.1
Solved Bugs
1)
Due to pre-stimulation effect, the first image lines of a DX-S image show a 30%
too high signal (black line artifacts). A signal overshoot has been verified at
begin of scan with standard software (not with Musica2).
The residual decay was due to the debug mode, which interrupted the
pre-stimulation of the IP. Without the debug mode the signal decay is
eliminated completely.
2)
The digitizer does not restart automatically after the upload of nodes software.
3)
If a cassette is entered into the digitizer immediately after the start-up, it is

possible that the first inserted cassette is not notified to NX and the system
hangs. No images will be lost.
4)
DX-S Error 32160, when pulling out the cassette after a long inactive time
(approximately 40 minutes). During this time the message pull out the
cassette is displayed on the digitizer. This happened in the
DX-Si test room.
5)
Calculation of time interval since last maintenance incorrect.

In case of devices which are used very infrequently, the time interval since the
last maintenance is not working.
If, for example, the last maintenance dates back 100 days and 3 hours, the
software calculates it to date back 3 hours instead of 100 days and 3 hours.
6)
Synchronisation of Elabel doesnt need reboot of complete System

(DX-S and Control PC) any longer.
(Refer to SB No.24 Replacement of a PCB (Printed Circuit Board) or Spare
Part equipped with E-label Data requires restart of both
NX Processing Station and DX-S).
7)
Popped up maintenance indicator shows "confirm" button without

any function.
8)
Retries for AirSupply/Vacuum Fixation are not listed in the infocounter.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 6
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
9)
1.2
The software counts every click on the confirmation button for the
"high altitude" flag.
Therefore the "high altitude" flag is un-checked every even time the
confirmation button is pressed.
Solved Bugs - Extended or Modified Functionality

1)
Reduced duty cycle of device fan to reduce dust pollution
2)
Enlarged scan area for FLFS application
3)
Removed stop/start-Service from Service Manager: This has become

necessary to allow an unattended installation, as required by NX.
4)
Improved calibration for FLFS (overscanning): Automatic extrapolation of the

calibration line at FLFS
When scanning image plates in full leg / full spine-mode, the resulting image is
now wider. The extra area of the calibration is automatically extrapolated.
1.3
Open Bugs
1)
The Error Viewer pops up with an old error message. If one scrolls in the
window of the Error Viewer the current error can be found.
Workaround:
Crosscheck the time of the error message with the actual time.
2)
Planned implementation software functionality to check module or

board replacements (as in CR 30-X CRE_1505).
NOTE:
Do not mount a board for testing and send it back to the spare part
storage afterwards. Otherwise wrong data on the e-label could be
transferred to other digitizers which possibly results in an error
message.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 7
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3)
Error 1127 is displayed: "Error occurred. Please contact service to fix the
problem.". This error occurs when the cassette is inserted into the digitizer
before the Read button is pressed.
Workaround:
Restart the digitizer and remove the cassette. Proceed according to the
preventive action.
Preventive action:
First press the Read button and afterwards enter the cassette.
(The error also occurs when the cassette is entered prior to pressing the
Read button.)
4)
An error is displayed, but no e-mail was sent (the AGFA e-mail server specified
was not reachable).
Action: Check the info counters for the errors on site.
5)
Missing files (ErrorViewerLog.xml, TwainLog.xml, dx-s.bmp) during

backup/restore procedure. These files are not essential for the operation of the
system. The log files are created new and are mainly important to be backed
up, but not to be restored.
Workaround for PC with NX software:
Stop NX and ErrorViewer before restoring.
6)
There is no error message if the digitizer halts because of overheating of the

erasure unit. If the erasure unit is switched off due to overheating then an error
is displayed.
Workaround: Ensure that the exhausted air exit at the rear side of the digitizer is
not covered. At least 10 cm free space is required behind the digitizer.
7)
Confirming service activity is not mandatory.

Current status is that there is a possibility to confirm, but there is no mandatory
request.
Workaround: The service engineer must mandatorily confirm his activities when
logging off. Therefore select Maintenance Indicator in Service Client and press
confirm button.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 8
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Release Info for STR_1404B
2.1
Solved Bugs - Digitizer Operation

1)
Can Communication Error with LED-Erasure Unit
2)
SW Patch STR_1404A
3)
The Disconnection of the Flashlight Erasure Unit Power Supply could not be
detected after the start-up.
2.2
Open Bugs
2.2.1
Open Bugs Digitizer Operation

1)
After last cycle of endurance run (Service Function) the cassette stays clamped
in the digitizer.
Workaround 1: Avoid this press stop button before last endurance
run cycle ends.
Workaround 2: If the cassette stays clamped, restart the digitizer.
2)
The digitizer does not complete the current cassette cycle if the
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) reports a power failure and runs on battery.
This error occurs when the power failure commences between the input of a
cassette and the identification.
In this case the image plate is stick back into the cassette and the cassette is
released, but there is no message displayed that the image plate is neither
scanned nor erased.
This bug is not related to the Digitizer Software and, therefore, is controlled
by the NX team.
3)
Under certain conditions, it is possible that the first inserted cassette is not
notified to NX and the system hangs. No images will be lost.
Workaround: If this symptom occurs, switch off and then restart the digitizer.
The cassette will be ejected and can be scanned normally.
4)
DX-S Error 32160, when pulling out the cassette after a long inactive time
(approximately 40 minutes). During this time the message pull out the
cassette is displayed on the digitizer. This happened in the DX-Si test room.
Workaround: Restart the DX-S.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 9
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5)
2.2.2
No synchronisation of the E-label, if spare part is exchanged.

(HQ_0704270004).
Workaround: Reboot the NX as well as the DX-S. When the DX-S is
reconnected the synchronisation is performed automatically.
Open Bugs - Software Update on the Digitizer

1)
The digitizer does not restart automatically after the upload of

nodes software.
Workaround: Follow the Digitizer Software installation instructions carefully.
Digitizer has to be switched off / on "manually.
(see Digitizer Manual - Installation Instruction: DD+DIS439.05E)
2)
During the upload of nodes software, irrelevant error messages

(Errors 1078, 1080, 1079, 1075, 1077, 1076) are displayed in the
Error Viewer.
Workaround: Ignore these error messages.
3)
The remote upload of DX-S software is not reliable.

Workaround: Follow the Digitizer Software installation instructions carefully.
Digitizer has to be switched off / on "manually
(see Digitizer Manual - Installation Instruction: DD+DIS439.05E).
Prefer the software upload at the site.
4)
DX-S software could not be installed on a non-NX workstation.

After starting the DX-S software installation (msi file), the error
"No management information available for the selected path" occurred
and the installation could not be continued.
This test was repeated on 3 WASP machines running Windows 2000.
(.NET and J# redistributables were already installed)
Workaround: The Service Computer is not supporting Win2000. WinXP or
Win2003 has to be installed.
5)
Calculation of time interval since last maintenance incorrect.

In case of devices which are used very infrequently, the time interval since the
last maintenance is not working.
When, e. g. the last maintenance dates back 100 days and 3 hours, the
software calculates it to date back 3 hours instead of 100 days and 3 hours!
(Error found with tests of CR 30 / code review)

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 10
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.1
Solved Bugs
3.1.1
Solved Bugs - Digitizer Operation

1)
One step of the Diagnose cycle (from state IP with vacuum gripper caught
backwards to IP on scanner stage) does not work. The digitizer hangs up.
2)
Sporadically image data transfer from the DX-S to the processing station is not
completed. Digitizer stops and on the NX processing station
error message 32003 comes up.
3)
DX-S stops without any error message.

At endurance run on DX-S the equipment stopped without any message to the
user at all.
It is caused by a communication problem at the TAG-reader.
3.1.2
Solved Bugs - Wrong Handling of Digitizer Errors

1)
The digitizer changes its state to Ready although the control PC displays
error 1077 "Failure at cassette handling module" during start-up.
The digitizer is really ready. You can ignore this error message.
2)
E-Label entries in DX-S Service Client are not displayed correctly.

Error list in E-Label of power supply unit doesnt correspond with E-label entries
of DX-S Service Client.
3.1.3
Solved Bugs - Digitizer does not recognize Errors caused by incorrect Repair
Measures
1)
The digitizer does not display any error message during start-up if plug ST8 at
air control board is disconnected.
2)
In a special test case the plugs ST11/13 or ST21 from scanner control board
were disconnected while the digitizer was in Ready mode.
No error message was shown.
06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 11
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.1.4
3.1.5
Solved Bugs - User Interface

1)
The button <Confirm> does not work.
2)
No <Confirm> button is displayed, if an image plate without 2D calibration is

inserted or if data on the ID chip is inconsistent.
Solved Bugs - Wrong Descriptions and Naming

1)
Internationalization (different languages) is not available. There is no

mechanism available that automatically enables the use of the language
according to the regional settings in system control of the
NX processing station.
With the release of STR_1404 error messages for the following languages are
available:
2)
Chinese China
Japanese
Chinese Taiwan
Korean
Czech
Latvian
Danish
Lithuanian
Dutch
Norwegian
English
Polish
Estonian
Portuguese
Finish
Russian
French
Slovak
German
Slovenian
Greek
Spanish
Hungarian
Swedish
Italian
Turkish
There are naming inconsistencies in Info counter and E-labels.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 12
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
3.2
Open Bugs
3.2.1
Open Bugs Digitizer Operation
3.2.2
1)

erasure unit.
Ensure that the exhausted air exit at the rear side of the digitizer is not covered.
At least 10 cm free space is required behind the digitizer.
2)
in the digitizer.
Workaround 1:
To avoid this press stop button before last endurance
run cycle ends.
Workaround 2:
When the cassette stays clamped restart the digitizer.
3)
scanned nor erased.
This bug is not related to the Digitizer Software and therefore is controlled by
the NX team.
4)
Under certain conditions, it is possible that the first inserted cassette is not
notified to NX and the system hangs. No images will be lost.
Workaround: If this symptom occurs switch off and then restart the digitizer. The
cassette will be ejected and can be scanned normally.
Open Bugs - Software Update on the Digitizer

1)
The digitizer does not restart automatically after the upload of

nodes software.
Workaround: Follow the Digitizer Software installation instruction carefully.
2)
During the upload of nodes software, irrelevant error messages are displayed in
the Error Viewer.
3)

Workaround: Prefer the software upload at the site.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 13
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E

NOTE:
For more information about the mandatory upgrade to Digitizer Software STR_1305
or higher and the change of the Processing station Software to NX 1.0 refer to the
Mandatory Service Bulletin No. 19, DD+DIS217.06E.
4.1
Solved Bugs
4.1.1
Solved Bugs in Digitizer Operation

Puzzled images due to electrostatic discharge (HQ_0601270001).
With software version STR_1306 the system automatically restarts when it detects a
puzzled image. The intact image appears on the NX. A manual system stop by the
operator is not necessary.
4.2
Open Bugs
4.2.1
Bugs in Digitizer Operation

1)

erasure unit.
Ensure that the exhausted air exit at the rear side of the digitizer is not covered.
At least 10 cm free space is required behind the digitizer.
2)
scanned nor erased.
3)
Avoid this step in the Diagnose cycle.
4)
in the digitizer.
Workaround: Restart the digitizer.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 14
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5)
4.2.2
Sporadically image data transfer from the DX-S to the processing station is not
completed. Digitizer stops and on the NX processing station error message
32003 comes up.
In this case, try to restart the NX processing station (not the DX-S).
Wrong Handling of Digitizer Errors

The digitizer changes its state to Ready although the control PC displays error 1077
"Failure at cassette handling module" during start-up.
4.2.3
4.2.4
Digitizer does not recognize Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures

1)
2)
In a special test case the plugs ST11/13 or ST21 from

scanner control board were disconnected while the digitizer was in
Ready mode. No error message was shown.
User Interface Bugs

Sometimes the Error Viewer window cannot be closed by clicking the
<Confirm> button.
Workaround: Close the window by clicking the x at top right.
1)
The button <Confirm> does not work.
2)


06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 15
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
4.2.5
4.2.6
Bugs during Software Update on the Digitizer

1)
Workaround: Follow the installation instruction carefully.
2)
the Error Viewer.
3)

Wrong Descriptions and Naming

These bugs do not impact the digitizer operation.
1)
Internationalization (different languages) is not available.
2)
There are naming inconsistencies in Info counter and e-labels.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 16
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E

NOTE:
Software version STR_1305 has been released for production but is not available as
an upgrade for the DX-S. Install software version STR_1306 or higher instead.
NOTE:
For more information about the mandatory upgrade to Digitizer Software STR_1305 or
higher and the change of the Processing station Software to NX 1.0 refer to the
Mandatory Service Bulletin No. 19, DD+DIS217.06E.
5.1
What is new in STR_1305?

Digitizer software version STR_1305 requires processing station software NX 1.0 to be
installed on the control PC.
It does no longer run with processing station software version CR QS 3.0.229.
5.2
Solved Bugs
5.2.1
Solved Bugs in Digitizer Operation

1)
Puzzled images due to electrostatic discharge (HQ_0601270001).

With software version STR_1305 the system must be restarted manually by the
operator when a puzzled image is detected.
The intact image appears on the NX after the manual restart.
2)
The contrast range of new LCD module was too low.
3)
The driver chip for stepper motor IP transport was overheated.
4)
In the e-label tab Value, the hours of operation entries did not count the hours
of standby.
5)
After unplugging and plugging the FireWire connection, the

DX-S did not reliably re-connect to the control PC.
6)
Grid line suppression was not satisfactory.

The grid reduces the X-ray scattering but causes a regular pattern of very fine
lines in the original image. The algorithm to remove these fine lines is not
satisfactory.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 17
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
7)
Starting errors of the flash erasure unit occurred because one retry for the
ignition of the flash lamp was not sufficient.
8)
The stepper motor which drives the locking mechanism, lost its
position sporadically.
Solved Bugs in Handling of Digitizer Errors

1)
The digitizer changed state to Ready (green) although an error 32126 was
shown on the control PC beforehand.
2)
In case the Calibration Client was activated on the control PC, the
status display of the digitizer switched from red to green.
3)
The digitizer did not display any error message during start-up if plug ST9 at
Air Control board was disconnected.
Solved Bugs in recognizing Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures

1)
The digitizer did not display any error message if Erasure Unit node
was disconnected.
2)
The power supply did not detect that its fan was disconnected.
Solved Bugs during Configuration of the Control PC for DX-S

A Windows message "Hardware Installation: The software has not passed Windows
Logo testing " popped up if a non-staged PC was configured for FireWire access
to the DX-S.
This case only occurs if the hard disk of a control PC must be exchanged.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 18
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.2.5
Corrected Descriptions and Naming

1)
Explanations for several error codes were inaccurate.
2)
There was no satisfactory description of cause and cure for error 32126.
3)
Under special test conditions, a wrong image was displayed in the Error Viewer
window during the rescue cycle. It did not match the error message.
5.3
Open Bugs
5.3.1
Bugs in Digitizer Operation

1)
The ID chip on the image plate cannot be initialized.

The necessary functionality is not implemented in the
NX processing station software.
In case of problems with the ID chip, replace the complete image plate.
2)
There is no error message if the digitizer halts because of overheating of

the erasure unit.
Ensure that the exhausted air exit at the back side of the digitizer is not
covered. At least 10 cm free space is required behind the digitizer.
3)
In this case the image plate is put back into the cassette and the cassette is
scanned nor erased.
4)
Avoid this step in the Diagnose cycle.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 19
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.3.2
Wrong Handling of Digitizer Errors

The digitizer changes its state to Ready although the control PC displays error 1077
"Failure at cassette handling module" during start-up.
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
Digitizer does not recognize Errors caused by incorrect Repair Measures

1)
2)
In a special test case the plugs ST11/13 or ST21 from

scanner control board were disconnected while the digitizer was in
Ready mode. No error message was shown.
User Interface Bugs

1)
Sometimes the Error Viewer window cannot be closed by clicking the

<Confirm> button.
Workaround: Close the window by clicking the x at top right.
2)
The <Confirm> button does not work.
3)

Bugs during Software Update on the Digitizer

1)
Workaround: Follow the installation instructions carefully.
2)
the Error Viewer.
3)


06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 20
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
5.3.6
Wrong Descriptions and Naming

These bugs do not impact the digitizer operation:
1)
Internationalization (different languages) is not available.
2)
There are naming inconsistencies in Info counter and e-labels.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 21
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.1

A detailed error message is shown if the offset adjustment fails.
6.2
Solved Bugs
6.2.1
Hardware
Solution for PowerHelp complaint HQ_0511240004:
The cause of sporadic hang-ups at some customer sites (Genuine Channels)
is eliminated.
6.3
Open Bugs
6.3.1
Error Messages
1)
Digitizer changes state to Ready (green) although an error 32126 was shown
on the control PC beforehand.
Sequence of activities:
ST6 at Air Control board is unconnected during Ready state;
digitizer attempts to suck three times and displays error 32126;
digitizer releases cassette and changes state to Ready (green).
2)
Digitizer does not display any error message during start-up if ST9 at
Air Control board is disconnected.
3)
Button <Confirm> in error message 33006 does not work. Window must be
closed by clicking the "x" at top right.
4)
5)
No <Confirm> button is displayed in error message box, when IP without 2D

Calibration is inserted.
6)
If cassette cannot be closed and QS software / ID Viewer is not started, then

the Rescue cycle is not started and the digitizers halts without
error message.
7)
Error message 1120 is displayed if an empty cassette is inserted.
8)
9)
Erasure dose 750 mR is accepted without error message although

not available.
10)
Digitizer displays error 1077 during start-up but state changes to Ready.
11)
Displays error 1077 during start-up but state changes to Ready.
12)
If data on the ID chip are inconsistent, an error message is displayed without a

button <Confirm>.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 22
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.3.2
13)
When digitizer is in standby mode, no error message is shown when ST11/13

or ST21 from Scanner control board is disconnected. .
14)
Irrelevant error messages appear during nodes upload.
Hardware
1)
After (partial or complete) upload of nodes software the digitizer is not

re-started. Digitizer must be switched off / on manually.
2)
New LCD module needs a larger voltage range for contrast..
3)
Driver chip for IP transport stepper motor overheats..
4)
Power supply does not detect that its fan is disconnected..
5)
Error in scan head focus calibration can be ignored inadvertently

(HERDE00044863).
A hardware problem in scan head or SHI board can sporadically cause a shift
or switch of segments. The calibration can then provide a valid result although
part of the underlying image data is invalid.
The error message in the calibration screen
(see first line in messages text field in figure 1) may be
ignored inadvertently.
9 fit values were out of the measurement

boundaries
figure 1
dis004.06_001.cdr

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 23
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
6.3.3
Software
1)
Read function displays wrong IP data. This problem is tracked as problem of

QS software.
2)
Endurance Test in Stratus Service Client application starts only after clicking
the <Start> button twice.
3)
Internationalization (different languages) is not possible.
4)
Default drive for installation must be changed from C: to D:.
5)
Naming inconsistencies of infocounter and E-labels.
6)
If, in the Service Client entry Calibration, the button <Calibration> is

clicked, then status of the digitizer changes from red to green.
7)
Error Viewer window is not closed after clicking on button <Confirm>.
8)
Stratus software version is not stored in images which are exported with CR
QS software.
9)
The software version identifier in the infocounter block "Entire Device" is

wrong.
10)
In the E-label Value the "hours of operation" entries do not count hours of
standby. Only values 0 and 1 are shown.
11)
Offset setting by software is wrong.
12)
Explanations for several codes are inaccurate.
13)
DX-S software cannot be uploaded reliably.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 24
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
7.1

1)
Error messages are more clear and unambiguous.
2)
Maintenance indicator is introduced.
3)
Device-specific parameters are now restored when a printed circuit board

is exchanged.
4)
Distance Adjustment unit can be adjusted without scan head.
5)
A clamping current is introduced for the Distance Adjustment unit.
7.2
Solved Bugs
7.2.1
Error Messages
1)
Error messages for errors appearing during start up are more expressive.
2)
Correct error code is displayed now if sensor reports vacuum after aerating the
scanned image plate.
New error code signals leakage in vacuum system.
3)
Connection of error code with additional system data (time, date, IP used etc.)
is implemented now.
4)
Error entries into e-labels are now consistent.
5)
If BU11 (RF Tag Reader) at Cassette Handling Board is not connected then
digitizer now displays an error at start-up.
6)
Error message 30060 is made more descriptive for the operator

("No 2D calibration for this image plate available. Scanning without.").
7)
When air bearing is defective then an appropriate error message is

displayed now.
8)
Error scenario Unlock IP in cassette not possible during

IP Rescue Cycle is now implemented.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 25
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
7.2.2
7.2.3
Hardware
1)
The digitizer is now halted during start-up when incorrect connection of

erasure unit is detected and the error code is displayed.
2)
Erasure unit is now switched off after each erasure cycle

(PowerHelp complaint HQ_0510200001, Service Bulletin No. 7).
3)
Digitizer sends image immediately after connecting the FireWire cable.
4)
Digitizer now displays correct IP format when an IP without cassette resides in

the digitizer.
5)
The digitizer does no longer halt immediately after cassette clamping.
6)
An error is displayed now when the stepper motor M217

(opening of cassette flap) does not work.
7)
Disconnected ST10 (Machine Fan) at Air Control Board is now recognized.
8)
DX-S is now operational after upload of nodes software.
9)
When a printed circuit board is exchanged, then specific parameters are now
restored to the device via E-label.
10)
Defective precision switch or cable break at Distance Adjustment unit is

now recognized.
Software
1)
Solution for PowerHelp complaint HQ_0510200001.

Erasure Unit sporadically does not switch off.
2)

Wrong Scanning Parameters after ID Timeout.
3)

Corrupted image after system start.
4)
A wide, bright stripe on images with very low signal level leads to a corrupt
image which is diagnostically unusable. This problem happens occasionally
and only after machine start up. A retake would be needed
5)
Headline of calibration screen is corrected.
6)
Wrong workflow which caused Direct ID timeout and scanning with

wrong parameters, is prevented.
(PowerHelp complaint HQ_0510200002, Service Bulletin No. 8).
7)
Sequence of calibration steps is corrected: Initially the radio button for

focus calibration is checked.
06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 26
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
8)
Maintenance indicator is introduced.
9)
Unintended erasure of image plate after processing of an empty cassette is

prevented now.
10)
The default number of log files is reduced.
11)
Calibration error caused by wrong amplification of 3 CCD elements is resolved.

The flatfield quality is improved.
12)
DIFO/Connection error is solved. The software stability is thus improved.
13)
Infocounter now contains software history which is updated each time an

upload via Service Client is started.
14)
Digitizer does now transmit image, when QS Cluster is closed and restarted.
15)
Texts and bitmaps are updated to "DX-S".
16)
Diagnosis is facilitated by improved monitoring of

pressure / vacuum control.
17)
To prevent influence on the coarse adjustment of the A/D converter offsets the
active test of erasure unit is now started after adjustment of
A/D converter offsets.
18)
Version string is transmitted correctly now.
19)
A recovery cycle for lost focus level position of Distance Adjustment unit
(without new calibration) is introduced.
7.3
Open Bugs
7.3.1
Error Messages
1)
Error message and the displayed screen do not match.
2)
Digitizer changes state to Ready (green) although an error 32126 was shown
on the control PC beforehand.
Sequence of activities:
ST6 at Air Control board is unconnected during Ready state;
digitizer attempts to suck three times and displays error 32126;
digitizer releases cassette and changes state to Ready (green).
3)
4)
Digitizer displays error 1077 during start-up but state changes to Ready.
5)
If data on the ID chip are inconsistent, an error message is displayed without a

<Confirm> button.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 27
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
7.3.2
7.3.3
Hardware
1)
After (partial or complete) upload of nodes software the digitizer is not

re-started. Digitizer must be switched off / on manually.
2)
3)
Digitizer does not display any error message if Erasure Unit node
is disconnected.
4)
5)
If cassette cannot be closed and QS software / ID Viewer is not started, then

the Rescue cycle is not started and the digitizers halts without
error message.
Software
1)
Default drive for installation must be changed from C: to D:.
2)
Read function displays wrong IP data. This problem is tracked as problem of

QS software.
3)
Endurance Test in Stratus Service Client application starts only after clicking
the <Start> button twice.
4)
Internationalization (different languages) is not possible.
5)
Naming inconsistencies of infocounter and E-labels
6)
If, in the Service Client entry Calibration, the button <Calibration> is

clicked, then status of the digitizer changes from red to green.
7)
Error Viewer window is not closed after clicking on button <Confirm>.
8)
Stratus software version is not stored in images which are exported with
CR QS software.
9)
No <Confirm> button is displayed in error message box, when IP without

2D Calibration is inserted.
10)
The software version identifier in the infocounter block "Entire Device"

is wrong.
11)
Button <Confirm> in error message 33006 does not work. Window must be
closed by clicking the "x" at top right.
12)
Erasure dose 750 mR is accepted without error message although

not available.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 28
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Release Info for STR_1102B
8.1
What is new in STR_1102B?

There are no new functionalities in software version STR_1102B compared
to STR_1102A.
8.2
Solved Bugs
Software bug Pixel size too small is resolved. (HQ_050926001)
8.3
Open Bugs
8.3.1
Error Messages
8.3.2
1)
Clear and unambiguous error messages are not implemented in all

error dialogs.
2)
The list of error entries is not yet completed.
3)
When vacuum segment no. 5 is not tight a wrong error message is displayed:
error32146 Failure at erasure module.
4)
Digitizer reaches state Ready after self test, though ST6 on

air control board is disconnected and error 32126 is displayed.
5)
Non-specific error message for error 2632

Reason: insufficient air supply of air bearings.
Hardware
1)
There is no error message when ST10 on Air Supply Board is disconnected.
2)
Possible impact on images due to tuning of the pre-stimulation in the

scan head (white border visible).
3)
After the upload of nodes the digitizer reaches status ready, though the
system is not yet operational (should first do an automatic reboot).
4)
A missing connection to the erasure unit is not recognized.
5)
Image transfer is only possible after 2 connection trials after the

Fire Wire cable was plugged in.
6)
The shut-down behavior of the electronics of the erasure unit is not within the
specification (sporadically).
7)
Non-specific error message when vacuum system is leaky.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 29
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
8.3.3
8)
If the submenu for contrast and sounds in UIF is active, the digitizer LED does
not blink.
9)
A disconnected BU11 RF Tag Reader is not recognized.
10)
The power-on time of the erasure lamp is not life cycle optimized.
Software
1)
The maintenance indicator is not yet implemented.
2)
The version number of a software component is not being updated.
3)
The sequence of calibration steps is wrong.

(Note: focus calibration must always be performed first).
4)
During installation a wrong prompt is shown: Installation of DX-S software on

drive C:/. Correct Installation path is drive D:/.
5)
Read function in QS ID Viewer always shows ID data of first cassette, even for
the second and further cassettes.
6)
Endurance Test in Stratus Service Client starts not until start button is pressed
two times.
7)
No language selection possible (translation of message boxes).
8)
The numbering of log-files is faulty.
9)
Timeout error: Communication Problem during cassette cycle (error 32080).
10)
Although a cassette of type 8 (18 x 24 cm) is inserted in the digitizer, the image
is saved as type 1 (35 x 43 cm) in QS.
11)
12)
Error handling during IP Rescue Cycle is incomplete.
13)
Defective precision switch or cable break at distance unit is not

recognized reliably.
14)
The declaration of cassette formats in rescue cycle is faulty.
15)
DIFO-Connection Error during endurance run in test environment.
16)
The infocounter is incomplete: the SW history for installation and updates

is missing.
17)
Contents of the E-label are not transferred automatically after module has
been replaced.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 30
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
Release Info for STR_1102A

NOTE:
Software version STR_1102A has been released for production but is not available as
an upgrade for the DX-S.
9.1
What is new in STR_1102A?

1)
New CPLD: CCDB0138, Laser power and shutter adapted,

Error Monitoring LLQ switched off.
2)
Monitoring of CCD Temperature.
3)
Self test and monitoring of erasure unit completed.
4)
Bug to resend an image in case the connection is lost solved.
5)
Number of log entries reduced.
6)
Renaming to DX-S.
7)
BOL/BOS operation point adapted to selfoc.
9.2
Solved Bugs
9.2.1
Error Messages
Wrong display text was shown:
Failure at erasure module. Please reset digitizer.
Now, a message prompts to check the erasure state of the IP and, if
necessary, to erase the IP again.
9.2.2
Hardware
Precision switches are monitored now, e.g. when cable break.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 31
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
9.2.3
Software
1)
A disconnected ST37 IP Handling is recognized now.
2)
A disconnected e-label chassis is recognized now.
3)
The Re-connect functionality to Control PC / CR QS has been improved.
4)
After disconnecting and then re-connecting the Fire Wire cable, the image is
transmitted now from DX-S to CR QS. It may be necessary to
identify again.
5)
Two Redo Cycles are implemented in case of the failure that the IP cannot be
released from IP platform or pressure-sucker valve.
6)
A disconnected ST6 Air Control Board is recognized now.
7)
Stability of endurance test has been improved.
9.3
Open Bugs
9.3.1
Error Messages
When vacuum segment no. 5 is not tight a wrong error message is displayed:
error32146 Failure at erasure module.
9.3.2
Hardware
1)
There is no error message when ST10 on Air Supply Board

is disconnected.
2)
No error message in case of failure of the tag reader.
3)
Defective precision switch or cable break at distance unit is not

recognized reliably.
4)
A missing connection to the erasure unit is not recognized.
5)
No error message is shown, if opener of stepper motor does not work.
6)
The shown error message after a power failure is insufficient; the error is only
shown on the CR QS.
7)
If the submenu for contrast and sounds in UIF is active, the digitizer LED does
not blink.
8)
A disconnected BU11 RF Tag Reader is not recognized.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 32
Repair and Service

DD+DIS014.05E
9.3.3
Software
1)
A hang-up of the digitizer with clamped cassette due to communication

interruption of DX-S and Control-PC.
2)
Contents of the E-label are not transferred automatically after module has
been replaced.
3)
DIFO-Connection Error during endurance run in test environment.
4)
Inconsistent error entries into E-labels.
5)
Sporadic hang-up of DX-S without error message (restart digitizer).
6)
The error handling of problems in the air supply system is not correct.
7)
A wrong version in the node FPL (CCD scan board) is displayed.
8)
After the upload of nodes the digitizer reaches status ready, though the
system is not yet operational (should first do an automatic reboot).
9)
Due to wrong offset correction SAL 0 is given in image areas with a

low dose.
10)
The infocounter is incomplete: the SW history for installation and updates

is missing.
11)
Image transfer is only possible after 2 connection trials after the Fire Wire
cable was plugged in.
12)
Timeout error: digitizer is in error condition, if the home position cannot be

reached within the specified time.
13)
Timeout error: communication problem during cassette cycle (error 32080).
14)
15)
Error handling during IP Rescue Cycle is incomplete.
16)
If an empty cassette is inserted, the digitizer does only start operation after one
minute.
17)
Read function in QS ID Viewer always shows ID data of first cassette, even for
the second or further cassettes.
18)
Endurance Test in Stratus Service Client starts not until start button is pressed
two times.
19)
No language selection possible (translation of message boxes).
20)
The declaration of cassette formats in rescue cycle is faulty.

06-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 3.8 / 33
Chapter 3.9
HEALTHCARE
Repair and Service
Imaging Services
FAQ Frequently Asked Questions
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Please note
The Chapter Troubleshooting Edition 2, Revision 0 has been replaced by the

separately available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS159.07E.
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:
DX-S Trouble shooting guide


eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v05
DD+DIS014.05E
Repair and Service

FAQ Frequently Asked Questions
Intentionally left blank

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 3.9 / 2
DD+DIS014.05E
Chapter 4
List of Contents
A
Identification Diagrams
Assembly Overview of the DX-S......................................... 1
Overview of all Assemblies ................................................. 3
Mounting Rack (Assembly No. 100) ................................... 6
3.1
Diagram Mounting Rack ............................................................. 6
3.2
Table of Components Mounting Rack ....................................... 7
Cassette Handling Unit (Assembly No. 200)...................... 8
4.1
Diagram Cassette Handling Unit................................................ 8
4.2
Table of Components.................................................................. 9
4.3
Diagram - Bottom View ..............................................................10
4.4
Table of Components.................................................................10
4.5
Diagram - Overview Cassette Handling Board ........................11
4.6
IP Handling Unit (Assembly No. 300) ............................... 12
5.1
Diagram - Front View IP Handling Unit.....................................12
5.2
Table of Components IP Handling Unit ....................................13
5.3
Diagram - Rear View IP Handling Unit ......................................14
5.4
5.5
Overview - IP Handling Board ...................................................16
5.6

eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v01
12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / I
DD+DIS014.05E
Air Supply Unit (Assembly No. 400)................................. 18
6.1
Diagram Air Supply Unit ............................................................18
6.2
Table of Components Air Supply Unit......................................19
Scanner (Assembly No. 500) ............................................ 20
7.1
Diagram Scanner........................................................................20
7.2
Table of Components Scanner .................................................21
Flash Erasure Unit (Assembly 600).................................. 22
8.1
Diagram Flash Erasure Unit ......................................................22
8.2
Table of Components Flash Erasure Unit ................................23
Circuit Diagrams
Mounting-Rack .................................................................. sheet 1
Cassette-Handling Unit..................................................... sheet 2
IP-Handling Unit ................................................................ sheet 3
Air-Supply Unit .................................................................. sheet 4
Scanner .............................................................................. sheet 5
Flash-Erasure-Unit ............................................................ sheet 6

Chapter 4 / II
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
Identification Diagrams
Assembly Overview of the DX-S

200
600
500
300
100
5160_chap04_001.cdr
figure 1
100 Mounting Rack

200 Cassette Handling Unit
300 IP Handling Unit
500 Scan head
600 Flash Erasure Unit

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 1
DD+DIS014.05E
300
400
5160_chap04_002.cdr
figure 2
300 IP Handling Unit

400 Air Supply Unit

Chapter 4 / 2
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
Overview of all Assemblies

Component
Function
Refer to
100
B101
power supply unit
figure 3
100
B146
SHI board
figure 3
100
B148
status LEDs and display with touch

panel
figure 3
100
B182
e-label frame
figure 3
100
BU2
Power supply distribution board
figure 3
100
S7
main switch for the

DX-S
figure 3
100
ST9#5
FireWire to PC
figure 3
200
B227
opener home-position sensor
figure 4
200
B250
cassette handling board
figure 4
200
B251
cover-opener control sensor
figure 4
200
B252
locking-cassette contact sensor
figure 4
200
B253
fixer home-position sensor
figure 4
200
B255
fixer clamp-position sensor
figure 4
200
B256
locking home-position sensor
figure 4
200
B257
locking end control sensor
figure 4
200
B258
cassette reader
figure 4
200
B276
dimension 24 control sensor
figure 4
200
B277
dimension 30 control sensor
figure 4
200
B278
dimension 35control sensor
figure 4
200
B279
dimension 43control sensor
figure 4
300
B388
cassette IP adapter
(see page 15)
figure 4
200
M213
SM fixer with break
figure 4
200
M216
SM locking
figure 4
200
M217
SM opener
figure 4
200
R208
cassette detection sensor
figure 4
200
B267
Z-sensor
figure 5
200
ST1#5
BU112
CAN bus 1:1
figure 6
200
ST31
BU47
power supply, +36V
figure 6

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 3
DD+DIS014.05E

Component
Function
Refer to
300
B389
dual pulsed transmitter for snaphooks

(see page 15)
figure 5
300
B391
dual pulsed receiver for snaphooks

(see page 15)
figure 5
300
B366
figure 7
300
B359
linear transport home sensor
figure 7
300
B360
connector home sensor
figure 8
300
B361
snap-hook home sensor
figure 8
300
B362
slow-scan home sensor
figure 8
300
B365
IP handling board
figure 8
300
B383
begin-of-scan (BOS) sensor
figure 8
300
B384
bottom-end control sensor
figure 8
300
B385
upper-end control sensor
figure 8
300
B386
collision control sensor
figure 8
300
B388
cassette IP adapter
figure 8
300
M318
SM linear transport
figure 8
300
M319
SM slow scan
figure 8
300
M320
SM snap hooks
figure 8
300
M321
SM connector
figure 8
300
MC1
transmitter glass fiber to erasure unit
figure 9
300
MC2
receiver glass fiber to erasure unit
figure 9
300
ST1
BU113
CAN bus 1:1
figure 9
300
ST9
BU69
power supply, +36V
figure 9
400
B438
air-control board
figure 8
400
B439
vacuum distribution plate
figure 8
400
MG4
figure 10
400
MG10
pressure sensor 1+2 and air bearing

valve
figure 10
500
B569
right distance home-position sensor
figure 11
500
B570
left distance home-position sensor
figure 11
500
B571
laser diodes board
figure 11
500
B572
scan head control
figure 11
500
B574
CCD scan board
figure 11
500
B575
distribution board
figure 11
500
B580
flexboard
figure 11
500
B587
e-label scan head
figure 11

Chapter 4 / 4
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E

Component
Function
Refer to
500
M510
SM right distance
figure 11
500
M511
SM left distance
figure 11
500
S505
right precision switch
figure 11
500
S506
figure 11
600
B668
erasure unit
figure 12
600
BU603
socket for the power supply
figure 12
600
MC1
transmitter glass fiber to IP handling

board
figure 12
600
MC2
receiver glass fiber from IP handling

board
figure 12

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 5
DD+DIS014.05E
Mounting Rack (Assembly No. 100)
3.1
Diagram Mounting Rack

S7
B182
B148
M412
B146
ST9#5
B101
5160_chap04_003.cdr
figure 3

Chapter 4 / 6
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
3.2
Table of Components Mounting Rack

Ass.
Abbreviations
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page /
Coord.
100
B101
power supply unit
Sheet 1
I/ A-E 6
100
B146
SHI board
Sheet 1
I/
100
B148
status LEDs and

display with touch
panel
Sheet 1
I/ G-H 1-2
100
B182
e-label frame
Sheet 1
I/ C-D 1
100
S7
main switcher for the

DX-S
Sheet 1
I/
100
ST9#5
FireWire to PC
Sheet 1
I/
2-3
Sockets of the power supply unit

100
BU1
ST75
to air supply unit
Sheet 1
I/
100
BU2
ST83
to the distribution
board
Sheet 1
I/
100
ST2
BU 78
Remote ON/OFF
Sheet 1
I/
100
ST3
BU111
CAN-BUS 1:1
Sheet 1
I/

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 7
DD+DIS014.05E
Cassette Handling Unit (Assembly No. 200)
4.1
Diagram Cassette Handling Unit

B256
B252
M216
B257
R208
B255
M217
B276
B277
B278
B279
B253
B388
B258
B250
M213
B227
B251
5160_chap04_004.cdr
figure 4

Chapter 4 / 8
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
4.2
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page /
Coord.
200
B227
opener home-position
sensor
Sheet 2
200
B250
cassette handling board Sheet 2
II/ C-F 3-4
200
B251
cover-opener control
sensor
II/ G-H 5-6
200
B252
locking-cassette contact Sheet 2

sensor
II/ A-B 1
200
B253
fixer home-position
sensor
Sheet 2
II/ G-H 2-3
200
B255
fixer clamp-position
sensor
Sheet 2
II/
200
B256
locking home-position
sensor
Sheet 2
II/ A-B 2
200
B257
locking end control

sensor
Sheet 2
II/ A-B 1
200
B258
cassette reader
Sheet 2
II/ C-D 2
200
B267
Z-sensor
Sheet 2
II/
200
B276
dimension 24 control
sensor
Sheet 2
II/
200
B277
sensor
Sheet 2
II/
200
B278
sensor
Sheet 2
II/
200
B279
sensor
Sheet 2
II/ F-G 2
300
B388
cassette IP adapter
belongs to assy. 300,
(see page 15)
Sheet 2
III/ G-H 1
200
M213
SM fixer with break
Sheet 2
II/
200
M216
SM locking
Sheet 2
II/
200
M217
SM opener
Sheet 2
II/
200
R208
cassette detection
sensor
Sheet 2
II/
Sheet 2
II/

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 9
DD+DIS014.05E
4.3
Diagram - Bottom View
B391
B267
B389
5160_chap04_005.cdr
figure 5
4.4
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
200
B267
Z-sensor
Sheet 2
II/
300
B389
dual pulsed transmitter

for snap hooks
(see page 15)
Sheet 3
III/ F-G 2
300
B391
dual pulsed receiver for

snap hooks
(see page 15)
Sheet 3
III/ F-G 2

Chapter 4 / 10
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
4.5
Diagram - Overview Cassette Handling Board

ST 40 ST 41
ST 12
BU 11 ST 33 ST 34
ST 39
ST 13
ST 38
ST 14
ST 35
ST 1#5
ST 15
ST 31
5160_chap04_006.cdr
figure 6
4.6
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
200
ST1#5
BU112
CAN bus 1:1
Sheet 2
II/
200
ST31
BU47
power supply, +36V
Sheet 2
II/

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 11
DD+DIS014.05E
IP Handling Unit (Assembly No. 300)
5.1
Diagram - Front View IP Handling Unit
B366
B359
5160_chap04_007.cdr
figure 7

Chapter 4 / 12
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
5.2
Table of Components IP Handling Unit

Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
300
B366
Sheet 3
III/ B-C 2
300
B359
linear transport home

sensor
Sheet 3
III/ A-B 6

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 13
5.3
DD+DIS014.05E
Diagram - Rear View IP Handling Unit
5160_chap04_008.cdr
figure 8

Chapter 4 / 14
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
5.4
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
300
B359
linear-transport home
sensor
Sheet 3
III/
300
B360
connector home sensor
Sheet 3
III/
2-3
300
B361
snap-hook home sensor Sheet 3
III/
300
B362
slow-scan home sensor
Sheet 3
III/
300
B365
IP handling board
Sheet 3
III/ B-E 2-5
300
B366
Sheet 3
III/
300
B383
begin-of-scan (BOS)
sensor
Sheet 3
III/
300
B384
bottom-end control
sensor
Sheet 3
III/
300
B385
upper-end control
sensor
Sheet 3
III/
300
B386
collision control sensor
Sheet 3
III/
300
B388
cassette IP adapter
(see figure 4)
Sheet 3
III/ G-H 1
300
B389
dual pulsed transmitter

for snap hooks
Sheet 3
III/ F-G 2
300
B391
dual pulsed receiver for

snap hooks
Sheet 3
III/ F-G 2
300
M318
SM linear transport
Sheet 3
III/
300
M319
SM slow scan
Sheet 3
III/
300
M320
SM snap hooks
Sheet 3
III/
300
M321
SM connector
Sheet 3
III/
1-2
400
B438
air-control board
Sheet 4
IV/ D-G 2-3
400
B439
vacuum distribution
plate
Sheet 4
IV/ A-C 2

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 15
DD+DIS014.05E
5.5
Overview - IP Handling Board

ST 35
ST 36
ST 11
ST 15
ST 41
ST 40
BU 1
MC 1 Transmitter
MC 2 Receiver
ST 1
ST 43
ST 9
ST 37
ST 38
5160_chap04_009.cdr
figure 9

Chapter 4 / 16
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
5.6
Table of Components
Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
300
MC1
transmitter glass fiber to Sheet 3

erasure unit
III/ D-E 4
300
MC2
receiver glass fiber to

erasure unit
Sheet 3
III/ D-E 4
300
ST1
BU113
CAN bus 1:1
Sheet 3
III/ E
300
ST9
BU69
power supply, +36V
Sheet 3
III/ E

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 17
DD+DIS014.05E
Air Supply Unit (Assembly No. 400)
6.1
Diagram Air Supply Unit

MG10
MG4
5160_chap04_010.cdr
figure 10

Chapter 4 / 18
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
6.2
Table of Components Air Supply Unit

Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
400
B438
air-control board (see

figure 8)
Sheet 4
IV/ D-G 2-3
400
B439
vacuum distribution
plate (see figure 8)
Sheet 4
IV/ A-C 2
400
MG4
Sheet 4
IV/
400
MG10
pressure sensor 1+2

and air bearing valve
Sheet 4
IV/ A-B 2-3
400
ST1
BU50
CAN bus 1:1
Sheet 4
IV/
400
ST 5
BU49
power supply, +24V
Sheet 4
IV/
2-3
Components of the Black Box

400
M403
fan for pumps
Sheet 4
IV/
400
M412
machine fan
Sheet 4
IV/
400
M422
pressure pump
Sheet 4
IV/
400
M423
vacuum pump
Sheet 4
IV/
4-5
400
MG1
vacuum pump start

valve
Sheet 4
IV/
400
MG2
vacuum airing valve
Sheet 4
IV/ C-D 5
400
MG3
vacuum accumulator
valve
Sheet 4
IV/
400
MG5
pressure pump start

valve
Sheet 4
IV/
400
MG9
drainage valves
Sheet 4
IV/

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 19
Scanner (Assembly No. 500)
7.1
Diagram Scanner
DD+DIS014.05E
B588
B589
5160_chap04_011.cdr
figure 11

Chapter 4 / 20
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
7.2
Table of Components Scanner

Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
500
B569
right distance homeposition sensor
Sheet 5
V/
500
B570
left distance homeposition sensor
Sheet 5
V/ A-B 1
500
B571
laser diodes board
Sheet 5
V/ B-G 2
500
B572
scan head control
Sheet 5
V/ C-F 3-4
500
B574
CCD scan board
Sheet 5
V/ B-G 1
500
B575
distribution board
Sheet 5
V/
500
B580
flexboard
Sheet 5
V/ B-C 3-6
500
B587
e-label scan head
Sheet 5
V/
1-2
500
B588
Adapter board
Sheet 5
500
B589
Adapter board
Sheet 5
500
M510
SM right distance
Sheet 5
V/ G-H 2-3
500
M511
SM left distance
Sheet 5
V/
500
S505
right precision switch
Sheet 5
V/ G-H 3
500
S506
Sheet 5
V/
B
B
5-6
2
3

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 21
DD+DIS014.05E
Flash Erasure Unit (Assembly 600)
8.1
Diagram Flash Erasure Unit

MC1
BU603
B668
5160_chap04_012.cdr
figure 12

Chapter 4 / 22
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
8.2
Table of Components Flash Erasure Unit

Ass.
Abbreviation
Function
Sheet
Circuit
Diagram Page/
Coord.
600
B668
erasure unit
Sheet 6
VI/ B-H 2-4
600
BU603
socket for the power

supply
Sheet 6
VI/ B-C 4
600
MC1
transmitter glass fiber to Sheet 6

IP handling board
VI/
3-4
600
MC2
receiver glass fiber from Sheet 6

IP handling board
VI/
3-4

12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 4 / 23
DD+DIS014.05E
Circuit Diagrams
sheets 1 - 6, see following pages:

Chapter 4 / 24
DX-S
Type 5160
12-2006
1/16
2/16
9/16
10/16
3/16
4/16
11/16
12/16
13/16
A
B
C
D
-ST3
E
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
-BU111
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
CAN-BUS 1:1
Remote ON/OFF
+8V
GND +8V
+8V for CAN

GND +8V CAN
+8V
GND +8V
-B101
F8.5160.4700.0
F
AWG 24
AWG 24
BN
BK
0C
0B
IDX
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
-BU110
F8.5160.4130.1
-W130-1
-BU1
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
AWG 24
AWG 24
E-LABEL FRAME
-ST88
ST2-MICFITG
1/2
Change-NR
BU2-MICFITG
1/2
-ST88
ST2-MICFITG
2/2
BU2-MICFITG
2/2
First
Circuit
2
6
3
3
2
Power Supply Unit

26054
RD
RD
Line Voltage
USER
37442
03.03.06
37228
30.05.2005
Serro
F1.5160.4003.0C
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
AGHWP NORM
APPR.
#10/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
-ST1
BN
1/2
BK
2/2
BU2-MICFITG
-BU146
-ST4
-B148
F1-5160-4813-0.dfs
-W130-3
F8.5160.4130.1
-BU144
-BU144
Last
Circuit
Last
Circuit
Last
Circuit
ST9-D-SUB
2
2
2
Last
Circuit
ST2-MICFITG1
BU9_D-SUB-xxx
A
First
Circuit
First
Circuit
DATE
NAME
25.01.2005
Serro
Last
Circuit
Sheet name:
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-ST1#1
F8.5160.4140.0
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
-BU1#4
-W140
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
CAN-BUS 1:1
-ST3
F8.5160.4140.0
-W140-2,-W140-3
-W130-3:shield#1
F8.5160.4130.1
-W130-3
-W130-2:shield#1
-W130-1:shield#1
F8.5160.4130.1
-W130-1
F8.5160.4130.1
-W130-2
First
Circuit
Last
Circuit
B
Last
Circuit
A
First
Circuit
DX-S
Mounting-Rack
1
BN
BK
S/16
BU15-D-SUB-CMP
7/16
8/16
-BU78
BN
BK
BK
OG
BN
AWG 24
F8.5160.4150.0
-W150
F8.5160.4140.0
-W140-1,-W140-2
*9/9
ST9-32WME
S/16
ST15-32WME
15/16
7/16
8/16
14/16
1/16
3/16
6/16
2/16
4/16
RD
*4/4
ST4-MICROMATCH
-ST97
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
-BU109
F8.5160.4160.0
-W160
1/16
3/16
9/16
10/16
11/16
12/16
13/16
6/16
2/16
4/16
5/16
-BU78
BN
OG
BK
5/16
+9.2 for the CCD-Board (digital circuit)
11/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
-BU131
-ST2
S/10
ST9-D-SUB-CMP
/5.5A
/5.5A
+20V and GND for the CCD-Board
-ST25
1/4
ST4-MICFITW-SMD
+9V_IN
GND+9V_IN
/5.5A
/5.5A
4/4
2/4
3/4
S/10
BU9-32WME1
-W120:shield#1
GND+20V_IN
+20V_IN
*10/10
ST10-28D-SMD
4/4
2/4
3/4
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
/5.5A 18 to 30V for the SM-Distance
-ST1
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
-BU1
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
-BU10
#10/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
-ST22
VT
GY
OG
YE
18-30V_IN
3.5 to 6.8V for laser diodes
/5.5A
GND for the 3.5 to 6.8 and 18 to 30V
/5.5A
/5.5A
/5.5A
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-ST1#20
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-ST24
*40/40
BU40-MINI-FIX
-BU162
*4/4
ST4-MICROMATCH
8/10
9/10
4/10
5/10
AWG 24
GND+4V_18-30V_IN
GND+4V_18-30V_IN
+4V_IN
+4V_IN
+36V and GND for the IP-HANDLING UNIT
*40/40
ST40-98G-SMD
-ST21
-ST99
8/10
9/10
4/10
5/10
RD
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
/3.5H
/3.5H
SHI-BOARD
3/10
BN
BU
BK
GN
F8.5160.4120.0
-W120
-W110-3:shield#1
/2.6E
+36V and GND for the CASSETTE HANDLING UNIT
/2.6E
3/10
2/10
7/10
1/10
6/10
-ST83
S/16
ST15-D-SUB-CMP
AWG 20
AWG 20
+36V/EXT
0V/EXT36V
2/10
7/10
1/10
6/10
-BU2
S/16
BU15-32WME
BK
BN
F8.5160.4110.1
-W110-3
-W110-2:shield#1
F8.5160.4110.1
-W110-2
Pin 3, 4, 11 are GND +24V for the AIR SUPPLY UNIT
Pin 1, 2, 9 are +24V for AIR SUPPLY UNIT
-B146
F1-5160-4773-0.dfs
6/16
8/16
AWG 20
AWG 20
/4.2H
/4.3H
/4.3H
/4.2H
/4.2H
/4.2H
-ST9#5
#8/10
S7430
6/16
8/16
14/16
15/16
BK
BN
#62
#62
#62
#61
#61
#61
5/16
7/16
-W110-1:shield#1
F8.5160.4110.1
-W110-1
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
FIRE WIRE
TO PC
BK
BN
GN
RD
OG
YE
Line voltage for ERASURE UNIT
CAN-BUS 1:1
/2.6G
/3.4H
/4.1G
/5.4A
3/16
4/16
11/16
1/16
2/16
9/16
-ST75
/6.5C
/5.5A
5/16
7/16
-BU1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure
to third parties without express authority is strictly
forbidden.
AGFA
A
H
TO DISTRIBUTION BORD
X
Status LEDs and

Display with Touch Panel
1/2
2/2
ST2-MICFITW-SMD
F8.5160.1280.x
1
-B182
F1-9499-8360-0.dfs
11/11
-W130-2
2
F8.5160.4130.1
1/4
RD
BU4-MICFITG
-W_S107
AWG 24
F8.5160.4107.0
-S7
MPA106D
AWG 24
Main switcher for the

DX-S
To the Distribution Board
BU4-MICFITG
A
First
Circuit
BU40-MINI-FIX
Last
Circuit
5
BU2_MIGFITG1
A
B
B
First
Circuit
6
6
Project
5160
Sheet 1
/ 100
of
6 SH
-W203
F8.5160.4203.0
1:1
-BU39
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
LOCKING END-CONTROL S.
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-B257
F1-9499-6583-0.dfs
1
*4/4
ST4-70
-W202
-BU45
-ST1
1:1
F8.5160.4202.0
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-BU125
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
LOCKING CASSETTE-CONTACT S.
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
FIXER CLAMP-POSITION S.
-B255
F1-9499-6583-0.dfs
-B252
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
ST6-MICROMATCH
-BU95
DIMENSION_24-CTRL S.
-B276
F1-9499-5883-0.dfs
-B277
F1-9499-5883-0.dfs
-BU93
-W204
-BU94
-ST1
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
*4/4
ST4-70
-B278
F1-9499-5883-0.dfs
-BU41
F8.5160.4204.0
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
ST8-MICFITG-SMD
-BU132
Pin 1,2,3,4
#4/20
BU20-MICRO-MODUL
Pin 5,6,7,8
#4/20
#4/20
Pin 9,10,11,12
#4/20
#4/20
Pin 13,14,15,16
#4/20
#4/20
Pin 17,18,19,20
#4/20
-BU135
#4/20
-ST39
ST12-70-SMD
Pin 5,6,7,8
#4/12
Pin 1,2,3,4
#4/12
BU12-MICRO-MODUL
#4/12
#4/20
ST20-70-SMD
-ST1#5
-BU112
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
F8.5160.4513.0
BU2-MIGFITG1
-BU36
First
Circuit
2
First
Circuit
BU9-D-SUB-SLD First
2
BU16-MICRO-MODUL
20
BU12-MICRO-MODUL
Circuit
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
L 4
CAN-BUS 1:1
COVER OPENER-CONTROL S.
-W206
F8.5160.4206.0
-B251
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
-BU72
-ST1
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
*4/4
ST4-70
Z-SENSOR
-B267
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
6
USER
APPR.
0C
37442
0B
37228
IDX
Change-NR
03.03.06
AGHWP NORM
DATE
NAME
25.01.2005
Serro
DX-S
Cassette-Handling Unit
Sheet name:
30.05.2005
Serro
F1.5160.4003.0C
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
26054
C
*4/4
ST4-70
Z-Sensor from
IP-Handling
Last
Circuit
A
-ST1
+36V/EXT
0V/EXT36V
Last
Circuit
*4/4
ST4-70
/3.1F
2
2
-BU38
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-ST1
OPENER HOME-POSITION S.
-B227
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
F8.5160.4140.0
-W140,-W140-1
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
/1.1A
First
Circuit
RD
-ST1#5
11/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
POWER SUPPLY +36V /1.4B

from Main Power Supply /1.4B
Last
Circuit
1:1
BU8-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
A
B
BU
BU
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
F8.5160.4110.1
BU6-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
B
forbidden.
AGFA
Last
Circuit
VT
GN
F8.5160.4513.0
1/2
2/2
BU2-MIGFITG1
-W110-2
First
Circuit
VT
BN
BK
First
Circuit
BU4-MICFITG
WHBK
WHGN
Pin 1,2,3,4
AWG 20
AWG 20
Last
Circuit
First
Circuit
Last
Circuit
BK
#4/12 Pin 5,6,7,8

BU12-MICRO-MODUL
F8.5160.4205.0
-BU134
-BU150
#10/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
-BU1#8
-B250
F1-5160-4873-0.dfs
B
B
#4/12 Pin 9,10,11,12

BU12-MICRO-MODUL
B
First
Circuit
-W205
-BU134
ST5918-S2008-B
-M213
BU3-MICFITG1
Last
Circuit
SM-FIXER_with_BREAK
BU2-MICFITG1
#4/12
#4/12
-BU40 Pin 9,10,11,12
#4/12
-ST34
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-BU46
-ST33
*6/6
ST6-MICROMATCH
-ST15
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
ST8-MICFITG-SMD
1:1
-ST35
1/2
2/2
ST2-MIC-FIT-SMD
-BU47
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
BU8-MICFITG
*4/4
ST4-70
-ST38
#4/12
ST12-70-SMD
CASSETTE HANDLING BOARD
1/2
2/2
ST2-MICFITG1-SMD
BK
BK/WH
BN
RD/WH
GN/WH
GN
OG/WH
OG
-ST38
#4/12
ST12-70-SMD
-ST31
RD
YE
WHYE
WHRD
GN
-ST14
1/2
2/2
WHBK
WHGN
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
BU8-MICFITG
#4/12
ST12-70-SMD
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
BK
BK/WH
RD
RD/WH
GN/WH
GN
OG/WH
OG
-ST38
-ST1#7
ST5918-S2008
-M217
-BU151
BK
SM-OPENER
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST4-MICFITG-SMD
1/3
2/3
3/3
ST3-MICFITG1-SMD
F8.5160.4517.0
-ST13
-ST12
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
BU4-MICFITG
-ST41
RD
WH
YE
BU
-BU133
ST3-MICFITG1
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
-BU13
BU
GY
RD
YE
-ST8
BU3-MICFITG1
YE
F8.5160.4516.0
YE
3/3
2/3
1/3
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
WH
3/3
2/3
1/3
-ST40
ST4118-M1204
-M216
F8.5160.4207.0
-ST100
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
SM-LOCKING
RD
MMR-10-11-7152R10K
-R208
RD
F8.5160.4204.0
-W207
-BU163
-BU11
F8.5160.4208.0
-ST1
FIXER HOME-POSITION S.
-B253
F1-9499-5883-0.dfs
-W204
1/3
2/3
3/3
BU3-MICFITG1
-GND11
Cassette-Detection S.
Last
Circuit
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-B279
F1-9499-5883-0.dfs
-W204
F8.5160.4204.0
GN
Last
Circuit
F8.5160.4204.0
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
BRAKE
*4/4
ST4-70
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
YE
-ST1
-BU92
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
-W204
1/1
1:1
*4/4
ST4-70
-ST1
F8.5160.4210.A
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
F8.5160.4204.0
F8.5160.4201.0
*6/6
*6/6
BU6-75G-SMD
1/1
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
-GND10
-B258
F7.0486.1401.0
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-W204
-W201
-ST9
*6/6
BU6-75G-SMD
WHRD
WHYE
-BU43
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
LOCKING HOME-POSITION S.
-B256
F1-9499-6583-0.dfs
-BU1
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
CASSETTE READER
Project
5160
/ 100
Sheet 2
of
6 SH
F8.5160.4520.0
F8.5160.4521.0
BU
-BU64
-BU62
Pin 1, 2, 3, 4
BU
4/4
BU4-MICFITG
#16/20
#4/20
#4/12
ST12-70-SMD #4/20
ST20-70-SMD
-BU156
#16/20
-ST1
SNAPHOOKS CLOSE S.
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
#4/16
#4/16
Pin 9, 10, 11, 12
#4/16
#4/16
-ST11
First
Circuit
-W310
-BU157
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
1:1
F8.5160.4310.0
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-BU155
*16/16
ST16-70-SMD
#4/16
ST16-70-SMD
BU16-MICRO-MODUL
20
BU9-D-SUB-SLD
-ST40
Pin 13, 14, 15, 16 #4/16
16
BU20-MICRO-MODUL
#4/16
Pin 5, 6, 7, 8
BU16-MICRO-MODUL
-ST41
#4/16
First
Circuit
First
Circuit
-BU158
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
Last
Circuit
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
3/4
3/4
#8/12
*8/8
BU8-MICRO-MODUL
BU2-MIGFITG1
Last
Circuit
DUAL PULSED TRANSMITTER FOR SNAPHOOKS

-B389
F1-5160-4733-0.dfs
-ST15
*8/8
ST8-70-SMD
-ST1
ST4-MICFITG-SMD4/4
1/4
2/4
-BU106
1/4
2/4
-ST36
-ST35
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST4-MICFITG-SMD
F8.5160.4303.1
-B366
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
-W303
*4/4
ST4-70
-ST1
SNAPHOOKS OPEN S.
-BU161
-ST2
SLIDING RAILS S.
1:1
-BU65
YE
*4/4
ST4-70
-BU140
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
BU4-MICFITG
RD
WH
YE
BU
-ST1
*4/4
RD
WH
-B391
F1-5160-4743-0.dfs
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
/2.6G
DUAL PULSED RECEIVER FOR SNAPHOOKS
YE
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
CONNECTOR HOME S.
-B360
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
-4
WH
-BU105
-ST3
*4/4
Upper-END-CTRL S.
ST4-70
-B385
f1-9499-6583-0.df
RD
-B388
F1-5160-4753-0.dfs
#4/12
BU12-MICRO-MODUL
ST4118-M1204
-M321
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
CASSETTE-IP ADAPTER
Pin 9 to 12
YE
Pin 17 to 20
BU20-MICRO-MODUL
F8.5160.4307.0
BU
SM-CONNECTOR
-ST3
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-W307
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-BU154
F8.5160.4206.0
-ST2
-BU141
SNAPHOOKS HOME S.
-B361
f1-9499-5883-0.df
-W206
#8/12
*4/4
ST4-70
WH
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
Pin 1 to 16
-BU159
-ST4
COLLISION-CTRL S.
-B386
f1-9499-6583-0.df
-BU63
Pin 1 to 8
RD
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
Z-Sensor to Cassette-Handling
1/1
RING-TERM-10
SM-SNAPHOOKS
ST4118-M1204
-M320
F8.5160.4351.0
-5
1/1
RING-TERM-10
This connection is important for the Grounding_concept !!!

Connection between IP_plate and frame !!!
*16/16
BU16-MICRO-MODUL
Last
Circuit
-BU1
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
IP-HANDLING BOARD
Glass fiber to ERASURE UNIT

/6.5H
MC1 Transmitter
/6.5H
MC2 Receiver
#4/20
Pin 9, 10, 11, 12
#4/20
#4/20
#10/11
Pin 13, 14, 15, 16
#4/20
#4/20
11/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-ST30
1/2
2/2
BU2-MIGFITG1
BN
BK
AWG 20
AWG 20
X
X
Last
Circuit
A
B
A
B
A
B
2
First
Circuit
SM-SLOWSCAN
Last
Circuit
A
2
2
Last
Circuit
-6
1/1
KASCHUH-2.5-6-M4
F8.5160.4350.0
BU8-MICFITG
BU4-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
1/1
-7
BK
GN
YE
RD
RING-TERM-10
ST5918-S2008
-M318
First
Circuit
ST5918-S2008
-M319
-W302
Pin 1, 2, 3, 4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
*4/4
LINEAR-TRANSPORT HOME S.
-BU119
-B359
F1-9499-6543-0.dfs
/1.4B
/1.4B
SM-LINEAR_TRANSPORT
F8.5160.4518.0

1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
1/2
2/2
ST2-MIC-FIT-SMD
KASCHUH-2.5-6-M4
RING-TERM-10
-8
1/1
F8.5160.4350.0
BK
F8.5160.4110.1
-BU69
POWER SUPPLY +36V

from Main Power Supply
F8.5160.4302.1
-W110-3
-ST9
YE
/1.1A
CAN-BUS 1:1
GN
-BU66
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
WHYE
WHRD
WHGN
WHBK
F8.5160.4140.0
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
RD
1/1
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-9
-BU138
F8.5160.4519.0
-BU136
*4/4
-BU137
1:1
BK
1/8
BK/WH 2/8
RD
3/8
RD/WH 4/8
GNWH 5/8
GN
6/8
YE/WH 7/8
OG
8/8
BU8-MICFITG
-B365
F1-5160-4863-0.dfs
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
BOTTOM-END-CTRL S.
-B384
f1-9499-6583-0.df
forbidden.
AGFA
BU20-MICRO-MODUL
WHRD
WHYE
-BU68
#4/20
ST20-70-SMD
-W140-3,-W140-4
-BU113
-ST1
1/8
2/8
3/8
4/8
5/8
6/8
7/8
8/8
ST8-MICFITG-SMD
Pin 17, 18, 19, 20 #4/20

*4/4
ST4-70
#4/20
SLOW-SCAN HOME S.
-B362
f1-9499-6583-0.df
-ST2
#4/20
-ST37
F8.5160.4302.1
-ST43
#4/20
Pin 5, 6, 7, 8
-W302
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
-BU139
Pin 1, 2, 3, 4
BK
1/8
BK/WH 2/8
RD
3/8
RD/WH
4/8
GN/WH
5/8
GN
6/8
OG/WH
7/8
OG
8/8
BU8-MICFITG
F8.5160.4302.1
WHGN
WHBK
-W302
4
USER
-ST1
APPR.
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
BEGIN-OF-SCAN (BOS)
-B383
F1-5160-4763-A.dfs
E
0C
0B
37442
37228
03.03.06
AGHWP NORM
IDX
Change-NR
NAME
25.01.2005
Serro
DX-S
IP-Handling Unit
Sheet name:
30.05.2005
Serro
F1.5160.4003.0C
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
26054
F
DATE
Project
5160
/ 100
Sheet 3
of
6 SH
/1.1A
Last
Circuit
ST4-MICFITG
BU4-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
B
A
Last
Circuit
Last
Circuit
-ST1
First
Circuit
-BU1#3
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
#10/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
VACUUM DISTRIBUTION PLATE
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
*40/40
ST40-98G-SMD
-ST18
-ST10
1/3
2/3
3/3
ST3-MICFITG1-SMD
-ST9
*40/40
BU40-MINI-FIX
2
First
Circuit
-B439
F8.5160.2055.0
-W110-1
F8.5160.4110.1
AIR-CTRL BOARD
1/6
2/6
3/6
4/6
5/6
6/6
ST6-MICFITG-SMD
F8.5160.8120.0
-BU48
1
Last
Circuit
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
-BU74
BK
BK
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
PRESSURE PUMP
PJ19014
-M422
5
BK
2
-BU34
-BU5
BK
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
AWG 20
BK
-BU31
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
2
-BU3
BK
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
1
-BU30
BK
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
-BU29
BK
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
1
-BU22
BK
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
-BU23
AWG 20
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
AWG 20
AWG 20
PJ20271
-M423
RD
AWG 20
AWG 20
-ST74
AWG 20
AWG 20
2/2
1/2
9A0624H401
-M403
2/2
1/2
FAN_FOR_PUMPS
AWG 20
AWG 20
bk
ST2-Mate-N-Lok BU2-Mate-N-Lok
RD
BK
rd
F7.0431.7264.0
1/2
2/2
BU2-MICFITG
VACUUM PUMP
SA-211293
-MG9
First
Circuit
AWG 20
DRAINAGE_VALVES
-BU147
1/2
2/2
ST2-MICFITG
/1.4B
/1.4B
/1.4B
/1.4B
/1.4B
/1.4B
ST2-MICFITG1
BK 4/8
BK 3/8
RD 2/8
RD 1/8
BU8-MICFITG1
6/8
5/8
BK
BK
F8.5160.4430.0 -BU32
BK 8/8
BK 7/8
5/8
6/8
BK
BK
BK 7/8
BK 8/8
BU8-MICFITG
3/8
4/8
BK
BK
-BU7
RD 1/8
BK 2/8
F8.5160.4420.0
3/3
YE 2/3
BU3-MICFITG1
BK
-BU20
F7.0431.7263.0
-ST90
#61
#61
#61
#62
#62
#62
POWER SUPPLY +24V

from Main Power Supply
4/8
3/8
2/8
1/8
ST8-MICFITG1-SMD
6/8
5/8
8/8
7/8
-ST8
7/8
8/8
ST8-MICFITG-SMD
5/8
6/8
3/8
4/8
1/8
2/8
-ST7
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
-ST4
2/3
ST3-MICFITG1-SMD
3/3
1/3
-ST2
2/2
ST2-MICFITG1-SMD
F7.0395.0474.0
RD 1/3
ST6-MICFITG1-SMD
F8.5160.4403.0
BU6-MICFITG1
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
AWG 20
-BU28
-B438
F1-5160-4833-0.dfs
1/2
6/6
5/6
4/6
3/6
2/6
1/6
2/2
BU2-MIGFITG1
4mA-20mA_0-10bar
4mA-20mA_0-10bar
1/6
RD
2/6
OG
3/6
YE
4/6
BK
5/6
BN
6/6
GN
BU6-MICFITG
-ST6
6/6
5/6
4/6
3/6
2/6
1/6
ST1
AIR_BEARING_Valve_ON_OFF
+24V_valve
+24V_primarily_pressuresensor
+24V_secondarily_pressuresensor
Secondarily pressuresensor
Primarily pressuresensor
1/2
D-M5-Micro
-MG10
-BU49
-ST5
PRESSURE_SENSOR_1+2 and AIR_BEARING_VALVE
-BU50
-BU126
-BU9
F8.5160.4433.0
*40/40
BU40-MINI-FIX
1/3
RD
2/3
BN
3/3
BK
BU3-MICFITG1
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
-W433
-BU21
-ST1
First
Circuit
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
L 4
1:1
First
Circuit
-BU145
*40/40
ST40-98G-SMD
First
Circuit
F8.5160.4434.1
BK
BN
RD
First
Circuit
First
Circuit
ST2-MATE-N-LOK
BU9-D-SUB-IND
11/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
First
Circuit
-W434
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
First
Circuit
First
Circuit
Last
Circuit
First
Circuit
B
A
Last
Circuit
Last
Circuit
-BU1
-ST89
B
B
First
Circuit
Last
Circuit
BK
OG
F8.5160.4412.0
RD
Last
Circuit
BU4-MICFITG
4/4
3/4
2/4
1/4
A
B
ST4-MICFITG
4/4
BK
3/4
OG
2/4
RD
1/4
BU2-M-MATE-N-LOK
B
Last
Circuit
BU2-MICFITG1
Last
Circuit
First BU40-MINI-FIX
Circuit
1
Last
Circuit
-ST1
BU6-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
F8.5160.4140.0
Last
Circuit
BU3-MICFITG1
BU8-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
-W140-4,-W140-5
BU8-MICFITG1
109BF24MC2
-M412
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
Machine_fan
CAN-BUS 1:1
BK
PRESSURE_PUMP_START_VALVE
MHE2-24V
-MG5
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
-BU4
forbidden.
AGFA
-BU33
MHE2-24V
-MG3
VACUUM_ACCUMALATOR_VALVE
BK
VACUUM_AIRING_VALVE
MHE2-24V
-MG2
MHE2-24V
-MG1
1/1
S2.8x0.5-ISO-A
VACUUM_PUMP_START_VALVE
USER
APPR.
PRESSURE_SUCKER_VALVE
MHE2-24V
-MG4
0C
0B
IDX
NAME
25.01.2005
Serro
DX-S
Air-Supply Unit
Sheet name:
37442
03.03.06
AGHWP NORM
37228
30.05.2005
Serro
F1.5160.4003.0C
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
26054
A
DATE
Change-NR
Project
5160
/ 100
Sheet 4
of
6 SH
-BU82
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
*4/4
ST4-70
RIGHT DISTANCE HOME-POS S.
-B569
F1-9499-6583-0.dfs
-W502
-BU118
-W504
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
1
-ST1
*50/50
ST50-98G-SMD
-BU88
-W503
-ST92
*50/50
BU50-MINI-FIX
-ST2
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
-BU1
-B574
F1-5160-4993-0.dfs
-B570
F1-9499-6583-0.dfs
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
-ST1
CCD-SCAN BOARD
*10/10
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
LEFT DISTANCE HOME-POS S.
-BU2
-BU86
-ST1
*4/4
ST4-70
1
BU10-MINI-FIX
F8.5160.4502.0
F8.5160.4504.0
F8.5160.4503.0
*4/4
ST4-MICROMATCH
E-LABEL SCANHEAD
*12/12
BU12-75G-SMD
LASER-DIODES BOARD
-BU1
-ST1
*12/12
ST12-MICROMATCH
-W505
1:1
F8.5160.4505.0
-W506
1:1
F8.5160.4506.0
-W501
F8.5160.4501.0
1:1
GN GN/WH
-W510
-W511
RD
RD/WH
-BU91
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
FROM SHI-BOARD
BU10-MICFITG
-W160
/1.1A
F8.5160.4160.0
-BU102
*40/40
BU40-MINI-FIX
-ST11
*10/10
BU9-D-SUB-IND
Flexboard
-ST7
BK
BN
RD
OG
YE
GN
BU
VT
GY
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
10/10
ST10-MICFITG-SMD
-GND4
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
-GND3
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
-10
F8.5160.4522.0 -GND9
1/1
-GND2
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
-GND1
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
1:1
F8.5160.4505.0
-W503
1:1
F8.5160.4503.0
*40/40
ST40-98G-SMD
-ST8
*80/80
ST80-QSE40K-SMD
-BU2
*80/80
BU80-QTE40K-SMD
First
Circuit
11/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
Last
Circuit
-B580
F1-5160-4923-0.dfs
BU4-MICFITG
BU10-MICFITG
Last
Circuit
L 4
A
2
B
A
B
2
First
Circuit
Last
Circuit
Circuit
2
2
First
Circuit
USER
APPR.
Last
Circuit
0C
Last
Circuit
0B
37442
37228
03.03.06
AGHWP NORM
IDX
Change-NR
DATE
NAME
25.01.2005
Serro
DX-S
Scanner
Sheet name:
Project
5160
5
30.05.2005
Serro
F1.5160.4003.0C
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
26054
C
Last
Circuit
BU9-D-SUB-IND First
-B575
F1-5160-4893-0.dfs
BU40 and BU50-MINI-FIX
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
forbidden.
AGFA
1/1
KASCHUH-2.5-6-M4
-W505
-ST10
-ST12
ST4-MICROMATCH
1:1
F8.5160.4504.0
-ST12
-BU114
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
AWG 24
*20/20
ST20-98G-SMD
From Main Power Supply
F8.5160.4120.0
+4V_IN
GND+4V_18-30V_IN
18-30V_IN
+20V_IN
GND+20V_IN
+4V_IN
GND+4V_18-30V_IN
+9V_IN
GND+9V_IN
-W504
#10/11
ST9-32WLP-SMD
F8.5160.4140.0
/1.1A
-W120
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4C
/1.4D
-ST104
1:1
F8.5160.4502.0
CAN-BUS 1:1
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
1/1
RING-TERM-04
-P1
-P2
1/4
*4/4
2/4
P339820
3/4
-B589
F7-5160-4711-A.dfb 4/4
P339820
*4/4
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
-3
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
*4/4
-BU81
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-ST11
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
-ST12
-BU12
*4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-BU5
-ST93
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-ST14
*50/50
ST50-98G-SMD
-ST4
*4/4
ST4-MICROMATCH
1/1
S6.3x0.8_2
-ST103
-W502
-W140-5
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
ST4-MICROMATCH
F8.5160.4507.0
-BU152
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST4-70-SMD
-W507
MYCOM-N50
-S505
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
F8.5160.4530.0
*4/4
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
-ST2
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST4-70-SMD
-ST13
*50/50
BU50-MINI-FIX
-BU89
*12/12
BU12-75G-SMD
*12/12
ST12-MICROMATCH
-B572
F1-5160-4793-0A.dfs
-BU1
*80/80
ST80-QSE40K-SMD
RIGHT PRECISION SWITCH
-BU153
-ST9
-ST1
-ST1#3
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
SCANHEAD-CTRL
-ST10
-ST81
-BU1
*4/4
ST4-70-SMD
MYCOM-N50
-S506
1/1
KASCHUH-2.5-6-M4
-1
-2
1/1
RING-TERM-11
*4/4
-BU87
-BU1#4
BU4-MICRO-MODUL
-BU160
-BU84
F8.5160.4508.0
*4/4
ST4-MICROMATCH
*80/80
BU80-QTE40K-SMD
C101857
-M510
GN GN/WH
-W508
-ST106
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-P1
1/4
*4/4
P339820
2/4
3/4
4/4
P339820
-B588
F7-5160-4711-A.dfb
*4/4
BU4-75G-SMD
-GND8
-GND7
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
-GND6
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
-GND5
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
F8.5160.4530.0
-P2
1/4
2/4
3/4
4/4
ST4-MICROMATCH
LEFT PRECISION SWITCH
F8.5160.4531.0
KASCHUH-0.5-1-M3
1/1
-ST105
SM-RIGHT DISTANCE
F8.5160.4510.1
F8.5160.4511.1
RD/WH
-ST82
RD
-BU117
C101857
-M511
*10/10
BU10-MINI-FIX
-B571
F1-5160-4803-0.dfs
SM-LEFT DISTANCE
*10/10
ST10-98G-SMD
-B587
F1-9499-8360-0.dfs
/ 100
Sheet 5
of
6 SH
-B668
F8.5160.3500.0
MC1 Transmitter
MC2 Receiver
ERASURE Unit
BU603
Glass fiber from IP-Handling Board
Line voltage from Main Power Supply
forbidden.
AGFA
/3.4H
/1.5A
/3.4H
USER
APPR.
0C
0B
IDX
NAME
25.01.2005
Serro
DX-S
Flash-Erasure-Unit
Sheet name:
37442
03.03.06
AGHWP NORM
37228
30.05.2005
Serro
F1.5160.4003.0C
DATE
NAME
Replacement for
26054
A
DATE
Change-NR
Project
5160
/ 100
Sheet 6
of
6 SH
Spare Parts List

Document No: DD+DIS110.06M
DX-S
Type 5160/100
5160_0100_chap05_titel_m.cdr
Internal update: 7
03-2010 Printed in Germany

spare_parts_e_template_v09
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
Copyright 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper
operation.
INSTRUCTION:

Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
Document Type Order List in the GSO Library.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 2
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Document History
Edition,
Revision
2.3
Release
Date
03-2010
Changes compared to previous Version 2.2

Index of Spare Parts Numbers updated.
Graphic modified, spare part "filter glass" deleted, refer
to section "ERASURE UNIT / SCAN HEAD".
Graphic modified, refer to section
"CASSETTE - NIP GENRAD - HD5.0".
Spare part "maintenance kit" added, refer to section
"SPARE PART KITS CATEGORIES".
Reference to AIO Keyboards added, refer to section
"ACCESSORIES".
NOTE:
Agfa reserves the right to deliver compatible parts or alternative parts.
Prices to the original order may differ.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe
orderprocessing-europe.matrium@eads.com
Overseas
orderprocessing-overseas.matrium@eads.com
Spare Parts returns

Worldwide
returns.matrium@eads.com
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 3
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Contents
VERKLEIDUNG
PANELING
REVETEMENT
PAGES 06 - 07
GESTELL
FRAME
CHSSIS
PAGES 08 - 09
SCANEINHEIT
SCAN UNIT
UNITE SCAN
PAGES 10 - 13
LSCHEINHEIT
ERASURE UNIT
UNITE DEFFACEMENT
PAGES 14 - 15
KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTE
PAGES 16 - 17
LUFTEINHEIT
AIR UNIT
MODULE DAIR
PAGES 18 - 19
IP BHNE
IP PLATFORM COMPLETE
IP PLATFORM COMPLET
PAGES 20 - 21
KASSETTE - NIP GENRAD - HD5.0
CASSETTE - NIP GENRAD - HD5.0
PAGES 22 - 23
ZUBEHR
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSOIRES
PAGES 24 - 25
0
60_
51
100
a
_ch
ha
_ in
p05
.cd
lt_m

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 4
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
How to navigate the Spare Parts List online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1)
(2)
Open Bookmarks.
(3)
(4)
See overview of the modules.
(5)
Appropriate page opens.
(6)
Click on green arrow to
Click on "CONTENTS".
Click on requested module.
navigate back to the overview

of the modules.

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 5
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
04*
03*
05
02*
01*
5160_0100_chap05_01_m.cdr
PANELING
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 6
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516012150
VERKLEIDUNG VORNE MONT.

FRONT PANEL
REVETEMENT AVANT
CM+9516012300
SEITENWAND RECHTS
SIDE WALL, RHS
PAROI LATERALE A DROITE
CM+9516012500
SEITENWAND LINKS
SIDE WALL, LHS
PAROI LATERALE A GAUCHE
CM+9516012700
VERKLEIDUNG OBEN
PANELING TOP
REVETEMENT SUPERIEUR
CM+9516090302
ANZEIGE UND USER INTERFACE

DISPLAY AND USER INTERFACE
AFFICHEUR ET USER INTERFACE
= Assembly
D = Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M".
* = Spare part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
PANELING
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 7
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
10
09
01
(B146)
08
(B101)
06
07
05*
11
04
03
(M412)
02
5160_0100_chap05_02_m.cdr
FRAME
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 8
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516017605
SHI BOARD VOLLST. (B146)

SHI BOARD COMPLETE (B146)
SHI BOARD COMPLET (B146)
CM+9516017031
LAUFROLLE
ROLLER
GALET MOBILE
CM+9516044120
LFTER (M412)
FAN (M412)
VENTILATEUR (M412)
CM+9514617992
LUFTFILTER
AIR FILTER
FILTRE A AIR
CM+9516016203
CM+9516041070
SCHALTER_S107
SWITCH_S107
INTERRUPTEUR_S107
CM+9516010511
ABLUFTSCHACHT
AIR EXHAUST SHAFT
CHENINEE D'EVACUATION
CM+9516047003
NETZTEIL (B101)
POWER SUPPLY (B101)
ALIMENTATION (B101)
CM+9516041501
FLACHBANDKABEL W150
RIBBON CABLE W150
CABLE RUBAN W150
10
CM+9516041600
FLACHBANDKABEL W160
RIBBON CABLE W160
CABLE RUBAN W160
11
CM+9516009400
CD DX-S STR_1504
CD DX-S STR_1504
CD DX-S STR_1504
12
CM+9516090400
MASSEBAND
GROUND CABLE
CABLE DE MASSE
KABELTRGER KOMPLETT
CABLE CLAMP COMPLETE
SERRE CABLE COMPLET
= Assembly
FRAME
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 9
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
08
(M320)
03
11
09
(B385,
B386)
13
(B360)
07
(B365)
04
10
01
02
12
05
(M318)
06
(M383)
09
(B362, B384)
5160_0100_chap05_03_m.cdr
SCAN UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 10
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516020552
MAGNETVENTILPLATTE
SOLENOID VALVE PLATE
PLAQUE ELECTROVANNE
CM+9516091001
HUBZYLINDER BAUGRUPPE KOMPLETT

LIFTING CYLINDER ASSEMBLY COMPLETE
CYLINDRE DE LEVAGE ASSEMBLAGE COMPLET
CM+9516021004
VERRIEGELUNGSSYSTEM BHNE ZUSAMMENBAU

RAMP LOCKING SYSTEM COMPLETE
VERROUILAGE
CM+9516090701
STEPPER MOTOR SLOW SCAN

CM+9516045180
SCHRITTMOTOR (M318)
STEPPER MOTOR (M318)
MOTEUR PAS PAS (M318)
CM+9516047600
BOS LED (M383)

BOS LED (M383)
BOS LED (M383)
CM+9516048606
GS IP HANDLING BOARD (B365)

CM+9516064001
ANTRIEB SCHNAPPHAKEN (M320)

DRIVE SNAP-FIT (M320)
ENTRAINEMENT (M320)
CM+9949965801
GS-LS, UNGEREGELT (B362, B384, B385, B386)

LIGHT SENSOR BOARD, UNCON (B362, B384, B385, B386)
CI PHOTOCELLULE DE REFLEX (B362, B384, B385, B386)
10
CM+9516043022
FLACHBANDKABEL W302 (B365 - B360)

RIBBON CABLE W302 (B365 - B360)
CABLE RUBAN W302 (B365 - B360)
11
CM+9516043031
FLACHBANDKABEL W303 (B365 - B385/386)

RIBBON CABLE W303 (B365 - B385/386)
CABLE RUBAN W303 (B365 - B385/386)
12
CM+9516090600
SEGMENTFILTER
SEGMENT FILTER
FILTRE SEGMENT
13
CM+9949965402
GS LS-STATISCH (B360)
LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (B360)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (B360)
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 11
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
03
14
03
07
(B366)
12
01
06
04
08
(B575)
05
(B572)
07
(B359)
13
(B572 - B587)
10
(B572 - B574)
11
(B572 - B571)
5160_0100_chap05_04_m.cdr
SCAN UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 12
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516090600
SEGMENTFILTER
SEGMENT FILTER
FILTRE SEGMENT
CM+9516071001
FLEXBOARD FHRUNG
FLEXBOARD GUIDE
GUIDE DE FLEXBOARD
CM+9516020451
ABSTTZUNGSLEISTE VOLLST.
SUPPORT BAR COMPLETE
BARRETTE APPUI COMPLET
CM+9516021371
AKTIVSAUGER
ACTIVE SUCTION CUP
VENTOUSE ACTIVE
CM+9516047904
GS M16 SCANHEAD CONTROLLER (B572)

10+9999911750
CM+9516090100
SEGMENTDICHTUNGEN
SEGMENT GASKETS
SEGMENT JOINTS
CM+9949965402
GS LS-STATISCH (B359, B366)

LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (B359, B366)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (B359, B366)
CM+9516048901
GS SCANHEAD DISTRIBUTION BOARD (B575)

10
CM+9516045040

11
CM+9516045050

12
10+9033500110
DRUCKFEDER
COMPRESSION SPRING
RESSORT DE PRESSION
13
CM+9516045030

14
CM+9516066300
TRAVERSE KOMPLETT
TRAVERSE COMPLETE
ENTRETOISE COMPLET
MONTAGEWERKZEUG FR SEGMENTDICHTUNGEN
FITTING TOOL FOR SEGMENT GASKET
OUTIL POUR JOINT SECTUER
= Assembly
SCAN UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 13
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
01 (B668)
02
5160_chap05_05_m.cdr
ERASURE UNIT / SCAN HEAD

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 14
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516090801
LED ERASURE UNIT (B668)

LED ERASURE UNIT
LED ERASURE UNIT
CM+9516027503
SCANHEAD
SCANHEAD
SCANHEAD
= Assembly
ERASURE UNIT / SCAN HEAD

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 15
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
04
06
05
07
(B227, B251)
02
(M216)
14
(B225)
11
13
(M217)
15
09
10
(B388)
03
(B250)
12
(M213)
16
(B267)
(B389)
08
(B391)
01
5160_0100_chap05_06_m.cdr
CASSETTE UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 16
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516050003
KASSETTENEINHEIT
CASSETTE UNIT
UNITE CASSETTES
CM+9516056002
KASSETTENENTRIEGLER (M216)
CASSETTE RELEASE (M216)
CASSETTE DEVERROUILLAGE (M216)
CM+9516048704
GS KASSETTEN HANDLING (B250)

GS CASSETTE HANDLING (B250)
CASSETTE HANDLING GS (B250)
CM+9516050311
SCHACHT
TUNNEL
CHEMINEE
CM+9048614170
CHIP READER
CHIP READER
CHIP READER
CM+9516054600
LS-HALTER ROLLO 0 POSITION

HOLDER
FIXATION
CM+9949965402
GS LS-STATISCH (B227, B251)

LIGHT SENSOR BOARD-STATIC (B227, B251)
CARTE PHOTOCELLULE STATIQ (B227, B251)
CM+9516090500
SENDER UND EMPFNGER (B389, B391)

RECEIVER AND TRANSMITTER (B389, B391)
RCEPTEUR ET EMETTEUR (B389, B391)
CM+9516090200
ANTRIEBSRIEMEN
DRUM BELT
COURROIES D'ENTRAINEMENT
10
CM+9516047500
GS CASSETTE IP ADAPTER (B388)

11
CM+9516052110
FFNUNGSHAKEN
HOOK
CROCHET
12
CM+9516045130
SCHRITTMOTOR (M213)
13
CM+9516045170
SCHRITTMOTOR (M217)
14
CM+9949965801
GS-LS, UNGEREGELT (B225)

LIGHT SENSOR BOARD, UNCON (B225)
CI PHOTOCELLULE DE REFLEX (B225)
15
CM+9516043070

16
CM+9516052500
LS-HALTER Z-SENSOR (B267)

LIGHT SENSOR HOLDER Z-SENSOR (B267)
SUPPORT DE LA CELLULE (B267)
= Assembly
CASSETTE UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 17
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
03
(B438)
04
02
(MG10)
01
5160_0100_chap05_07_m.cdr
AIR UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 18
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516081008
LUFTEINHEIT VOLLST.
AIR UNIT COMPLETE
UNITE D'AIR COMPLET
CM+9039504800
WARTUNGSMODUL (MG10)
MAINTENANCE MODULE (MG10)
MODULE MAINTENANCE (MG10)
CM+9516048303
GS AIR CONTROL BOARD (B438)

CM+9516080210
FALTENBALG
BELLOWS
SOUFFLET
= Assembly
AIR UNIT
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 19
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
01
5160_0100_chap05_08_m.CDR
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 20
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516019501
IP-BHNE, KOMPLETT
IP PLATFORM COMPLET
99
CM+9516019300
TYPVERPACKUNG MIT TRANSPORTSICHERUNG

PACKING WITH TRANSPORT PROTECTION
EMBALLAGE AVEC SCURIT DU TRANSPORT
99
CM+9047710970
FIREWIRE-KABEL 6P/M -6P/M 4,5M

FIREWIRE-CABLE 6P/M -6P/M 4,5M
CABLE FIREWIRE 6P/M -6P/M 4,5M
= Assembly
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 21
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
01* - 07*
08* - 14*
15*
5160_chap05_09_m.CDR

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 22
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9518090800
CR HD5.0 GENERAL DETEKTOR 35X43 (KASSETTE + IP)

CR HD5.0 GENERAL DETECTOR 35X43 (CASSETTE + IP)
CR HD5.0 DTECTEUR GENERAL 35X43 (CASSETTE + IP)
CM+9518090850
CR HD5.0 FLFS DETEKTOR 35X43 (KASSETTE + IP)

CR HD5.0 FLFS DETECTOR 35X43 (CASSETTE + IP)
CR HD5.0 DTECTEUR FLFS 35X43 (CASSETTE + IP)
CM+9518090301
CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR DETEKTOR 35X43 (KASSETTE + IP)

CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR DETECTOR 35X43 (CASSETTE + IP)
CR HD5.0 DETECTEUR SR 35X43 (CASSETTE + IP)
CM+9518190800

CM+9518290800

CM+9518390800

CM+9518490800

CM+9518058000
CR HD5.0 GENERAL KASSETTE 35X43

CR HD5.0 GENERAL CASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE GENERAL 35X43
CM+9518059000
CR HD5.0 FLFS KASSETTE 35X43

CR HD5.0 FLFS CASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE FLFS 35X43
10
CM+9518056000
CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR KASSETTE 35X43

CR HD5.0 GENERAL SR CASSETTE 35X43
CR HD5.0 CASSETTE GENERAL SR 35X43
11
CM+9518158000

12
CM+9518258000

13
CM+9518358000

14
CM+9518458000

15
CM+9518040050
CHIPKARTE
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
= Assembly

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 23
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
01
02
03
5160_0100_CHAP05_10_m.CDR
ACCESSORIES
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 24
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516091200
LIMIT PATTERN CD
LIMIT PATTERN CD
LIMIT PATTERN CD
10+9999912660
REINIGUNGSSTBCHEN
CLEANING SWABS
BTONNET OUAT
CM+9516092000
INSTANDHALTUNGSKIT
MAINTENANCE KIT
MAINTENANCE KIT
= Assembly
ACCESSORIES
03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 25
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Spare Parts Kit Categories

R
Parts required to repair a machine
'Repair'
Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
Number of machines
Extension of the service area
Local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
Stockpilling
Parts required to install a machine
'Installation'
Kit Ì` should be available as case stock.

Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance'
Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
'Local stock'
Spare Parts Kit Order Numbers

Order Number
CM+9516092000
Version
Spare Part Kit

MAINTENANCE KIT

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 26
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS110.06M
Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name
Type Number
Specification
5160/0100
ERYE4
DX-S
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Order Number
Accessory
DX-S UPS
ERO16
DX-S ALL IN ONE CART
ERO28
DX-S CUT-DOWN AIO CART
E2PVF
DX-S ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
EZJT3
DX-S AIO KEYBOARDS (REFER TO DX-S AIO CART)
-----

03-2010
DX-S
Type 5160/100
Chapter 5 / 27
Spare Parts List

ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
5163_100_CHAP05_titel.cdr
Internal update: 3
05-2010 Printed in Germany

spare_parts_e_template_v09
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
WARNING:
operation.
INSTRUCTION:

www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
Document Type Order List in the GSO Library.

05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 2
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Document History
Edition,
Revision
2.1
Release
Date
05-2010
Changes compared to previous Version 2.0

Index of Spare Part "Mouse Pad" updated see section
"Carrier".
Order Number of "Fire Wire Cable" changed see
section "Frame".
NOTE:
Agfa reserves the right to deliver compatible parts or alternative parts.
Prices to the original order may differ.
Contact
Europe
Overseas
Spare Parts returns

Worldwide
NOTE:

05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 3
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Contents
TRGER
CARRIER
SUPPORT
PAGES 12 - 13
GESTELL
FRAME
CHSSIS
PAGES 6 - 9
BODENWANNE
BOTTOM TRAY
CUVE DE FOND
PAGES 10 - 11

05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 4
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
How to navigate the Spare Parts List online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1)
(2)
Open Bookmarks.
(3)
(4)
See overview of the modules.
(5)
Appropriate page opens.
(6)
Click on "CONTENTS".
Click on requested module.

of the modules.

05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 5
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
03
01
02
01
5163_100_chap05_01.cdr
FRAME
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 6
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9036261090
SCHARNIER (2 STCK)
FRAME JOINT (SET OF 2)
CHARNIRE (JEU DE 2)
CM+9516349130
HALTER
HOLDER
FIXATION
CM+9516345150
TR, GEKL.
DOOR BONDED
PORTE
99
CM+9516391000
VERPACKUNG ALL IN ONE

PACKAGING ALL IN ONE
EMBALLAGE ALL IN ONE
= Assembly
FRAME
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 7
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
08
01
05
02
03
01
06/07
04
5163_100_chap05_02.cdr
FRAME
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 8
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516345550
TRENNTRAFO
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMATEUR
CM+9516345570
BGEL, GROSS
BRACKET LARGE
ETRIER, GRANDE
CM+9516345580
SCHAUMSTOFFPLATTE
FOAM MATERIAL PLATE
PLAQUE EN MOUSSE
CM+9516345610
ABLAGE, SCHMAL NACHGEARBEITET

TRAY, NARROW POST WORKED
RCEPTACLE EN TLE, ETROIT
CM+9516349531
FEDERBGEL
SPRING BOW
ETRIER RESSORT
CM+9047710530
ANSCHLULEITUNG SCHUKO (SCHUKO / IEC320C19)

CONNECTING LEAD GROUNDED SOCKET (SCHUKO / IEC320C19)
LIGNE DE RACCORDEMENT (SCHUKO / IEC320C19)
CM+9047710540
ANSCHLULEITUNG (6-20 P / IEC320C19)

CONNECTING LEAD (6-20 P / IEC320C19)
LIGNE DE RACCORDEMENT (6-20 P / IEC320C19)
CM+9047711080
FIREWIRE KABEL, 2.2 M

FIREWIRE CABLE, 2.2 M
CABLE FIREWIRE, 2.2 M
= Assembly
FRAME
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 9
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
02
01
04
03
5163_100_chap05_03.cdr
BOTTOM TRAY
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 10
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516341171
RADKAPPE, RECHTS
WHEEL RIM, RHS
ENJOLIVEUR, A DROITE
CM+9516341071
RADKAPPE, LINKS
WHEEL RIM, LHS
ENJOLIVEUR, A GAUCHE
CM+9516341191
BLENDE UNTEN
COVER BOTTOM
DFLECTEUR
CM+9516349001
SERVICEBRCKE
SERVICE STRAP
EQUIPEMENT DE SERVICE
= Assembly
BOTTOM TRAY
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 11
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
02
01
03
5163_100_chap05_04.cdr
CARRIER
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 12
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9039000290
ENTRIEGELUNGSGRIFF
RELEASE HANDLE
POIGNEE DE DERROUILLAGE
CM+9516343700
MONITORHALTER F. BARCO
MONITOR HOLDER FOR BARCO
SUPPORT DU MONITEUR POUR BARCO
CM+9516343471
MAUSPAD
MOUSE PAD
TAPIS DE SOURIS
= Assembly
CARRIER
05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 13
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M

R
'Repair'

'Installation'
Number of machines
Extension of the service area
Local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
Stockpilling

Kit Ì` should be available as case stock.
M 'Maintenance'


'Local stock'
Spare Parts Kit Order Numbers

Order number
---
Spare Parts Kit
Version
No Spare Parts Kit available
---

05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 14
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS097.06M
Type Overview
Device Name
Type Number
Specification
5163/0100
ERO28
DX-S ALL IN ONE
Accessory Overview
Following accessories
and orderable on www.cherry.com
accesssoriesare
areseparately
separatelyavailable
available:
Order Number
Accessory
CHERRY KEYBOARD FRENCH *
G84-4100LPMFR-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD UK *
G84-4100LPMGB-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD US *
G84-4100LPMUS-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD BELGIAN *
G84-4100LPMBE-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD PORTUGUESE *
G84-4100LPMPO-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD SPANISH *
G84-4100LPMES-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD GERMAN *
G84-4100LPMDE-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD DUTCH *
G84-4100LPMNL-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD DANISH *
G84-4100LPMDK-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD SWISS FRENGER *
G84-4100LPMCH-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD NORWEGIAN *
G84-4100LPMNO-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD ITALIAN *
G84-4100LPMIT-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD SWEDISH *
G84-4100LPMSF-0
CHERRY KEYBOARD GREEK *
G84-4100LPMGR-0
* These models are gray with 86 keys (Windows keys included).

Models with other country / layout versions are listed on cherry webpage: www.cherry.com

05-2010
ALL IN ONE
Type 5163/100
Chapter 5 / 15
Spare Parts List

DX-S Cut-down AIO Cart

Type 5163/0105
5163_0105_chap05_titel_m.cdr
Internal update: 2
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair
or maintenance task on the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions"
and on the product.
WARNING:
operation.
INSTRUCTION:
Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the
procedure.
www.agfa.com

02-2008

Type 5163/0105
Chapter 5 / 2
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
Document History
Edition,
Revision
1.1
Release
Date
02-2008
Changes compared to previous version 1.0

Spare Parts List completely revised
Contact
Europe
Overseas
Spare Parts returns

Worldwide
NOTE:

02-2008

Type 5163/0105
Chapter 5 / 3
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
Contents
GESTELL
FRAME
CHSSIS
SEITE / PAGE 6 - 7
BODENWANNE
BOTTOM TRAY
CUVE DE FOND
SEITE / PAGE 8 - 9
5163_0105_chap05_index_m.cdr

02-2008

Type 5163/0105
Chapter 5 / 4
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
How to navigate the spare parts list online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1)
(2)
Open Bookmarks
(3)
(4)
See overview of the modules
(5)
Appropriate page opens
(6)
Click on "CONTENTS"
Click on requested module

of the modules

02-2008

Type 5163/0105
Chapter 5 / 5
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
07
05/06
04
01
03
02
5163_0105_chap05_01_m.CDR
FRAME
02-2008
Chapter 5 / 6
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9036261090
SCHARNIER (2 STCK)
FRAME JOINT (SET OF 2)
CHARNIRE (JEU DE 2)
CM+9516368130
SCHIENENHALTER
RAIL HOLDER
FIXATION RAIL
CM+9516345150
TR, GEKL.
DOOR BONDED
PORTE
CM+9516345550
TRENNTRAFO
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMATEUR
CM+9047710530
ANSCHLULEITUNG SCHUKO
CONNECTING LEAD GROUNDED SOCKET
LIGNE DE RACCORDEMENT
CM+9047710540
ANSCHLULEITUNG
CONNECTING LEAD
LIGNE DE RACCORDEMENT
CM+9047710870
FIREWIRE KABEL, 1.8 M

FIREWIRE CABLE, 1.8 M
CABLE FIREWIRE, 1.8 M
99
CM+9516301050
99
CM+9516343470
VERPACKUNG DX-S CUT DOWN AIO

PACKAGING DX-S CUT DOWN AIO
EMBALLAGE DX-S CUT DOWN AIO
MAUSPAD
MOUSE PAD
TAPIS DE SOURIS
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =No wearing part.
FRAME
02-2008
Chapter 5 / 7
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
01
02
02
5163_0105_chap05_02_m.CDR
BOTTOM TRAY
02-2008
Chapter 5 / 8
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr.
Item no. Part No.
Benennung
Description
Denomination
CM+9516341191
BLENDE UNTEN
COVER BOTTOM
DFLECTEUR
CM+9516369000
SERVICEBRCKE DX-S CUT DOWN

SERVICE STRAP DX-S CUT DOWN
EQUIPEMENT DE SERVICE DX-S CUT DOWN
=Assembly
D =Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M"
* =No wearing part.
BOTTOM TRAY
02-2008
Chapter 5 / 9
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M

R
'Repair'

'Installation'
number of machines
extension of the service area
local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
stockpiling

Kit Ì`should be available as case stock.
M 'Maintenance'


'Local stock'
Spare Parts Kit Order numbers

Order number
Spare Part Kit
version
Device / Kit `R` is not applicable

Device / Kit Ì` is not applicable
Device / Kit `M` is not applicable
Device / Kit `L` is not applicable

02-2008

Type 5163/0105
Chapter 5 / 10
Spare Parts List
DD+DIS218.07M
Type Overview
Device Name
Type No.
Specification
DX-S CUT-DOWN AIO CART
5163/0105
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Order number
Accessory
ALL IN ONE
ERO28

02-2008

Type 5163/0105
Chapter 5 / 11

Technical Modifications reserved.
Published by
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
www.agfa.com

HEALTHCARE
Chapter 6
Accessories
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160
Content of Chapter 6: Accessories

This chapter contains the instructions for all accessories (options):
Document No.
Contents
Edition.
Revision
DD+DIS421.05E
Service Documentation for the DX-S All in One and

2.1
DD+DIS095.06E
Operating and Troubleshooting the

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Powerware 5125
2.0



eq_06_accessories_toc_e_template_v02
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 6
Accessories
Imaging Services
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100,105
Service Documentation for:
DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
DX-S All in One Type 5163/100
DX-S Cut Down All in One Type 5163/105

This document provides general information for
DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100) and DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.1
07-2007
Added information about DX-S Cut Down All in One

Details see section 3, page 7.
Document
Title
Chapter 1
Chapter 5
Spare Parts List DX-S Cut Down All in One, DD+DIS218.07M
Chapter 11
For installation planning and installation instructions, please refer to Chapter 1 and 11 of
the DX-S Service Documentation, DD+DIS014.05E.



eq_06_accessories_e_template_v02
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 2
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories
LIST OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
DX-S ALL IN ONE (TYPE 5163/100)........................................................................................4
2.1
Overview DX-S All in One.........................................................................................................5
2.2
Scope of Delivery DX-S All in One............................................................................................5
2.3
Type Label DX-S All in One ......................................................................................................6
DX-S CUT DOWN ALL IN ONE (TYPE 5163/105)...................................................................7

3.1
Overview DX-S Cut Down All in One ........................................................................................7
3.2
Scope of Delivery DX-S Cut Down All in One...........................................................................8
3.3
Type Label DX-S Cut Down All in One .....................................................................................8
DETAILED SERVICE INFORMATION .....................................................................................9
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................10
MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................................11
DISPOSAL..............................................................................................................................11
SPARE PARTS SUPPLY .......................................................................................................11

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 3
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories
Introduction
This chapter describes general features of the two DX-S All in One Systems.
The DX-S All in One (DX-S Cut Down All in One) is an operating console that facilitates
the work of the radiographer. It is suitable for all CR environments: centralized,
decentralized or personal CR solutions.
It has been designed to be used together with the DX-S digitizer.
The DX-S All in One (DX-S Cut Down All in One ) is installed as a stand-alone
configuration.

The DX-S All in One cart offers space for:
a PC which handles, processes and dispatches images,
an LCD monitor (flat-screen),
mouse and keyboard,
a network switch,
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS),
cassette storage, and the

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 4
DD+DIS421.05E
2.1
Accessories
Overview DX-S All in One
Keyboard
LCD Monitor
Isolation
Transformer
(hidden)
Mouse
Cassette
Storage
UPS
DX-S
PC
figure1: Overview of components of the DX-S All in One system
2.2
Scope of Delivery DX-S All in One

Pieces
Description
PC (NX Processing Station) with keyboard and mouse
LCD flat Monitor
cassettes 24 x 30 cm
network cable
All in One operating cart
accessories box with two mains cables and technical

documentation

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 5
DD+DIS421.05E
2.3
Accessories
Type Label DX-S All in One
figure 2

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 6
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories

The DX-S Cut Down All in One cart offers space for:
3.1
a PC which handles, processes and dispatches images,
a network switch,
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS),
Overview DX-S Cut Down All in One
Isolation
Transformer
(hidden)
UPS
DX-S
PC
figure3: Overview of components of the DX-S Cut Down All in One system

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 7
DD+DIS421.05E
3.2
Accessories
Scope of Delivery DX-S Cut Down All in One

Pieces
3.3
Description
PC (NX Processing Station) with keyboard and mouse
LCD flat Monitor
network cable
All in One operating cart
accessories box with two mains cables and technical

documentation and extension cables for mouse, keyboard and
monitor (2)
Type Label DX-S Cut Down All in One
figure 4

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 8
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories
Detailed Service Information

NOTE:
For information concerning the components of the DX-S system, consult the respective
documentation:
DX-S:
Service Documentation
Order Number DD+DIS014.05E or
in MedNet: GSO Library Computed Radiography
CR Digitizers DX-S
NX 1.0:
in MedNet: GSO Library Computed Radiography/
CR Workstation Software NX 1.0
NX 2.0:
in MedNet: GSO Library Computed Radiography/
CR Workstation Software NX 2.0
UPS:
The User Manual which is delivered with the UPS

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 9
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories
Troubleshooting
Symptom
NX Processing Station and DX-S do not start up or shut down automatically.

The UPS is either off or is beeping, with the On Battery indicator blinking.
Defect
Solution
The voltage output of the isolation transformer is without current because of a defective
fuse.
Check fuses and replace them if necessary.
Four fuses are installed in the isolation
transformer:
Voltage input (primary side, A):
2 x 6.3 AT / 500 V inside the fuse box, beside
jumper switch for voltage input
Voltage output (secondary side, B):
2 x 6.3 AT / 500 V inside the fuse box above
jumper switch for voltage output
Order exchange fuses using the
order number:
figure 5
CM+9 0452 3187 0
WARNING!
Overload of isolation transformer can cause fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated above.

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 10
DD+DIS421.05E
Accessories
Maintenance
The DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100) and the DX-S Cut Down All in One
(Type 5163/105) are maintenance-free. Both are suitable for continuous operation.
Disposal
When its service life is over, do not dispose of the DX-S All in One or DX-S Cut Down
All in One without considering local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your
local sales organization.
Spare Parts Supply
Device
Order Number
DX-S Digitizer Type 5160/100
DD+DIS110.06M
DX-S All in One cart

Type 5163/100
DD+DIS097.06M
DX-S Cut Down All in One cart

Type 5163/105
DD+DIS218.07M
NOTE:
All spare parts lists are included in chapter 5 of the DX-S Service Documentation,
DD+DIS014.05E.

07-2007
DX-S All in One

Type 5163/100/105
Chapter 6 / 11
Accessories
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services
Order-No.: DD+DIS095.06E
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
Operating and Troubleshooting the

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Powerware 5125
Edition.
Revision
2.0
Release Changes
Date
12-2006 compared to previous Edition 1:
Only layout changes.
This document shall support the Field Service Engineer in the detection of
UPS-related problems. It explains the meanings of the LED indicators in the
UPS display and gives instructions for the UPS usage and for
troubleshooting.
The UPS Powerware 5125 is included in the delivery of the
DX-S All in One.
12-2006
printed in Germany

eq_06_accessories_e_template_v01
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1.

(see MEDNET GSO General Info Agfa HealthCare
Publications Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation,
repair or maintenance task on the equipment.
2.
Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety

Directions" and on the product.

Chapter 6
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
12-2006
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
List of Contents
Introduction .................................................................................. 1
Overview of the Indicators.......................................................... 2
Operating the UPS ....................................................................... 4
Signals and Actions .................................................................... 5
4.1
Signals and Actions in regular Operation.....................................................5
4.2
Warning Signals and Actions.........................................................................6
4.3
Alarm Signals and Actions .............................................................................7

Chapter 6 / I
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
12-2006
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
Introduction
This document supplements the manufacturer's documentation for the UPS
Powerware 5125. The additional information shall support the
Field Service Engineer in solving power supply problems and issues.
Section 2, Overview of the Indicators, explains the meaning of each indicator.
Section 3, Operating the UPS, gives a short overview of how to operate the
UPS.
Section 4, Signals and Actions, lists the most important signals, the
corresponding UPS state, and the actions which must be taken.
Button On
Button Off
Dis095.06_001.cdr
Button Test /
Alarm Reset
General Alarm
On Battery
+ -
+ -
Battery Service
100%
Load
25%
Site Wiring Fault

Power On
figure 1: UPS buttons and display

12-2006
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
Chapter 6 / 1
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
Overview of the Indicators

General Alarm
A general fault was detected or the self test of the UPS was
not successful.
Your action is required to bring the UPS back in a proper
working condition.
+ -
On Battery
The UPS runs on battery. Thus the UPS ensures the
continuous power supply of the connected devices during a
short breakage of the power supply. If the breakage lasts
longer, the battery supply allows to shut down the connected
devices without data loss.
Your action is required if this indicator does not switch off after
reconstitution of the mains power supply.
+ -
Battery Service
The battery cannot maintain the power supply in case of a
power cut-off.
Causes may be:
the battery is not correctly connected to the UPS, or
it is almost empty, or
it cannot be charged any more.
Your action is required to have the UPS equipped with a

working battery.

Chapter 6 / 2
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
12-2006
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
Site Wiring Fault

A ground wire connection does not exist or the neutral and line
wires in the wall outlet are reversed.
The site electrician must correct the wiring of the wall outlet.
Power On
This indicator shines or flashes green in all normal working
conditions of the UPS.
Additionally it may signal a problem with the power supply.
Your action is required to correct this problem.
Load
100%
The Load indicator shows which power is currently consumed

by all connected devices. It shows the power consumption
relative to the power delivery capacity of the UPS in steps of
25%:
25%
Bottom LED:
at least 1 % of UPS capacity
second LED:
third LED:
fourth LED:
The topmost LED signals that the power delivery capacity of

the UPS is exceeded. This LED should never shine if the UPS
is used with a digitizer and its control PC.
NOTE:
The Load indicator does not show the remaining capacity of
the battery!

12-2006
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
Chapter 6 / 3
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
Operating the UPS

NOTE:
If the signalling of the indicators does not match the description in the
Result column, check in section 4 if an action is necessary.
Action
Initial State
Description of Action
Result
Connecting to
power supply
The UPS is off and

disconnected
Connect the UPS

input connector to the
power supply
(mains wall outlet or
isolation transformer).
The UPS performs a

self test and
subsequently goes
into Standby mode
(see section 4.1 1).
Switching on
The UPS is in Standby

mode
Press the
button until
you hear the UPS beep
(approx. one second).
The UPS now

supplies the
connected devices
with power
Switching to
Standby mode
The UPS is supplying

the connected devices
Ensure that the

connected devices
are shut down.
The UPS is in
Standby mode
Press the
button
until the beep ceases
(approx. five
seconds).
Performing a
self test
The UPS is in
Standby mode
The battery is
charged.
Press the
button for
three seconds.
The UPS performs a

self test and
subsequently goes
into Standby mode

Chapter 6 / 4
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
12-2006
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
Action
Initial State
Description of Action
Result
Performing a
battery test
The UPS is in Standby

mode
button for
Press the
three seconds.
The UPS performs a

battery test and
subsequently goes
into Standby mode
Switching on
without
power supply
There is no
power supply but it is
necessary to run the
connected devices for a
limited time.
Press the
button for
at least four seconds.
The UPS supplies

the connected
devices from
battery power
Signals and Actions
4.1
Signals and Actions in regular Operation

Indicators
green flashing
Sound Signals
UPS State
Actions
---
The UPS has power supply and is

in Standby mode.
Connected devices are not
supplied.
The Battery is charging.
Switch on the
UPS.
green
continuous
---
The UPS has power supply and

supplies the connected devices.
The Load indicator displays the
power which is consumed by the
connected devices.
---
orange
continuous
---
The UPS supplies the connected

devices.
Slight overvoltage of the power
supply (approx. 5 %)
---
green-orange
flashing
---
The UPS supplies the connected

devices.
Slight undervoltage of the power
supply (approx. 10 %)
---

12-2006
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
Chapter 6 / 5
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
4.2
Warning Signals and Actions

Indicators
Sound Signals
UPS State
Actions
red-orange
flashing
---
The UPS supplies the

connected devices.
Approx. 20 % undervoltage of
the power supply.
If this condition
occurs frequently, let
check the mains
circuit which supplies
the UPS.
red
continuous
+ orange
continuous
Beep every
4 seconds
The voltage and / or

frequency of the
power supply is out of range.
connected devices from
battery.
The connected devices can
be supplied only for up to two
hours.
If connected
devices are
running: Shut
them down to
avoid data loss.
Check if the
power supply
provides the
correct input
voltage to the
UPS.
If connected
devices are
running: Shut
them down to
avoid data loss.
Check the
connection to the
mains.
Check the mains

circuit breaker of
the wall outlet.
Check the
connection to the
mains.
Check the mains

circuit breaker of
the wall outlet.
orange
continuous
+ -
Beep every
4 seconds
---
4
+ -

battery.
Thus the connected devices
can be supplied only for up to
two hours.
UPS was switched on

although it has no
power supply.
+ -
are on for
few seconds,
then off.

Chapter 6 / 6
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
12-2006
DD+DIS095.06E
4.3
Accessories
Alarm Signals and Actions

Indicators
+ -
+ -
orange flashing
red continuous
red continuous
Sound Signals
UPS State
Actions
Beep every
2 seconds

battery and battery is
nearly discharged.
The connected devices are
supplied only for up to
three minutes.
If connected
devices are
running:
Immediately shut
them down to avoid
data loss.
Check the
connection to the
mains.
Check the mains

circuit breaker of
the wall outlet.
Check the
battery connection.
The UPS is
delivered with the
battery
disconnected.
Switch UPS to
Standby mode and
let the battery
charge for
24 hours.
Run the battery

test. If it fails
exchange the
battery.
Let the battery

charge for at least
3 hours.
Run UPS self test

again.
---
---
The UPS cannot supply the

connected devices in case
of power failure because
battery is not ready.
The UPS self test failed,

possibly because battery is
discharged.

12-2006
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
Chapter 6 / 7
DD+DIS095.06E
Accessories
Indicators
4
red continuous
for ten seconds,
then all LEDs off
Sound Signals
UPS State
Actions
---
The UPS is overheated.
Switch UPS to
Standby mode and
disconnect from
power supply.
Let the UPS cool

down.
Vacuum-clean the
fan at the rear side.
Remove heat
sources and
ensure free
air circulation
around the UPS.
Immediately shut
down the
connected devices.
Shut off the UPS

and disconnect
from power supply.
Exchange the UPS.
---
The UPS is defect.
+ + -
are on.

Chapter 6 / 8
DX-S All in One

Type 5163 / 100
12-2006
DD+DIS014.05E
Field Modifications
Chapter 7
List of Contents
Edition
2
Revision Order Number

0
Contents
DD+DIS288.06E Installation Instructions for

Digitizer Software STR_1306

eq_07_field-mod_toc_e_template_v01
12-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 7
Field Modifications
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160
Installation Instructions
for DX-S Digitizer Software STR_1404
It provides prerequisites for the installation of Digitizer Software STR_1404
It gives installation instructions for Digitizer Software STR_1404
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.0
04-2007
Initial Release
Document
Title
Preceding Bulletin
Service Bulletin No. 22,

New DX-S Digitizer Software STR_1404 released,
DD+DIS073.07E


eq_07_field-modifications_e_template_v02
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
on the product.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 2
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
LIST OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
1.1
Purpose of the Modification ......................................................................................................4
1.2
Ex-Factory Installation ..............................................................................................................5
PREREQUISITES FOR THE INSTALLATION .........................................................................6
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ................................................................................................7

3.1
Uninstalling the previous DX-S Software Version.....................................................................7
3.2
Installing the DX-S Software on the Control PC .......................................................................8
3.3
Procedure after Error "The firmware version is incorrect"...................................................13
3.4
Procedure after Error "The device is not registered correctly"............................................14
3.5
Updating the Software on the Digitizer ...................................................................................16
3.6
Restarting the System.............................................................................................................18
USE ON SITES BETWEEN 2000 AND 3000 M .....................................................................19
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................22

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 3
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
Introduction
1.1
Purpose of the Modification

DX-S Digitizer Software STR_1404 has been introduced as successor of STR_1306.
With STR_1404 several bugs have been solved.
For a detailed description of all solved and open bugs of Digitizer Software STR_1404
refer to Chapter 3.8 of the DX-S Service Documentation, DD+DIS014.05E.
Error
Messages
of Digitizer
User
Interface
in several
languages
With the release of STR_1404 error messages for the following languages are available:
Chinese China
Japanese
Chinese Taiwan
Korean
Czech
Latvian
Danish
Lithuanian
Dutch
Norwegian
English
Polish
Estonian
Portuguese
Finish
Russian
French
Slovak
German
Slovenian
Greek
Spanish
Hungarian
Swedish
Italian
Turkish

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 4
DD+DIS074.07E
Use on
sites on
an altitude
between
2000 and
3000 m
Field Modifications
In contrast to former Digitizer Software versions STR_1404 is additionally intended for the
use on sites which are located on an altitude between 2000 and 3000 m above sea level.
For those sites between 2000 and 3000 m additionally a modified pump unit is required.
The release of the modified pump unit is still in preparation and therefore the feature to use
the digitizer on an altitude between 2000 and 3000 m is not yet applicable.
After its release the modified pump unit can be recognized by a label. The label is located
on the upper left side of the pump unit and indicates the part numer which must be
F8.5160.8100.4 (index 4 or higher).
Detailed information about availability of the modified pump unit will be communicated in a
Service Bulletin.
For sites below 2000 m the previous pump unit and the modified pump unit can be used in
combination with STR_1404.
1.2
Ex-Factory Installation
The Digitizer Software STR_1404 is installed ex factory on following devices:
Devices
Serial Numbers
DX-S digitizer
SN 1264

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 5
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
Prerequisites for the Installation

REQUIRED SPARE PART
Digitizer Software STR_1404 can be obtained:
Required
Processing
Station
Software
By download from MedNet GSO Library:

Computed Radiography CR Digitizers DX-S Freeware
or
By spare parts supply: Order Number CM+9 5160 0935 0
The following Processing Station software has been released for the use of
DX-S Digitizer Software STR_1404:
NX 1.0 SP1 (NX 1.0.3203)
NX 1.0 SP1 SU1 (NX 1.0.3203 SU1)
NX 1.0 SP1 SU2 (NX 1.0 3203 SU2)
NX 2.0 GenRad (NX 2.0.1703)
Note that STR_1404 is a prerequisite when one or more of the following electronic
hardware boards are used.
When ordering one of these components STR_1404 is mandatory prerequisite and
therefore enclosed to the spare part.
GS IP Handling Board, CM+9 5160 4860 5

(index 5 or higher, Microcontroller type: M306N4FGTFP)
GS Air Control Board, CM+9 5160 4830 2

GS UIF-Stratus, F8.5160.4810.4
(is in scope of spare part display and user interface CM+9 5160 9030 x)
GS M16-Scanhead-Controller, CM+9 5160 4790 2

REQUIRED TIME
Approximately 50 minutes

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 6
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
Installation Procedure
3.1
Uninstalling the previous DX-S Software Version

(1)
Ensure that the control PC is running.
(2)
Log in with crservice account.
(3)
Close the NX application.

<Exit NX>.
figure 1
Result
(4)
Stop the NX service.

For this, open Windows menu Start / Agfa / NX / Service / Stop NX.
A console window pops up. Press <Enter> key.
(5)
Open Windows menu Start / Settings / Control Panel, double-click <Add or

Remove Programs>.
(6)
Remove DX-S from the system.
(7)
Restart control PC and log in with your service account.
The DX-S software on the control PC is uninstalled now.

(8)
The control PC is now ready for the installation of digitizer software STR_1404. For
the procedure refer to section 3.2
Installing the DX-S Software on the Control PC.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 7
DD+DIS074.07E
3.2
Field Modifications
Installing the DX-S Software on the Control PC

(1)
Stop the NX service, if still running.
(2)
Create folder C:\Installer if it does not exist.
(3)
Copy the files DX-SInstaller_1404.msi and vjredist.exe to

C:\Installer on the hard disk of the control PC.
(4)
Double-click DX-SInstaller_1404.msi file.

(5)
The message in figure 2 is displayed if DX-S software version STR_1404 is

installed for the first time and Microsoft Visual J#.Net is not already installed.
If it is not displayed, proceed with step (10).
figure 2
(6)
Click <No>.
(7)
Double-click the vjredist.exe file in C:\Installer.

The Microsoft Java VM is installed.
(8)
Follow the instructions on the screen until the installation is complete.
(9)
Double-click DX-SInstaller_1404.msi file.


04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 8
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications

Window DX-S Communications Interface pops up.
(11) Check radio button DIFO (via IEEE 1394).
figure 3
(12) Click <Next>.

The dialog Select Installation Folder is displayed.
figure 4
(13)
Check radio button Everyone.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 9
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications

Dialog Confirm Installation appears.
Installation is started.
After a while the DX-S Installer window pops up.
NOTE:
Do not press <OK> unless you have checked the credentials by clicking button
<Check> (see figure 5).
Entering the wrong password and continuing the installation makes the
Agfa Service Manager inaccessible. The service could not be started or
stopped.
(16) Enter the network Domain your control PC belongs to.

(17) Enter crservice account data in User Name and Password.
figure 5

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 10
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
(18) Check your credentials with button <Check>.

Only if check was successful, click button <OK> in DX-S Installer window.
(19) The message in figure 6 is displayed after a successful installation.
figure 7
Click button <Close> and restart the control PC.

(21) Close the NX application, if still running.
(22) Stop the NX service, if still running.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 11
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
(23) Restart the digitizer.

Self test and establishment of the connection between DX-S and control PC
When it establishes the connection with the control PC, one of the following
error messages appears on the PC screen:
The firmware version is incorrect
figure 8
If this message appears, then continue with section 3.3

Procedure after Error "The firmware version is incorrect".
The device is not registered correctly...

This message only should pop up, when the DX-S and the control PC have
been connected for the first time or e.g. the hard disk of the control PC has
been changed
figure 9
If this message appears, then continue with section 3.4

Procedure after Error "The device is not registered correctly".

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 12
DD+DIS074.07E
3.3
Field Modifications
Procedure after Error "The firmware version is incorrect"

(1)
Close the Error Viewer window.
(2)
Open Windows menu Start / Programs / Agfa DX-S /

(3)
In User Name enter your name.
(4)
In Password enter the Service password.
figure 10
(5)
Continue with section 3.5 Updating the Software on the Digitizer.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 13
DD+DIS074.07E
3.4
Field Modifications
Procedure after Error "The device is not registered correctly"

(1)
Close the Error Viewer window.
(2)

(3)
(4)
figure 11
(5)

In the tree view, go to Configuration / Site Specific Data.
figure 12

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 14
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
(6)
Click button <Configure Site with new EMS Serial Number>

The correct SN is updated and written into the corresponding field.
(7)
Connection is being interrupted, then DX-S and control PC re-connect

automatically.
If automatic connection fails, restart the DX-S digitizer.
(8)
The following message appears (the file name may differ):
figure 13
Click button <OK>.

Result
The serial number is now updated.

(9)
Continue with section 3.5 Updating the Software on the Digitizer.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 15
DD+DIS074.07E
3.5
Field Modifications
Updating the Software on the Digitizer

(1)
In the tree view, go to Modification / SW Upload.
figure 14
(2)
Click button <Get installed versions>
different is shown in most Status fields of the nodes table.
(3)
Click button <Select all>.
(4)
Click button <Upload selected nodes>.

The system starts uploading the nodes (duration: 15 20 minutes).
NOTE:
Failure messages are displayed during nodes upload. They are due
to the upload itself and do not indicate a malfunction.
They can be ignored.
Typical error codes during the upload are:
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
Failure at air supply / vacuum module

Failure at IP handling module
Failure at cassette handling module
Failure at scan head controller module
Failure at user interface module
Failure at erasure module
Failure at power supply module

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 16
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
(5)
Wait until the animation in the Activity bar is stopped and the message
"Restart of DX-S Service or of Digitizer required" is displayed in the last
line of the Activity textbox.
(6)

OK is shown in all Status fields of the nodes table. Only STR_1404 is
shown for all nodes, except the second one.
figure 15
(7)
In the tree view, go to General Device Info -> Info Counter

Software Master Version has to be STR_1404
This verifies that digitizer software STR_1404 is correctly installed.
figure 16

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 17
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
(8)
The software on the digitizer is updated.
Result
(9)
3.6
Close the Service Client.
Restart the system according to the procedure described in

section 3.6 Restarting the System.
Restarting the System

(1)
Open Windows menu Start / Agfa / NX / Service / Start NX.

figure 17
(2)
Follow the instructions given in the console window until it is closed

automatically.
The NX application opens.
(3)
Restart the digitizer.

Self test and establishment of the connection between DX-S and control PC
Finally the digitizer displays state Ready.
Result
The installation of digitizer software STR_1404 is complete.

The DX-S system is ready to process cassettes.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 18
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
Use on Sites between 2000 and 3000 m above Sea Level

NOTE:
In contrast to former Digitizer Software versions STR_1404 is additionally intended for
the use on sites which are located on an altitude between 2000 and 3000 m above
sea level.
For those sites between 2000 and 3000 m additionally a modified pump unit is
required. The release of the modified pump unit is still in preparation and therefore the
feature to use the digitizer on an altitude between 2000 and 3000 m is not yet
applicable.
After its release the modified pump unit can be recognized by a label. The label is
located on the upper left side of the pump unit and indicates the part numer which
must be F8.5160.8100.4 (index 4 or higher).
Detailed information about availability of the modified pump unit will be communicated
in a Service Bulletin.
For sites below 2000 m the previous pump unit and the modified pump unit can be
used in combination with STR_1404.
If the DX-S Digitizer is intended to be used on sites between 2000 and 3000 m
following setting has to be made in the DX-S Service Client:
IMPORTANT:
For sites below 2000m this setting neednt be set in the DX-S Service Client.
(1)

(2)
(3)
figure 18

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 19
DD+DIS074.07E
(4)
Field Modifications

In the tree view, go to Configuration / Site Specific Data.
figure 19
(5)
Check that button Installation site is located higher than

2000 m/6562ft is set.
figure 20
(6)
Result:
Click button Update Site Specific Data
DX-S Digitizer Software STR_1404 is prepared for the use on sites located between
2000 and 3000 m.
Additionally the modified pump unit is required.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 20
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
To check whether the digitizer hardware is prepared for the use on sites located
between 2000 and 3000 m the pump unit must be controlled.
NOTE:
The modified pump unit can be recognized by a label on its surface.
To check whether the modified pump unit is already installed, proceed as follows:
(7)
Switch off DX-S and NX Processing Station.
(8)
Unplug DX-S from the mains.
(9)
Remove right side panel of the DX-S.
(10) Check, whether modified pump unit is installed.

The label is located on the upper left side of the pump unit and indicates the
part numer which must be F8.5160.8100.4 (index 4 or higher).
(11) If a modified pum unit is installed, the digitizer is prepared for the use on an
altitude between 2000 and 3000 m.
If no modified pump unit is installed the last index of the part number is < 4 and
the pump unit has to be replaced by the modified one.
Detailed information about the release of the modified pump unit will be
communicated in a Service Bulletin.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 21
DD+DIS074.07E
Field Modifications
Troubleshooting
In case of a replaced or new control PC or when the hard disk of the control PC has
been replaced, possibly the system requests to install a driver for the SHI Board.
(1)
After restarting digitizer and conrol PC the following message

could pop up on the control PC. This occurs only when the driver for the
SHI-Board is not yet installed on the conrol PC. Then proceed as follows:
figure 21
Click <Next>.
(2)
A screen pops up indicating to continue:
figure 22
Click <Continue Anyway>.

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 22
DD+DIS074.07E
(3)
Field Modifications
The system requests to provide the path for the driver 1394AGFA.sys:
figure 23
Click <Browse> and go to C:\AGFA\Difo.
figure 24
(4)
Select 1394AGFA.sys and click <Open>.

A successful installation of the driver is indicated by the following message:
figure 25

04-2007
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 7 / 23
Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE
Manufacturing Standard
Modifications
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160

This document contains an overview of all the technical changes and their
chronological introduction as a production standard. This includes hardware and
software modifications.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.2
01-2008
Added Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1404B,

details see section 2, page 5 .
Document
Title
n.a.
n.a.


eq_08_modifications_e_template_v05
DD+DIS014.05E
Manufacturer
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:
Release Date, Edition and Revision are displayed in the footer of each own
new released document.
So please refer to the GSO Library doc type Order list and Front page to verify
the volume and revision status of a Service Manual.

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 2
DD+DIS014.05E
OVERVIEW OF MODIFICATIONS:
timeline
Modification
2007
Dec. Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1404B
Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS014.05E
Enclosure: DD+DIS359.07E
April Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1404
SB No. 22: DD+DIS073.07E

Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS014.05E
Chapter 7: DD+DIS074.07E
2006
August Introduction of improved Erasure Unit
July Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1306

Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS287.06E
Chapter 7: DD+DIS288.06E
June/ Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1305

April
MSB No. 19:

DD+DIS217.06E
Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS287.06E
March Introduction of an improved Erasure Unit
March Introduction of a new Power Unit
January/ Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1207

February
January DX-S Server Systems delivered with 2 GB RAM

Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS287.06E
n.a.
2005
Dec. Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1206
Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS287.06E
Oct. Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1102B
Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS287.06E
Sept. Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1102A
Chapter 3.8:
DD+DIS287.06E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 3
DD+DIS014.05E
Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1404B

Reason
This patch is especially made and necessary for reliable work of

DX-S with the LED-Erasure Unit and contains a solution for the:
Communication problem
and
Timeout problem
with the LED-Erasure Unit.

Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
SN = 1392; 1396 / CW 50/2007
Part
Number(s)
Digitizer software STR_1404B can be downloaded from MedNet:

GSO Library\Computed Radiography\CR Digitizers\
DX-S\Freeware\Digitizer Software STR_1404B
Referenced
Document(s)
Chapter 3.8 of the DX-S service manual

DD+DIS014.05E
Enclosure - Installation Instructions for the LED Erasure Unit

DD+DIS359.07E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 4
DD+DIS014.05E
Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1404

Reason
With Digitizer Software STR_1404 several bugs have been

solved.
A detailed description of all solved and still open bugs refer to
chapter 3.8 of the Service Manual.
With the release of STR_1404 error messages for several

languages are available.
In contrast to former Digitizer Software versions STR_1404 is

additionally intended for the use on sites which are located on
an altitude between 2000 and 3000 m. For those sites
between 2000 and 3000 m additionally an modified pump unit
is required.
The release of the modified pump unit is still in preparation.
For sites below 2000 m the previous pump unit and the
modified pump unit can be used in with STR_1404.
Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
On digitizer:
SN 1264, CW 16/2007
Part
Number(s)
Digitizer software STR_1404 can be obtained:
Via spare part channel: CM+9 5160 0935 0
or
Referenced
Document(s)
Download from MedNet GSO Library:

Computed Radiography\CR Digitizers\
DX-S\Freeware\Digitizer Software STR_1404
Service Bulletin No. 22, DD+DIS073.07E
Chapter 3.8 of DX-S Service Manual, DD+DIS014.05E
Chapter 7 of DX-S Service Manual, Installation Instructions

for Digitzer Sofware STR_1404, DD+DIS074.07E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 5
DD+DIS014.05E
Introduction of improved Erasure Unit
Reason
The improved erasure unit ensures more reliable triggering of the

erasure unit lamp. Additionally, it is equipped with new erasure
lamps and is subjected to ba burn-in test before delivery.
This introduction serves to decrease the rate of service
interventions.
Current erasure units must not be replaced if they are fully
functional. They are only replaced by the improved one if the
erasure unit or the erasure unit lamp is defective.
Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
On digitizer:
SN 1185
Part
Number(s)
Improved Erasure unit
Referenced
Document(s)
CM+9 5160 3300 0

Service Bulletin No. 14 Revision 1, DD+DIS087.06E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 6
DD+DIS014.05E

Reason
Solution for:
Puzzled images due to electrostatic discharge

(HQ_0601270001)
With software version STR_1306 the system automatically restarts

when it detects a puzzled image. The intact image appears on the
NX.
A manual system stop by the operator is not necessary.
Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
Part
Number(s)
On NX Processing Station:
SN NX-1001-10118 / CW 28/2006
On digitizer:
SN = 1180, 1182, SN 1185 / CW 27/2006
Digitizer software STR_1306
Via spare part channel: CM+9 5160 0930 0
Download from MedNet:
Computed Radiography\CR Digitizers\
DX-S\Freeware\Digitizer Software STR_1306
Referenced
Document(s)

DD+DIS287.06E
Chapter 7 - Installation Instructions for STR_1306

DD+DIS288.06E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 7
DD+DIS014.05E

NOTE:
Software version STR_1305 has been released for production but is not available as
an upgrade for the DX-S.
Install software version STR_1306 or higher instead.
Reason
Solution for:
Puzzled images due to electrostatic discharge

(HQ_0601270001)
With software version STR_1305 the system must be
restarted manually by the operator when a puzzled image is
detected. The intact image appears on the NX after the
manual restart.
The intact image appears on the NX after the manual restart.
Failure in Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) of

"All in One" configuration (HQ_0601230001)
Image artifacts in combination with anti-scatter grids

(HQ_0601230002)
Wrong mechanical adjustment of handling robot

(HQ_0511140003)
Further bugs which are listed in chapter 3.8 of this

service manual.
From this software version on, the digitizer is operated in

combination with NX 1.0 workstation instead of CR QS 3.0.229
workstation.
Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
On NX Processing Station:
SN NX-1001-10052 / CW 23/2006
On digitizer:
SN 1001 SN 1179, SN = 1181, 1183, 1184 / CW 15/2006
Part
Number(s)
Digitizer software STR_1305:
Referenced
Document(s)
Mandatory Service Bulletin No. 19

DD+DIS217.06E

DD+DIS287.06E
not introduced as spare part,

order digitizer software STR_1306 instead

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 8
DD+DIS014.05E
Introduction of an improved Erasure Unit

Reason
The original erasure unit has been supplied with

330 V trigger voltage. This trigger voltage proved not to be
sufficient to ensure reliable triggering of the erasure lamp
throughout lifetime.
To improve lifetime stability the trigger voltage has been increased
to 440 V trigger voltage.
Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
On QS Processing Station:
not applicable
Part
Number(s)
Erasure unit
Referenced
Document(s)
On digitizer:
SN > 1163 / CW 12/2006
CM+9 5160 3500 2

Service Bulletin No. 14 DD+DIS087.06E
Introduction of a new Power Unit

Reason
Solution for:
Air supply, IP Handling and Cassette Handling nodes are not

supplied with the necessary voltage (HQ_0604240002).
Product(s) &
Serial
Number(s)
not applicable
Part
Number(s)
Power unit
Referenced
Document(s)
On digitizer:
SN > 1153 / CW 09/2006
CM+9 5160 4700 2

Service Bulletin No. 16 DD+DIS114.06E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 9
DD+DIS014.05E

Reason
Solution for:
Product(s) &
Serial Number(s)
Sporadically, the ID Viewer does not pop up on the

workstation when cassette is inserted in the digitizer
(HQ_0511240004)
SN QS-SERV-8510 / CW 05/2006
On digitizer:
SN 1101 / CW 03/2006
Part Number(s)

- spare part has become obsolete -
Referenced
Document(s)
Service Bulletin No. 12, DD+DIS005.06E

DD+DIS287.06E
DX-S Server Systems delivered with 2 GB RAM

Reason
In order to extend the memory capacity of the server, it is

now supplied with 2 GB RAM.
Product(s) &
Serial Number(s)
SN QS-SERV-8297 / CW 01/2006
On digitizer:
not applicable
Part Number(s)
- not introduced as spare part -
Referenced
Document(s)
--

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 10
DD+DIS014.05E
10

Reason
Product(s) &
Serial Number(s)
Solution for:
Corrupted image after system startup

(HQ_0510050001)
Erasure Unit sporadically does not switch off

(HQ_0510200001)
Wrong scanning parameter after ID timeout

(HQ_0510200002)
Further bugs which are listed in the documents stated

below.
SN QS-SERV-8237 / CW 51/2005
On digitizer:
SN 1080 / CW 49/2005
Part Number(s)

Referenced
Document(s)
11

DD+DIS287.06E
Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1102B

Reason
Solution for:
Product(s) &
Serial Number(s)
Pixel size too small when printing in true-size mode

(HQ_0509260001)
on QS Processing Station:
SN QS-SERV-7724 / CW 43/2005
on digitizer:
software has not been introduced in production
Part Number(s)
Digitizer software STR_1102B

Referenced
Document(s)

DD+DIS287.06E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 11
DD+DIS014.05E
12
Introduction of Digitizer Software STR_1102A

Reason
With the new software new functionalities have been

introduced and a list of bugs has been solved.
For a detailed description refer to document stated below.
Product(s) &
Serial Number(s)
SN QS-SERV-7639 / CW 39/2005
On digitizer:
SN 1013 / CW 38/2005
Part Number(s)
Digitizer software STR_1102A

- not introduced as spare part -
Referenced
Document(s)
Chapter 3.8 of the DX-S service manual,

DD+DIS287.06E

01-2008
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 8 / 12
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 9
Maintenance
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160
This document is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS395.06E

eq_09_maintenance_e_template_v07
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

the equipment.
(2)
the product.
NOTE:

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 2
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance

This document contains all routines and tests to be carried out during maintenance.
It describes all must maintenance periodical steps in chronological suitable order.
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.4
08-2009
Updated the part number for the Maintenance

Assortment, see section 1.5.
Updated sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.6.2, 3.7, 3.9 and 3.13.
Added information about:

- Importing the Limit Pattern, see section 4.4.2.
- Evaluating a Flatfield, see section 4.4.3.
Layout and structural improvements
Document
Title
Chapter 3.5,
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S Service Manual, Replacements / Repair Procedures
Chapter 3.6,
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S Service Manual, Adjustments and Calibrations

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 3
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
LIST OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION ON PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .............................................6

1.1
Maintenance Frequency ...........................................................................................................6
1.2
Required Time...........................................................................................................................6
1.3
Required Tools..........................................................................................................................7
1.4
Required Cleaning Material ......................................................................................................7
1.5
Required Spare Parts ...............................................................................................................7
MAINTENANCE STEP BY STEP .............................................................................................8

2.1
Diagnostics................................................................................................................................8
2.1.1
Questioning of the Customer ....................................................................................................8
2.1.2
Info Counter Analysis................................................................................................................8
2.1.3
Resetting the relative Counter ................................................................................................10
2.1.4
E-Label Analysis .....................................................................................................................10
MAINTENANCE POINTS - POWER OFF ..............................................................................11

3.1
Preparing the DX-S for Maintenance......................................................................................11
3.2
Removing the Panels..............................................................................................................14
3.3
Releasing compressed Air ......................................................................................................16
3.4
Overall visual Inspection .........................................................................................................17
3.5
Overall Cleaning .....................................................................................................................17
3.6
Cleaning of the Erasure Unit...................................................................................................18
3.6.1
Cleaning of the LED Erasure Unit...........................................................................................18
3.6.2
Cleaning of the Flashlight Erasure Unit Fan

(only for Flashlight erasure unit, up to SN 1402) ....................................................................19
3.7
Cleaning of the Scan Head .....................................................................................................21
3.8
Replacing the Segment Filters................................................................................................23
3.9
Replacing the Filter on Vacuum Distribution Plate .................................................................24
3.10
Replacing the Filter of the Main Fan.......................................................................................26
3.11
Remount the DX-S Components ............................................................................................27
3.12
Cassette Maintenance ............................................................................................................27
3.13
Image Plate Maintenance (if required)....................................................................................28

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 4
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE POINTS - POWER ON ................................................................................30

4.1
Switch on the DX-S and the Control PC .................................................................................30
4.2
Performing Test Cycles...........................................................................................................30
4.3
Calibrate all Formats...............................................................................................................30
4.4
Checking the Technical Image Quality of the System ............................................................31
4.4.1
Exposing a Flatfield.................................................................................................................31
4.4.2
Importing the Limit Pattern (optional)......................................................................................32
4.4.3
Evaluating a Flatfield...............................................................................................................33
4.5
Creating a Backup CD ............................................................................................................38
COMPLETING MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................38
MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST ................................................................................................39

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 5
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
General Information on Preventive Maintenance

NOTE:
These maintenance instructions must be considered confidential.
To ensure quality and functional reliability of the system all the points mentioned in this
document must be carried out.
1.1
The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable order to

make the work routines as efficient as possible.
The sequence of the maintenance points in the Maintenance Checklist, section 6,
is identical with the maintenance instructions listed in the next pages of this
chapter.
During the maintenance procedure always consider the safety instructions, see
chapter 3.1 of the DX-S Service Manual and the Generic Safety Directions
document.
Please check if it is necessary to include country specific regulations as additional

maintenance points. The doc-file of the maintenance chapter can be downloaded
from MedNet and adapted to local needs and standards.
Maintenance Frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:
1.2
Every 25.000 cycles, or
Every 12 months, whatever comes first
Required Time
Approximately 2 hours

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 6
DD+DIS395.06E
1.3
1.4
Maintenance
Required Tools
Order Number*
Description
CM+9 5155 1015 2

Commercially available
Cu filter (for exposure of test images)

Flashlight
Required Cleaning Material

In addition to the standard equipment the following cleaning substances are required:
Order Number*
Description
CM+9 9999 0895 0

CM+9 9999 0896 0
10+9 9999 1197 0
Vacuum cleaner
Dirt bags for vacuum cleaner (10 x)
ADC screen cleaner
(CR Phosphor IP Cleaner 2P = 2 x 0.5l)
Curix screen cleaner
Dust brush
Soft lint-free cloth
Soft dust brush
Canned air
ABC-Code: EFCVV
1.5
Required Spare Parts

The Maintenance Kit (order number*: CM+9 5160 9200 0) comprises:
Order Number*
Description
CM+9 5146 1799 2
1 x Air filter
CM+9 5160 9060 0
1 x Package of segment filters (12x)

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 7
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
Maintenance Step by Step
2.1
Diagnostics
2.1.1
Questioning of the Customer

ACTION:
Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last maintenance.
2.1.2
Info Counter Analysis

(1) On the Control PC, go to: Stratus Service Client
General Device Info Info Counter
(2) Look at the tab Value:
Is the installed SW Version the current one?
Do one or more errors occur frequently?
In this tab the characteristically values for the selected node are given, e.g. the
total number of flashes fired in the flash erasure unit.
NOTE:
For the current SW Version refer to:
MedNet/GSO Library/Computed Radiography/CR Digitizers/DX-S/Freeware
(3) Look at the tab Counters:
In this tab the events, specific for the current digitizer node, are counted, e.g. the
number of erasure operations performed by the flash erasure unit.
(4) Reset the relative count, see section 2.1.3.
(5) Look at the tab Lists for error messages:
In this tab all events which occurred in the selected digitizer node, are listed.
Select a List Name, e.g. Error History with CBF by clicking once on
the desired entry in the left pane. The entries of the list are displayed on the
right pane.
Select a List Entry Name by clicking once on the desired entry in the right
pane. The attributes of the selected entry are displayed in the bottom pane.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 8
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
Figure 1
NOTE:
For help on the analysis of the Infocounter Entries refer to MedNet GSO Library:
Computed Radiography\CR Digitizers\Troubleshooting Guide\

DX-S Troubleshooting Guide - latest version (Intranet Link / Extranet Link, for
external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner)
Computed Radiography\CR Digitizers\Troubleshooting Guide\

DX-S Known Issues Infocounter Entries (Intranet Link / Extranet Link, for
external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner)

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 9
DD+DIS395.06E
2.1.3
Maintenance
Resetting the relative Counter

(1) Go to:
Stratus Service Client General Device Info Info Counter
(2) Select tab Counters.
(3) Select the event you want to reset by clicking once on the counter name.
(4) Click <Reset Counter>.
(5) Repeat steps 1 and 2 with all events you want to reset.
Figure 2
2.1.4
E-Label Analysis
(1) Go to: Stratus Service Client General Device Info E-Label
(2) Check all the values in the list of every node.
(3) Especially look at the values:
5 Most Frequent Device Errors
Last Repair Date
Mean Cycles between Failures of the Product
Number of Repairs
10 Last Module Specific Errors
NOTE:
These values give you a hint where to start with your repair service and which parts are
especially sensitive and thus need regular observation.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 10
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
Maintenance Points - Power off
3.1
Preparing the DX-S for Maintenance

Please follow the description below to get access to the DX-S
when it is integrated in an All in One.
NOTE:
Make sure that rear brakes of the DX-S All in One are activated before beginning
the maintenance.
(1)
Shut down the DX-S and

NX workstation.
(2)
Unplug the mains connector

of the DX-S.
Figure 3
(3)
Unscrew three screws (A)

of the cover of the digitizer's
Firewire connector.
(4)
Loosen screw (B).
B
Figure 4

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 11
DD+DIS395.06E
(5)
Maintenance
Remove the cover and

unplug the Firewire cable
of the DX-S Firewire-connector.
Figure 5
(6)
Unscrew two screws

(Phillips screwdriver) and
remove the cover plate.
Figure 6
(7)
Loosen the screws (1) at the

front of the All in One
(8)

left side (2).
(9)
Remove the plate (3).
Figure 7
(10) Take out the service bridge

from the lower bracket of the
All in One cabinet.
Figure 8

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 12
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
(11) Install the service bridge at

the All in One.
Figure 9
(12)
Move the DX-S carefully onto

the service bridge until it hits
the bridge edge.
Figure 10

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 13
DD+DIS395.06E
3.2
Maintenance
Removing the Panels

(1)
Loosen two 4 mm Allen screws

(circles) at the rear of the machine.
(2)
Lift off the cover.
Figure 11
(3)
Push the left side panel to the rear side and lift it up to free the
bottom side hooks.
(4)
Move it gently downwards to remove it.
(5)
Repeat steps (3) and (4) for the right side panel.
(6)
Unplug power and data cables

(circles) from the display.
Figure 12

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 14
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
(7)
Loosen two Phillips screws (small

size) at both sides of the front panel
(the circle shows the screw on the
digitizer's left side).
(8)
Carefully remove the front cover.
Figure 13
Result
The DX-S is now ready for inspection.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 15
DD+DIS395.06E
3.3
Maintenance
Releasing compressed Air

REQUIRED TOOLS:
NOTE:
Release compressed air from the tank, before you start working
at the air supply unit.
There can be condensate in the pressure tank. By releasing the compressed air the
condensate will also be removed.
The occurrence of condensate is not an indication for damage to the DX-S.
The condensate should be removed at each maintenance cycle.
The air supply unit is located at the righthand side of the digitizer.
Figure 14
(1)
Unplug the air outlet (A).
(2)
Open the two quick action

closures (B).
(3)
Release the compressed air by

pressing button (C).
(4)
Take out the air supply unit as

described in chapter 3.5 of the
service manual.
Figure 15

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 16
DD+DIS395.06E
3.4
Maintenance
Overall visual Inspection

REQUIRED TOOL:
Flashlight
ACTION:
Check overall condition of the machine outside and inside for obvious changes
or damage.
3.5
Overall Cleaning
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Vacuum cleaner
NOTE:
Take care not to touch any PCB with the vacuum cleaner.
ACTION:
Vacuum the interior of the digitizer and wipe it.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 17
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
3.6
Cleaning of the Erasure Unit
3.6.1
Cleaning of the LED Erasure Unit

REQUIRED TOOL:
NOTE:
The LED erasure unit should have less pollution than the flashlight erasure unit.
(1)
Remove the LED erasure unit from

the digitizer. For the procedure refer
to chapter 3.5 of the service manual
Figure 16
(2)
Check for visible damage or defects on the LED erasure unit.
(3)
Carefully clean the LED erasure unit with a soft lint-free cloth, so that the LEDs
will not be scratched or damaged.
(4)
Remount the LED erasure unit into the digitizer.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 18
DD+DIS395.06E
3.6.2
Maintenance
Cleaning of the Flashlight Erasure Unit Fan (only for Flashlight erasure unit,
up to SN 1402)
INSTRUCTION:
Erasure unit must be taken out for cleaning.
Clean dust that may stick to the fans of the erasure unit (vacuum cleaner).
Do not remove the fans from the housing, clean them in place (vacuum cleaner).
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Vacuum cleaner
(1)
Remove the flashlight erasure unit

from the digitizer. For the
procedure refer to chapter 3.5 of
the service manual.
Figure 17: Erasure unit fan
(2)
Unscrew six screws (slotted-head

screwdriver).
(3)
Lift off the side plate which bears

the two fans.
Figure 18: Side plate
(4)

to the plugs.
Figure 19: Plugs

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 19
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
(5)
Unplug K306, K204, K107 and K101 on the board.
(6)
Loosen six screws (slotted-head

screwdriver). See Figure 20:
Side plate.
(7)
Lift off the side plate.
(8)

to the plugs.
Figure 20: Side plate
(9)
Unplug K305 on board and fiberoptic cables on the side plate.
Figure 21: Cables
(10)
Figure 22: Front glass
(11)
Check for visible damage or defects in the flashlight erasure unit fan.
(12)
Dismount KG2-Filter and clean it (soft brush).
(13)
Dismount rear cover of erasure unit (as to remove the KG2-Filter) and clean
the inside of the erasure unit.
(14)
Remount the flashlight erasure unit into the digitizer.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 20
DD+DIS395.06E
3.7
Maintenance
Cleaning of the Scan Head

INSTRUCTION:
Scan head must be taken out for cleaning.
Blow the scan head with canned air according the following instruction:
CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Canned air with nozzle to be able to blow the air into small gaps
Allen key (2,5 mm)
(1)
Ensure that the scan head is in <Scan head Access Position> and
dismount it from the digitizer (for the procedure refer to chapter 3.5 in the
service manual).
(2)
Place scan head with one end on a clean and plane surface and hold the
other end with your hand so it can not topple down (see Figure 23).
(3)
Clean the whole scan head with canned air.
(4)
Clean the optical elements (A) on the whole length of the scan head with
canned air.
(5)
Clean the CCD elements (B) with canned air.
(6)
Clean the gap (C) under the optical elements on the whole length of the scan
head with canned air.
(7)
Inspect visually for proper cleaning and repeat if necessary.
(8)
Mount scan head (for the procedure refer to chapter 3.5 in the service
manual).

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 21
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
A
Figure 23

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 22
DD+DIS395.06E
3.8
Maintenance
Replacing the Segment Filters

REQUIRED TOOL:
Screw driver medium size
CAUTION:
(1) Unscrew the old segment filter with the screw driver.
Be careful not to damage the IP platform.
(2) Screw the new segment filter into the socket.
(3) Repeat this procedure with all segment filters (11 filters).
Figure 24

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 23
DD+DIS395.06E
3.9
Maintenance
Replacing the Filter on Vacuum Distribution Plate

REQUIRED TOOLS:
Socket wrench or open-end wrench, 10 mm
Open end wrench, 7 mm
Allen key (3 mm)
(1) Loosen the IP handling board and lift it up to get free access to the Vacuum
Distribution Plate (for the procedure, refer to chapter 3.5 of the service manual).
(2) Pull the hose from the filter housing (see white circle in Figure 25)
Figure 25
(3) Unscrew the filter housing with a socket wrench and an open-end wrench.
Be careful that the lower part of the filter housing remains in the socket.
Figure 26

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 24
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
(4) Remove the micro filter as shown in Figure 27.
Figure 27
(5) Insert a new micro filter.

(6) Reinstall the assembly and attach the hose to the filter housing.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 25
DD+DIS395.06E
3.10
Maintenance
Replacing the Filter of the Main Fan

REQUIRED TOOL:
Socket wrench, 7 mm
NOTE:
Mind the airflow direction (from outside to inside) of the air filter
(see symbols on the side of the air filter).
(1) Vacuum-clean the filter before removing it to prevent from dirt falling
into the digitizer.
(2) Loosen four hexagon nuts.
(3) Turn out the frame of the air filter.
(4) Exchange the air filter.
Figure 28
(5) Remount the filter to the housing.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 26
DD+DIS395.06E
3.11
Maintenance
Remount the DX-S Components

NOTE:
After maintenance install the DX-S components in reverse order.
3.12
Cassette Maintenance
REQUIRED MATERIAL:
Visual
Check
Curix screen cleaner
Check the following items of the cassette:
Outside condition
Locking
Obvious damage due to drop of cassette
NOTE:
If alcohols are used, do not drown the cassette. First moisten the cloth with the
cleaner and wipe off the cassette.
Cleaning
(1)
Preferably clean only with a wet cloth (water, soap).
(2)
For heavy spots, use Curix screen cleaner.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 27
DD+DIS395.06E
3.13
Maintenance
Image Plate Maintenance (if required)

NOTE:
The customer is asked to clean each image plate four times a year.
Cleaning is not part of normal maintenance. Service cleans the IPs only if required,
e.g. evaluation of images indicates dust on the IP.
CAUTION:
The needle image plate (NIP) is fragile and valuable:
Risk of damage.
WARNING:
If you drop a cassette, the needle image plate (NIP) may be
damaged and cause severe damage in the digitizer.
Always check the detector (cassette with IP) thoroughly after it
has been dropped.
REQUIRED MATERIAL:
CR Phosphor IP Cleaner 2 P
REQUIRED TOOL:
Small blunt tool (not sharp-edged)
for opening DX-S cassettes.
This tool is delivered with the
shipped DX-S cassette.
Figure 29

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 28
DD+DIS395.06E
(1)
(2)
(3)
Maintenance
Press the lock mechanism (1) in

cutout of cassette with a blunt tool
(not sharp-edged).
Open shutter (A) carefully with
both thumbs, so the IP cannot be
scratched by the shutter.
Take out the IP very cautiously
and make sure that it is not
scratched by the shutter (B).
A
2
pressure
pressure
even surface
even surface
Figure 30
(4)
Slide out the image plate on an even surface, e. g. a desk.

The image plate must lie flat on the surface (see Figure 30).
(5)
Check visually if there are scratches on the surface.
(6)
Cleaning: Use CR Phosphor IP Cleaner 2 P.

Use a moistened, soft lint-free cloth.
The surface will be dry again after approximately 5 minutes, the IP can then be

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 29
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
Maintenance Points - Power on
4.1
Switch on the DX-S and the Control PC

ACTION:
After maintenance put the DX-S and the Control PC into operation again.
4.2

ACTION:
Go to: Service Client Endurance Run and carry out five test cycles with
each format of the cassettes
NOTE:
Check the last 20 to 40 images on the control PC, to see if artifacts or other image
quality problems occur.
4.3
Calibrate all Formats

ACTION:
Perform a focus calibration and a scan line calibration. For the procedure refer to
chapter 3.6 of the service manual (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NOTE:
In case the scan head cant be cleaned satisfyingly, contact the Regional Support
Network (RSN) / for external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 30
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
4.4
4.4.1
Exposing a Flatfield
(1)
Place a cassette of the biggest format used at the customer site

in line to the X-ray tube, see Figure 31.
Rotating
Anode
x-ray tube
Cathode
Not OK
OK
Figure 31
(2)

NOTE:
1.5 mm Cu filter (order number *: CM+9 5155 1015 2) to obtain a
dose of 10 Gy:
12 mAs
75 kVp
Large focus

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 31
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
(3)
(4)
(5)
Identify the cassette on the NX workstation with the following parameters:

Exam Group:
System Diagnosis
Exposure Type:
Flat Field
Detector Sensitivity: 200
Figure 32
4.4.2
Importing the Limit Pattern (optional)

NOTE:
In case you ordered the limit pattern CD, you can perform the following steps,
otherwise continue with step 4.4.3.
The limit pattern represents the lowest acceptable image quality in slow scan and fast
scan direction.
The ''Limit Pattern CD'' can be ordered with order number*: CM+9 5160 9120 0

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 32
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
(1)
Insert the software CD ROM of the digitizer into the CD ROM Drive.
(2)
On the NX workstation select the Main Menu.
(3)
Select <Import images>.
(4)
Browse to the CD ROM drive.
(5)
Select folder <SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS-Flat Field- >.
(6)
Select <OK>.
(7)
Wait till the image is imported (approximately 30 seconds).
(8)
Select the <Examination> menu.
(9)
Print the image or send it to the archive (depending on what is available).
IMPORTANT:
On the NX workstation the image is displayed rotated to portrait.
Definitions
Evaluating a Flatfield
Slow scan direction
represents the movement of the scan head
on the scan head carrier.
Fast scan direction
Slow scan direction
4.4.3
Fast scan direction

Figure 33
(1)
Inspect the scanned image for homogeneity. If there are no lines visible,
(see Figure 33), the image quality is acceptable.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 33
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
IMPORTANT:
If you use a FLFS cassette for flatfield exposure, the image will be slightly darker in the
upper and lower image area where the backscatter protection is removed
(approximately 1 cm each). These darker zones also have to be used for image quality
evaluation in slow scan and fast scan direction.
Flatfield with Genrad Cassette
Flatfield with FLFS Cassette
Effect exaggerated
Genrad Cassette
HD5.0
FLFS Cassette
Backscatter
Protection
HD5.0 FLFS
10 mm
10 mm
FLFS
Figure 34
(2) If some lines are visible:

Either compare the flatfield with the sketches of
o Calibration Lines
o Banding
o Dust
Or compare the flatfield with the limit pattern (refer to section 4.4.2 for details).
NOTE:
Following image distortions should not be considered as reference image information:
White spots
Scratches

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 34
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
4.4.3.1
Calibration Lines
Without
"Limit
Pattern"
Sharp white lines in slow scan

direction showing the transition lines
from one CCD element to the other.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Figure 35
With
"Limit
Pattern"
Find the Region of Interest (ROI)

(marked with green rectangles,
showing the typical limit pattern for
"calibration lines").
Figure 36
If you find sharp white lines in slow scan direction or the typical limit pattern for
"calibration lines":
(1)
(2)
Expose another flatfield and check the image quality again.
NOTE:
If there are unacceptable image flaws, please contact the
Regional Support Network (RSN) / for external partners: Please contact your local
Agfa partner.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 35
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance
4.4.3.2
Banding
Without
"Limit
Pattern"
Blurred white lines parallel to fastscan direction on the flatfield.

This can happen due to
inhomogeneities in the slow-scan
process. (e.g. stepper motors, air
bearings, steel ropes, etc.)
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Figure 37
With
"Limit
Pattern"
Find the Region of Interest (ROI)

(marked with red rectangles, showing
the typical limit pattern for "banding").
Figure 38
If you find stripes parallel to fast scan direction or the typical limit pattern for "banding":
(1)
(2)
Check that during scanning no vibration has occurred on the device.
NOTE:
(RSN) / for external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 36
DD+DIS395.06E
4.4.3.3
Maintenance
Dust
(In the example in Figure 39 the dust lines have
been pointed out for a better illustration.
Flatfield (detail)
Diagnostic Image
Figure 39
(1)

If it is, clean scan head according to section 3.7.
(2)
Expose another flat field and check the image quality.
NOTE:
(RSN) / for external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 37
DD+DIS395.06E
4.5
Maintenance
Creating a Backup CD
Create a backup CD once a year.
(1) Run the Backup task in the DX-S Service Client.
(2) Store the file in Backup ( on drive D:) or burn it on CD.
Completing Maintenance
(1) Confirm the maintenance by signing the Maintenance Checklist.
(2) Inform the customer about what was done during the maintenance and which
repairs need to be done in next future.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 38
Maintenance
Checklist
DD+DIS395.06E
Maintenance Checklist
Work Instruction for order no.
SN
Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:

Once a year or every 25 000 cycles
Maintenance, Step by Step

Diagnostics
Done
Ask customer about problems.

Read out the infocounters, analyze them and clear them
afterwards.
Check the e-labels.
Inside
Release compressed air.

Check visually the overall condition.
Vacuum the inside and wipe it.
Erasure Unit
- Clean LED erasure unit.

- Clean Flashlight erasure unit: Clean fan.
Scan Head
Clean optical elements with canned air.
IP-platform
Replace the filters.
Vacuum
Distribution Plate
Replace the filter.
Frame
Replace filter of main fan.
Cassettes
Check for outside condition, locking.

Check for obvious damage due to drop of cassette.
Image Plates
Check if there are scratches on the surface.

Cleaning only if required in case of image artifacts
resulting from dust.

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 39
Maintenance
Checklist
DD+DIS395.06E
Checking the Image Quality

General
Done
Carry out test cycles, five with each format.

Check the last 20 to 40 images on the control PC.
Print flatfield sample provided by the digitizer.
Expose a flatfield.
Evaluate the flatfield and carry out respective actions.
Completion of the maintenance

General
Done
Create a Backup CD.

Confirm the maintenance.
Inform the customer about maintenance and which
repairs are necessary.
Remarks:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.............................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician
.........................................................
Customer

08-2009
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 9 / 40
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 10
Service Bulletins
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160
Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:
DX-S Service Bulletin


service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS014.05E
Service Bulletins
intentionally left blank

02-2008
DX-S
Chapter 6 / 2
HEALTHCARE
Chapter 11
Imaging Services
DX-S
Type 5160

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v07
DD+DIS387.06E
Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 Mnchen
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1)

Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task
on the equipment.
(2)
on the product.
NOTE:

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 2
DD+DIS387.06E

This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be
carried out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
Construction planning data
Technical connection and performance data
Safety instructions, listing of certificates
Document History
Edition.
Revision
Release
Date
Changes
2.3
04-2010
Added section 1, Referenced Documents.

Added Limit Pattern CD in section 6.1.
Renamed NX to NX Workstation in sections 5.3, 6.2,
6.3 and 9.1.1.
Document
Title
For a list of documents refer to section 1.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 3
DD+DIS387.06E
LIST OF CONTENTS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS........................................................................................................8
3.1
General Safety Instructions for the DX-S Digitizer (without Isolation Transformer) .................8
3.2

(including Isolation Transformer) ..............................................................................................8
SAFETY COMPLIANCE ...........................................................................................................9

4.1
Safety Compliance DX-S ..........................................................................................................9
4.2
Safety Compliance DX-S All in One Systems.........................................................................10
SYSTEM OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................10
5.1
System Overview DX-S All in One Systems...........................................................................11
5.2
System Overview DX-S System as separate Components....................................................12
5.3
DX-S System Components .....................................................................................................13
5.4
Use within Patient Environment ..............................................................................................16
SCOPE OF DELIVERY ..........................................................................................................17

6.1
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S (Type 5160/100) ...................................................................17
6.2
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)...................................................18
6.3
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)..................................18
DIMENSIONS AND TRANSPORT .........................................................................................19

7.1
Required Free Space for DX-S Standalone............................................................................19
7.2
Required Free Space for DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)...................................................20
7.3
Required Free Space for DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)..................................21
7.4
Machine Dimensions of DX-S Digitizer (Type 5160/100) .......................................................22
7.5
Machine Dimensions of DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100).....................................................23
7.6
Machine Dimensions of DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)....................................24
7.7
Required Space for Installation of Cut Down All in One .........................................................25
7.8
Transport Data for DX-S .........................................................................................................26
7.9
Transport Data for DX-S All in One System ...........................................................................27

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 4
DD+DIS387.06E
CLIMATIC AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS..............................................................................28
CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................................................29
10
9.1
Mains Cables for DX-S System ..............................................................................................29
9.1.1
Cables for Isolation Transformer.............................................................................................29
9.1.2
Cables for the DX-S Digitizer ..................................................................................................30
9.1.3
Cables for the Uninterruptible Power Supply..........................................................................30
9.2
Grounding Cable Connection..................................................................................................31
9.3
FireWire...................................................................................................................................31
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................31
10.1
Type Identification...................................................................................................................31
10.2
Electrical Specification of DX-S All in One System.................................................................32
10.3
Electrical Specifications of DX-S.............................................................................................32
10.4
Cassette Return Time .............................................................................................................32
10.4.1
Emissions................................................................................................................................32
10.5
Specifications of Isolation Transformer...................................................................................33
10.6
Specifications of Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).............................................................33
11
REMOTE ACCESS.................................................................................................................33
12
INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST..............................................................................35

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 5
DD+DIS387.06E
NOTE:
This document describes the installation planning of:
DX-S System configuration as separate components (without All in One cart)
For the installation planning of the NX workstation Software, please refer to the relevant
Service Documentation. See section 1.
The following documents are referenced in this chapter.
Document
Hyperlink
DX-S Service Manual, Chapter 1, Controls and

Connections
NX 1.0 Service Manual, Chapter 3,

NX 2.0 Service Manual, Chapter 3,

NX 2008 Service Manual, Chapter 3,

NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000, Service Manual, Chapter 3,

NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200, Service Manual, Chapter 3,


04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 6
DD+DIS387.06E
Product Description
The DX-S is a digitizer for image plates retaining latent X-ray images. It has been
developed by Agfa.
The DX-S accepts one cassette containing one image plate at a time.
The DX-S:
Locks the cassette containing the image plate in the cassette slot.
Removes the image plate from the cassette.
Scans the image plate.
Converts the information of the latent image to digital data.
Transmits the image data to the preview station.
Erases the image plate and re-inserts it into the cassette.
Gives the image plate ID data the status 'erased'.
Unlocks the cassette.
Transmits the digital image data to an image processing station (destination).
The DX-S permits assigning the status emergency to an image. An emergency image
will be given priority by the image processing station.
The DX-S permits re-erasing an image plate before re-using it. In specific cases, this
is necessary to prevent ghost images caused by previous exposures or stray radiation
from interfering with the image of interest.
With the dedicated ID station of the DX-S, the following features are available:
Quickly identifying cassettes without the need for an ID Tablet
Reading the identification data of a cassette

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 7
DD+DIS387.06E
Safety Instructions
3.1

Transformer)
equipment. Therefore all DX-S components must be placed outside a radius of:
1.5 m / 5 ft (IEC)
1.83 m / 6 ft (UL)
around the patient (according to the local valid regulation).
Figure 1
IMPORTANT:
(see Figure 1) an isolation transformer has to be used according to IEC60601-1-1 standard.
All components must be connected to this isolation transformer, which guarantees the
demanded additional separation. Such an isolation transformer is available as an option by
Agfa. For specification of the transformer refer to section 10.5.
3.2

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 8
DD+DIS387.06E
Safety Compliance
4.1
Safety Compliance DX-S
DX-S has been designed in accordance with the MEDDEV Guidelines relating to the
application of Medical Devices and have been tested as part of the conformity
assessment procedures required by 93/42/EEC MDD (European Council Directive
93/42/EEC on Medical Devices).
DX-S has been designed in accordance with the IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical
electrical equipment -Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance.
DX-S complies with:
The general safety regulations:
IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 + A2:1995
IEC 601-1-1:2000 / EN 60601-1-1:2001
IEC 60601-1-2: 2001 / EN 60601-1-2:2001
UL 60601-1:2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 601.1
ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices - Application of risk management to

medical devices
The laser safety regulations:
IEC 60825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 + A11:1996 + A2:2001

DHHS/FDA 21 CFR, Parts 1040.10 and 1040.11
EN 540: 1993
EN 980: 1996
EN 1041: 1998
ISO 18906: 2000
EN ISO 13485: 2000
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content

and presentation
DX-S is in compliance with the EG regulation 93/42/EEC Directive (Medical Device).

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 9
DD+DIS387.06E
4.2
Safety Compliance DX-S All in One Systems

DX-S All in One complies with:
The general safety regulations EN 60950, EN 60601-1-2, and UL 60950
CSA C22.2 No. 60950
The radio interference regulations EN 55022:1997, Class A and FCC 47, Part 15,
Subchapter B, Class A
The safety compliance is only guaranteed by using equipment supplied by Agfa.

Using other equipment will void the safety compliance.
In combination with a DX-S the isolating transformer assures that the digitizer still
complies with EN 60601-1-1 medical, electrical systems.
For HF-Emission and immunity, see user manual of the individual components.
System Overview
It is possible to order and install the DX-S as:
DX-S All in One System (Type 5163/100)
DX-S Cut Down All in One System (Type 5163/105)
DX-S System as separate components (without All in One cart)

For details of mandatory or optional components, refer to section 5.3.
For the DX-S System as separate components three configurations are possible.
For details refer to Chapter 1 of the DX-S Service Documentation.
NOTE:
The DX-S Digitizer is intended to:
Operate with the DX-S All in One or the DX-S Cut Down All in One
Operate without All in One cart in the separate components configuration

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 10
DD+DIS387.06E
5.1
System Overview DX-S All in One Systems

Archive
Station
DX-S
All in One
Type 5163/100
DX-S Cut Down

All in One
Type 5163/105
Printer
Figure 2
Figure 2 shows the integration of the DX-S All in One or the DX-S Cut Down All in One
in a hospital network.
To enter the demographic data, Fast ID mode (Direct ID mode) must be activated on
the DX-S and on the Control PC. Usage of an ID tablet is not supported.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 11
DD+DIS387.06E
5.2
System Overview DX-S System as separate Components
Isolation
Transformer
Monitor
UPS
Isolation
Transformer
DX-S
NX
Monitor
DX-S
Monitor
NX
DX-S
NX
Figure 3: Possible configurations DX-S System as separate components
Figure 3 shows the three possible configurations of the DX-S System

as separate components.
IMPORTANT:
It depends on the situation in the hospital and the order of the customer, whether
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) or an isolation transformer is used in the
separate components configuration.
If a UPS is part of the configuration, an isolation transformer is a mandatory

component. See section 5.3.
When the DX-S is used within the patient environment an isolation transformer
must be used to guarantee the demanded additional separation.
See section 5.4.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 12
DD+DIS387.06E
5.3
DX-S System Components

Following table provides an overview of mandatory and optional components
when planning the installation of the DX-S All in One System (Type 5163/100
or Type 5163/105) or the DX-S System as separate components.
Item
Order
Number
DX-S
All in One
System
DX-S System
as separate Components
DX-S Digitizer
ERYE4
Mandatory
Mandatory
DX-S All in One

Cart
ERO28
Mandatory
Not applicable
DX-S Cut Down

All in One Cart
E2PVF
Optional,
alternative
to DX-S All
in One Cart
Not applicable
DX-S UPS
Powerware 5125
230 V Version
ERO16
Mandatory
Optional
IMPORTANT:
UPS can only be ordered
and used if coupled with
order.
NX
Workstation
(= Control PC)
E2PA7
Mandatory
Mandatory
CR HD 5.0
Detector
24 x 30 cm
ERMQC
Mandatory
(2 pieces)
Mandatory
(2 pieces)

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 13
DD+DIS387.06E
Item
Order
Number
DX-S
All in One
System
DX-S System
as separate Components
CR HD 5.0 Detector
35 x 43 cm
ERMO7
Mandatory
(2 pieces)
Mandatory
(2 pieces)
CR HD 5.0 Detector
15 x 30 cm
ERMSG
Optional
Optional
CR HD 5.0 Detector
18 x 24 cm
ERMRE
Optional
Optional
EZJT3
Mandatory,
already
included in
ABC-Code
ERO28 and
E2PVF.
Optional
(for FLFS a minimum

of 2 detec-tors are
necessary,
recommen-ded are 3)
IMPORTANT:
Only mandatory in
case
DX-S is operated
within patient
environment closer to
1.5 meters (5 feet)
and also mandatory if
an UPS is used.
CR Touch Monitor
EMWAF
Mandatory
Mandatory
In case:
X-Ray shielding to
protect from scatter
radiation
EQBD5
Optional
Optional

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 14
DD+DIS387.06E
In case Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) is an intended application, the NX FLFS DX-S
License (ABC code: ES9EL) and following additional hardware components can be
ordered optionally:
Item
Order
Number
Remark
CR Full body cassette holder
EAUGV
Mandatory for FLFS application

Note: The CR Planfeld Grid is included in the
CR Full Body Cassette Holder delivery.
The CR Planfeld grid is required by software for
proper stitching calculations.
CR Easylift
EJ8V8
Optional for FLFS application
Antiscatter Grid
ECJ8M
Optional for FLFS application
CR HD5.0 FLFS DETECTOR

35 x 43 cm
E1WDZ
Optional for DX-S Detector for both FLFS and

GenRad applications
CR HD5.0 FLFS CASSETTE

35 x 43 cm
E1WE2
Optional DX-S Cassette for both FLFS and

GenRad applications
NOTE:
For the unlikely case that at the customer site only HD 5.0 FLFS detectors are present
for calibration, make sure that at least two cassettes with the biggest format are
available to have backscatter protection.
To cover reduced backscatter protection at the borders of the 35 cm cassette,
the detector has to be placed on two other cassettes (HD 5.0 or MD 4.0 type).
For details see Calibration Procedure in Chapter 3.6 of this Service Manual.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 15
DD+DIS387.06E
5.4
Use within Patient Environment

IMPORTANT:
For the DX-S All in One and DX-S Cut Down All in One Systems, the isolation
transformer and UPS are always mandatory parts of the delivery.
When the DX-S System as separate components is used within the patient
environment (closer to 1.5 meters = 5 feet) an isolation transformer (ABC code:
EZJT3) must be used to guarantee the demanded additional separation.
Configuration
Within Patient
Environment
Isolation
Transformer
UPS
Yes
Mandatory in case
DX-S is operated
within patient
environment closer to
1.5 meters (5 feet).
No
Optional
UPS can only be

ordered and used in
the separate
components
installation if coupled
with isolation
transformer order.
DX-S System
as separate
Components
R = 1.5 m (1.83 m*)
Patient environment
h= 2.5 m
(2.29 m*)
Patient environment
Without UPS
With UPS
Wall Outlet
Wall Outlet
Monitor
UPS
NX
DX-S
Monitor
NX
DX-S
Figure 4

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 16
DD+DIS387.06E
Scope of Delivery
6.1
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S (Type 5160/100)

Pieces
Description
DX-S digitizer, without scan head
Scan head, separately in a box
Enclosure with installation procedure
Certificates
Form: Installation report
FireWire cable (IEEE 1394), 4.5 m (not used in All in One)
Mains cables (not used in All in One)
CD with software for DX-S
CD with the user manual
Limit Pattern CD
NOTE:
Depending on the customers selection, additional components can be ordered for the
DX-S system configuration as separate components.
For an overview of available components, refer to section 5.3, DX-S System Components.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 17
DD+DIS387.06E
6.2
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
Pieces
6.3
Description
NX Workstation (= Control PC) with keyboard, mouse, and documentation,

NX software installed
LCD flat Monitor
Network cable
All in One cart
Accessories box with two mains cables and technical documentation
Scope of Delivery for the DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
Pieces
Description
NX Workstation (= Control PC) with keyboard, mouse, and documentation,

NX software installed
LCD flat Monitor
Network cable
Cut Down All in One cart (Type 5163/105)
Accessories box with two mains cables and technical documentation,

additionally extension cables for keyboard, mouse and monitor (2)

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 18
DD+DIS387.06E
Dimensions and Transport
7.1
Required Free Space for DX-S Standalone
fo
rs
er
vi
ce
Figure 5
All dimensions are in cm (inch).

Recommended free space for air ventilation, power, and
FireWire connection.
Recommended free space for service, repair, and maintenance.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 19
DD+DIS387.06E
7.2
Required Free Space for DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
5 (2")
76,08 (30")
71 (28")
71 150
(28")(60")
150 (60")
Figure 6


04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 20
DD+DIS387.06E
7.3
Required Free Space for DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
fo
rs
er
vi
ce
Figure 7


04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 21
DD+DIS387.06E
7.4
Machine Dimensions of DX-S Digitizer (Type 5160/100)
Figure 8

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 22
DD+DIS387.06E
7.5
Machine Dimensions of DX-S All in One (Type 5163/100)
Figure 9

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 23
DD+DIS387.06E
Machine Dimensions of DX-S Cut Down All in One (Type 5163/105)
101 (39,8)
7.6
639 (251,6)
27 (10,6)
Figure 10

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 24
DD+DIS387.06E
7.7
Required Space for Installation of Cut Down All in One

IMPORTANT:
To place the unpacked Digitizer on the Cut Down cart, at least 310 x 80 cm
(124" x 32") space is required at the installation site. If not enough space is available
at the place of destination, the digitizer should be placed on the Cut Down cart in the
hall or another room with sufficient space.
0,8 m
3,1
0m
Figure 11

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 25
DD+DIS387.06E
7.8
Transport Data for DX-S

NOTE:
The climatic data apply to the packed DX-S.
If the machine was exposed to extreme temperature or humidity conditions during
transport, it needs at least one day to acclimatize at the installation location prior
to installation.
Temperature:
-25C (-13F) for up to 72 hours

+55C (131F) for up to 96 hours
Relative Humidity:
15% to 90%
It must be possible to transport the

digitizer through all hallways and doors
up to the installation site.
Minimum door width:
Height x Width x Depth of Digitizer:
82 cm x 33 cm x 75 cm
48 cm (19")
(33" x 13" x 30")

Weight of digitizer without Package:
Approximately 105 kg
Height x Width x Depth of

Delivery Package:
130 cm x 47 cm x 89 cm
Weight of Digitizer with Package:
Minimum Space to remove the Digitizer

off the Pallet:
200 cm x 450 cm
79" x 178"
(52" x 19" x 36")
CAUTION:
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device!
NOTE:
Once the DX-S is unpacked, it can be moved to the installation site on four mounted
rollers. To move the unpacked machine, release brakes at the rollers.
After moving the machine to the installation site, set brakes again.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 26
DD+DIS387.06E
7.9
Transport Data for DX-S All in One System

NOTE:
The climatic data apply to the packed DX-S All in One System.
to installation.
Temperature:
-25C (-13F) for up to 72 hours

+55C (131F) for up to 96 hours
Relative Humidity:
15% to 90%
Specification
DX-S All in One

(Type 5163/100)
It must be possible to transport Minimum door width:

the device through all hallways
80 cm (31.5")
and doors up to the installation
site.
Height x Width x Depth of
Delivery Package:
DX-S Cut Down All in

One (Type 5163/105)
Minimum door width:
80 cm (31.5")
147 cm x 80 cm x 97 cm 120 cm x 80 cm x 97 cm
(58" x 31.5" x 38")
(47" x 31.5" x 38")
Weight, completely configured: Approximately 250 kg
Minimum Space to remove the

Device off the Pallet:
200 cm x 450 cm
(79" x 178")
200 cm x 450 cm
(79" x 178")
CAUTION:
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device!
NOTE:
Once the DX-S All in One or DX-S Cut Down All in One is unpacked, it can be moved to
the installation site on four mounted rollers. To move the unpacked device, release
brakes at the rollers.
After moving the machine to the installation site, set brakes again.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 27
DD+DIS387.06E
Climatic and Ambient Conditions

NOTE:
All specifications in this section apply to the unpacked DX-S or
DX-S All in One system.
Temperature and Humidity

Ambient Temperature:
Minimal: 15C (59F)

Maximal: 30C (86F)
Best: 20C (68F)
Rate of Temperature Change: Maximal 0.5C / minute (0.9F / minute)

Relative Humidity
at 25C (77F) Ambient
Temperature:
Minimal: 15%
Maximal: 80%
Best: 40% - 50%
Ambient Light
Light Tightness:
SALMIN is met at 2500 lux ambient light.
CAUTION:
Light of high intensity may intrude in the digitizer.
Image quality may be decreased.
DX-S and All in One must not be operated in direct sunlight! No influence on image
quality is guaranteed if operated in ambient light of max. 2500 Lux.
Floor Conditions
Horizontal Alignment:
DX-S and DX-S All in One Systems work without

leveling. Horizontal alignment is not required.
Nevertheless, the device should be run preferably in
a horizontal position.
Take care that the device can not tilt at the
installation site.
Take care that the brakes are released before
moving the device and are set again after reaching
the installation site.
Magnetic Fields
Maximal permissible Magnetic According to EN 61000-4-8: Level 5
Field in the Room:

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 28
DD+DIS387.06E
Connections
9.1
Mains Cables for DX-S System
WARNING:
as defined by IEC 60601.
Confirm that both, NX workstation and digitizer are connected to the same
IMPORTANT:
Check during installation planning the cable situation.
If other country-specific cables than the below mentioned are required at installation
site, obtain these cables locally before beginning with the installation.
If a country-specific mains cable is used, it must be conform to the electrical
specifications of the DX-S or DX-S All in One (see section 10.2 and 10.3) and the
country-specific regulations.
Refer also to Chapter 1, Controls, Connections and Setup Procedures, of this
Service Documenation when planning the installation.
The following mains cables are included in the delivery of the components.
9.1.1
Cables for Isolation Transformer

CAUTION:
When an isolation transformer is used in USA, a wall outlet other than
NEMA 5-20R provides a wrong voltage.
As a consequence, the device may be damaged.
Use a NEMA 5-20P mains cable for All in One mains connection and set input voltage
at the isolation transformer according to country-specific mains voltage.
IMPORTANT:
The mains cable beetween isolation transformer and wall outlet needs on one end the
connector IEC320/C19 for connection to the isolation transformer socket and on the
other end the country-specific mains connector.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 29
DD+DIS387.06E
Isolation transformer (ABC code EZJT3)

Euro Version
1 x Schuco/IEC320/C19, cable length = 3 m (118)
US Version
1 x 5-20P IEC320/C19, cable length = 3 m (118)
4 x interconnection cables for connection between DX-S, NX Workstation and monitor

to UPS or isolation transformer, length of each cable = 1.5 m (59),
Connector type IEC320/C13 and IEC320/C14G
9.1.2
Cables for the DX-S Digitizer

Euro Version
1x three-conductor I-2500-S
US Version
1 x 5-15P IEC320/C13
NOTE:
Only for DX-S All in One Systems:
A mains cable for the DX-S is pre-cabled in the DX-S All in One or the DX-S Cut Down
All in One cart.
Only for the DX-S System as separate components:
A country-specific multiple socket is not part of the delivery and has to be obtained
locally.
Only for DX-S Cut Down All in One:
Only the DX-S Cut Down All in One is delivered with extension cables for
mouse, keyboard and monitor (2 pieces) with a length of 2 m (78).
9.1.3
Cables for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
UPS Powerware 5125 2200i

Euro Version
1 x mains cable with plug IEC320/E and plug IEC 320/C13

(for connection between UPS and isolation transformer)
Pre-installation of a wall outlet which complies with the electrical specifications of the
DX-S or DX-S All in One (see section 10.2 and 10.3) might be necessary.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 30
DD+DIS387.06E
9.2
Grounding Cable Connection

The DX-S provides a plug for an additional grounding connection.
9.3
FireWire
A FireWire (IEEE 1394) cable connects the DX-S to the Control PC.
In the DX-S All in One or the DX-S Cut Down All in One cart a FireWire cable for the
DX-S is pre-cabled.
Another FireWire (IEEE 1394) cable (4.5 m length) is in scope of the DX-S Digitizer.
When installing the DX-S All in One Systems, this cable is not necessary.
It is only required for the DX-S System as separate components.
WARNING:
Using a FireWire cable > 4.5 m may lead to unstable or no communication between
digitizer and NX workstation: Retakes possible.
Do not use a FireWire cable between digitizer and NX with a length > 4.5 m or > 15 ft
respectively.
10
Specifications
10.1
Type Identification
Device
Type
DX-S
5160
DX-S All in One
5163/100
5163/105

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 31
DD+DIS387.06E
10.2
Electrical Specification of DX-S All in One System

230 V AC or 115 V AC, selectable
Power Input
50 Hz 60 Hz
Grounded
With 230 V AC: maximal 16 A
Fuse Protection
10.3
10.4
Electrical Specifications of DX-S

Power Input
100 V AC 240 V AC (auto-ranging)

50 Hz 60 Hz
Grounded
Mains Fuse Protection

Cassette Return Time

Time between Entry of Cassette
and Return of erased Cassette
10.4.1
Approximately 30 seconds for a cassette of

size 35 cm x 43 cm
Emissions
Maximal Noise Level
During scanning: 65 dB (A)

Stand-by mode / idle: 45 dB (A)

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 32
DD+DIS387.06E
10.5
10.6
Specifications of Isolation Transformer

Power Input
115 V AC / 14 A or 230 V AC / 7 A
50 Hz 60 Hz
Grounded
Power Output
115 V AC or 230 V AC
(230 V must be selected as the UPS has 230 V
AC power input)
Height x Width x Depth
22 cm x 20 cm x 18 cm
(8.7 x 7.9 x 7.1)
Mains Fuse Protection
Primary: 2 x 6.3 A, slow blow

Secondary: 2 x 6.3 A, slow blow
Specifications of Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)

WARNING:
Connect the equipment to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
11
Type
Powerware 5125 2200i
Height x Width x Depth
25 cm x 20.5 cm x 49.3 cm
(9.8 x 8.1 x 19.4)
Weight
31.0 kg
Power Input / Output
230 V AC
Power Rating
2200 VA / 1600 W
Input Connection
IEC-320-10A, inlet
Output Receptacles
(9) IEC-320-10A (C13)
Remote Access
Remote access to the digitizer is only possible via the Control PC. For this, remote
access must be activated at the Control PC.

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 33
DD+DIS387.06E

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 34
Checklist
DD+DIS387.06E
12
Installation Planning Checklist

In order to avoid any unnecessary delays during the installation and the machine
Start-up, the following points of the checklist below should be carried out prior to the
installation.
REQUIRED TIME:
2 hours
Check and discuss all the required measures for the installation by means of
this checklist.
Hand over the filled checklist to your local AGFA representative.
Customer:
Department:
System
Components:
Desired
Installation Date:
Signature:
Remarks:

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 35
Checklist
DD+DIS387.06E
Subject
Prepare
Safety Instructions
Installation Site
OK
Not OK
Always read Generic Safety Directions document

and safety instructions within this document
before working on or with the machine for the first
time. Also mind safety instructions in chapter 3.1.
Is the final location for the device at the

customer's site defined?
Location: ..
Space for Service

Interventions
Space for
Installation
Is the minimum free space for service

interventions available at installation site?
150 cm x 200 cm (60" x 79")
Is the minimum free space for installation
available to move the digitizer onto cut down
cart at installation site?
310 cm x 80 cm (124" x 32")
___________ cm
___________ cm
Is a mains wall outlet available which complies

with the electrical specifications for
DX-S All in One System (section 10.2) or DX-S
(section 10.3)?
Check during installation planning the cable

situation!
One wall outlet approximately 30 cm from

Required external
Power Connections the floor.
Wall outlets are to be close to the machine.
Mains Connection
If other country-specific cables than the cables

mentioned in section 9.1 are required at
installation site, then obtain these cables locally
before beginning with the installation.
Is external fuse protection provided according to
country-specific conditions and
electrical specifications?
Network Connection Is Ethernet connection (twisted pair) prepared for

the Control PC?

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 36
Checklist
DD+DIS387.06E
Subject
Prepare
Transport Path
Is free space for taking the device off the pallet

defined?
DX-S and DX-S All in One System:
200 cm x 450 cm (79 x 178)
OK
Not OK
Are devices transported to the installation site,

unpacked and taken off the pallet?
Is an X-ray shield necessary to protect device

and image plates?
Cassettes for calibration procedures available?
Is technical service host / modem available?
Is phone line / VPN access available?
Is mains connection for technical service host /

modem available?
Place: .......................................................
..
Transport path:
Minimum door width
DX-S: 48 cm (19)
DX-S All in One System: 80 cm (31.5")
Way: ...................................................
.
.
X-ray Shielding
A lead glass shield is available from Agfa

(Order number EQBD5).
Full Leg Full Spine

In case of FLFS
application and only
HD5.0 FLFS Detectors
are used for FLFS and
Genrad application
Remote Access
End

04-2010
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 11 / 37
DD+DIS014.05E
Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12
List of Contents
1
Glossary ........................................................................................1

eq_12_glossary_e_template_v01
11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 12 / I
DD+DIS014.05E
DX-S Glossary
Term
Short Description
Gy
Micro Gray x-ray dose

1 Gy= 0.87 x 10 2 J/kg
ADC
Agfa Diagnostic Center
ADC Stratus
R&D name for the product DX-S; may still appear in

some documents like service manuals, circuit
diagrams etc. or in software menus.
AE title
Application Entity
APIP
Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol
ASAP - Package
AGFA Scanner Access Package

Software that runs on the CR QS 3.0 workstation. It
handles all DX-S operations
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface (External Box to connect

to a network)
Auto QC2
Auto QC is a quality control device used for

acceptance procedures and quality control tests of
medical CR systems.
Auto QC can be used in the production of
CR systems, for Acceptance procedures of new
installations and for quality control procedures
performed by the customers.
Auto QC only supports the NX Processing Station.
AS
Archive Station
BOE
Begin Of Erasure
BOL
Begin Of Line; Sensor for exact positioning the scan

surface along the x-axis. A PIN diode is hit by the
laser beam before it reaches the image plate. The
Pin diode creates a digital signal, called begin of line
signal. The distance (time) between this signal and
the IP must be adjusted.
BOS
Begin Of Scan;
Browser
A program that provides an interface to the World

Wide Web, e.g. Netscape Navigator, Microsoft
Internet Explorer
Calibration
Procedure on CR to make a homogeneous

exposure look like one on film. Algorithm to
counterbalance irregularities in the scanner of CR.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 12 / 1
DD+DIS014.05E
Term
Short Description
CAN bus
Control Area Network bus; communication protocol

to interchange data between the connected
participants via only one medium bus system used
in DX-S
CAS
Clinical Application Specialist
CCD
Charge Coupled Device: An electronic memory that

can be charged by light. CCDs can hold a variable
charge. That is why they are used in cameras and
scanners to record variable shades of light. CCDs
are analog, not digital, and are made of a special
type of MOS transistor. Analog to digital (ADC)
converters quantify the variable charge into a
discrete number of colors.
CCM
Configuration and Customization Manager (Tool to

edit the configuration file adc.cpf)
CHM
Cassette Handling Module of DX-S
Collimation
Determination of the region in the image where the

interesting data is at. On that region the image
processing is applied.
Controller
Is connected ahead the laser recorder. The

controller is responsible for the image reception
from the diagnostic equipment, the image
processing, layout of the images on the film, and
image transmission to the machine.
CPF file
Customization Parameter File; file that contains

settings for all parameters that can be modified to
configure an CR System according to local needs.
CPU
Central Processing Unit. The computing part of a

PC, also known as the processor of a PC.
CR
Computed Radiography
CR 50.0
R&D name for the product DX-S; may still appear in

some documents like service manuals, circuit
diagrams etc. or in software menus.
CR Mammography
The CR Mammography Solution can be used in a

safe and effective way for Diagnostic
Mammography. Screening Mammography is not
included in the intended use.
Diagnostic Mammography is a radiographic
examination, performed to provide additional
information about patients who have signs and/or
symptoms of breast disease, radiographic findings
of concern, or in situations where direct supervision
of the imaging is deemed appropriate by the
interpreting physician.

Chapter 12 / 2
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
DD+DIS014.05E

Term
Short Description
CR Radiotherapy
The CR Radiotherapy Solution offers the possibility

of acquiring radiographic images in a radiotherapy
environment using CR technology.
The CR Radiotherapy Solution is a digital imaging
system for Simulation, Low Dose Portal Imaging
(Localization), High Dose Portal Imaging
(Verification) and Documentation by hardcopy
printing for radiotherapy.
CR QS 3.0
Image Processing Station formerly used with DX-S.

The successor of CR QS 3.0 is NX.
CU-Filter
Copper Filter, used for control of image quality.
DAC
Digital Analog Converter
Decomposition
The original image is being split up in a set of

bandpass-filtered images.
Detector
Combination of cassette and image plate
Diagnostic logger
Tool on CR to keep a lot of reduced images with the

corresponding image data on the HD.
DICOM
Digital Imaging and COmmunications in Medicine
Dose, x-ray dose
= kV x mA x sec see also Gy = Micro Gray
dosimeter
Device to measure x-ray dose
DQE
Detected Quantum Efficiency

The DQE is a measure of how much noise is added
by the imaging system to the quantum noise that is
present in the X-ray beam.
DR
Direct Radiography
DRA
Direct Remote Access

(external product name: AGFATEC LINK)
Dynamic Range
Exposure range in which CR can get usable image

data.
DX-S
Product name of the digitizer.
EOE
End Of Erasure
Ethernet
Popular Local Area Network connection specified by

the IEEE 802.3 standard. Ethernet uses a bus
topology to interchange data between the
connected participants.
FireWire
A high-speed serial bus that allows for the

connection of up to 63 devices. Also known as the
IEEE 1394 standard, the i.Link connector and the
High Performance Serial Bus (HPSB), the original
spec calls for 100, 200 and 400 Mbits/sec transfer
rates. IEEE 1394b provides 800, 1600 and 3200
Mbits/sec speeds.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 12 / 3
DD+DIS014.05E
Term
Short Description
Focus Calibration
Calibration process carried out after the installation

of the scan head in order to obtain the optimum
distance between IP and scan head.
FSE
Field Service Engineer
FTP
File Transfer Protocol.

A protocol used to transfer files in the Internet, for
example, after developing the HTML pages for a
Web site on a local machine, they are typically
uploaded to the Web server using FTP.
Gain Factor
Because of differences in the CCD elements a

correction factor has to be applied in order to obtain
a homogenous flatfield. This gain factor is
calculated during the scan line calibration and
applied in every scan cycle..
GenRad
General Radiology
Grid
A grid is used to reduce scattered radiation and to

increase sharpness.
GSC
Global Support Center
GUI
Graphical User Interface
HCP
Hard Copy Printer
HDD
Hard Disk Drive
Heel Effect
inhomogeneous exposure
HiRes
High Resolution: pixel size = 100 micrometer
HIS
Hospital Information System
Histogram
graphical display of the distribution of gray levels
I/O BUS
Input / Output BUS.

System consisting of a defined cable, cable
connection, and signal for the parallel transmission
of control data. The machine uses a bus system of 8
V level and 26 parallel lines.
ID Chip
Chip on the DX-S image plate on which the

demographic data as well as plate specific
information are stored. It can be easily replaced in
case of defect.
ID Station
IDentification Station
ID Viewer
Software module on CR QS 3.0 to enter

demographic data, which are then transmitted to the
digitizer

Chapter 12 / 4
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
DD+DIS014.05E

Term
Short Description
Infocounter
Software tool that collects information about the

status of the digitizer (installed SW-version, IP
cycles, errors). It is accessible via the Stratus
Service Client
Internet
The global computer network composed of

thousands of Wide Area Networks (WANs) and
Local Area Networks (LANs), that uses TCP/IP to
provide world-wide communication to homes,
schools, businesses, and governments. The World
Wide Web runs on the Internet.
IP
for CR: Image Plate (phosphor plate)
IP
Image Processing
IP
(Internet Protocol) Internet software that divides

data into packets for transmission over the Internet.
Computers must run IP to communicate across the
Internet. See also TCP.
IP Address
(Internet Protocol address) The address of a

computer attached to a TCP/IP network. Every
client and server station must have a unique IP
address. Client workstations have either a
permanent address or one that is dynamically
assigned to them each dial-up session. IP
addresses are written as four sets of numbers
separated by periods; for example, 204.171.64.2.
Java
A programming language designed to generate

applications that can run on all hardware platforms,
small, medium and large, without modification.
Developed by Sun, it has been promoted and
geared heavily for the Web, both for public Web
sites and intranets.
When a Java program runs from a Web page, it is
called Java applet. When it is run on a Web
server, it is called servlet.
Java applet
A short program written in Java that is attached to a

World Wide Web page and executed by the browser
machine.
JavaScript
A popular scripting language that is widely

supported in Web browsers and other Web tools. It
adds interactive functions to HTML pages.
On the client, JavaScript is maintained as source
code embedded into an HTML page. On the server,
it is compiled into bytecode (intermediate language),
similar to Java programs.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 12 / 5
DD+DIS014.05E
Term
Short Description
Jitter
A flicker or fluctuation in a display image. To jitter a

pixel means to place it off side of its normal
placement by some random amount in order to
achieve a more natural antialiasing effect.
LAN
Local Area Network. Network technology, designed

to connect computers over short distances. It is
possible to connect the LAN with the Internet or to
make a configuration into an intranet.
Laser
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of

Radiation
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode; Semi conductor emitting light.
Leeds Phantom
Image Plate to check the technical image quality of

the CR. The Leeds Phantom was developed for
Agfa by the University of Leeds.
LUT
Look Up Table
MODEM
Modulator DEModulator A modem is an analogto-digital and digital-to-analog converter. A modem

dials the line, answers the call and controls
transmission speed via a telephone line to another
computer.
mR
milli Rntgen, measure for x-ray dose

1 mR corres. 8.7 Gy
MCBF
Mean Cycles Between Failure
MTTI
Mean Time To Install
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
MUSICA
Multiple Scale Image Contrast Amplification;

Agfas image processing software
Network location
In a URL, the unique name that identifies an Internet

server. A network location has two or more parts,
separated by periods, as in my.network.location.
Also called host name and Internet address.
NIP
Needle Image Plate

image plate for DX-S providing a very high image
quality
Node
Nodes in the CAN bus system = printed circuit

board within the CAN bus.

Chapter 12 / 6
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
DD+DIS014.05E

Term
Short Description
NX
NX, derived from New eXperience, is a standalone

CR/DR Processing Station for acquisition,
identification, processing and transmission of
digitized images received from a digitizer.
With the NX these images can be prepared for
diagnostic use, sent to a printer, an archive or
diagnostic station or burnt on a CD.
NX is the only supported Processing Station by the
DX-S digitizer.
Offset factor
Every CCD has a so called background noise which

reduces the image quality. In order to reduce this
noise, the offset factor is calculated during the scan
line calibration and applied in every scan cycle.
OLUT
Output Look-Up Table
OS
Operating System
Password
A secret word or code (mostly alphanumeric) used

to serve as a security measure against unauthorized
access to data.
Pixel
Smallest addressable point to be scanned on the

film or plate. A maximum of 2048 per line may be
read by the Photomultiplier.
Preview Monitor
The preview monitor displays the image and the

name of the patient.
This monitor enables to roughly check whether the
exposure was successful.
PS
Processing Station
Quantisation
Compression of image files
RAM
Random Access Memory

volatile main memory of computers
REM Tool
Debugging tool for AOS logfiles
Reset
Machine reset into a defined machine status.

Various checking routines are carried out during a
reset.
RIS
Radiology Information System
ROI
Region Of Interest
ROM
Read Only Memory. A memory chip that

permanently stores instructions and data. Its
contents are created at the time of manufacture and
cannot be altered.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 12 / 7
DD+DIS014.05E
Term
Short Description
RS232 interface
Serial interface which converts computer internal

parallel information into serial bits, and vice versa.
SAL
Scan Average Level
Scan Head
Module in DX-S digitizer, responsible for scanning

the CR image plates. The scan head moves over
the IP, stimulating it via 40 laser diodes.
The emitted light is caught and transmitted by six
CCD elements situated in direct vicinity to the laser
diodes. The scan head moves contactless on air
bearings.
SCP
SOFTCOPY Tool
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface interface to

connect peripherals to computers (e.g. HDD, CDROM)
Server
A computer in a network shared by multiple users.

The term may refer to both the hardware and
software or just the software that performs the
service, e.g. CR QS Server Station.
Service Interface
RS232 standard interface for the connection of the

service PC.
Scan Line Calibration sensitivity calibration; calibration of each pixel in a

line
SHI-Board
Scan Head Integration Board PCB responsible for

communication of all scan head activities
Slow-scan direction
Transport direction of Image Plate through the scan

unit. The stepper motor speed is calculated such
that the distance between two scan lines equals the
distance between two pixels in a line.
Speed Class (SC)
Dose=1mR + SC100 => D=1 above fog + base

A film-screen-system with speed class 100 which is
exposed with a dose of 1mR results in a density 1
above fog+base.
Standard Res
Standard Resolution: pixel size = 150 micrometer
Subnet Number
A part of the internet address which designates a

subnet
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. Internet networking

software that controls the transmission of packets of
data over the Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks
for lost packets, puts the data from multiple packets
into the correct order, and requests that missing or
damaged packets be resent. Computers must run
TCP to communicate with World Wide Web servers.

Chapter 12 / 8
DX-S
Type 5160
11-2006
DD+DIS014.05E

Term
Short Description
TCP/IP
Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.

Common Protocol for Networks. Used in the Internet
Text Field
Part of the film displaying patient, hospital and

image processing information.
Throughput
A value representing the number of image plates, a

digitizer can scan in one hour.
Twain Interface
A programming interface that lets a graphics

application activate a scanner, frame grabber or
other image-capturing device.
Interface on CR QS 3.0 workstation that is
responsible for the communication of CR QS 3.0
and DX-S.
UI
User Interface; part of a computer program that

handles interaction with the user.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply. Backup power used

when the electrical power fails or drops to an
unacceptable voltage level.
A UPS system can be connected to a file server so
that, in the event of a problem, all network users can
be alerted to save files and shut down immediately.
URL
Uniform Resource Locator. The address that

defines the route to a file on the Web or any other
Internet facility. URLs are typed into the browser to
access Web pages, and URLs are embedded within
the pages themselves to provide the hypertext links
to other pages.
UTP - cable
Unshielded Twisted Pair (Network transfer medium)

cable. Cable to connect to a computer network.
W/L
Window and Leveling of digital images.
X-Rite Densitometer
Automatic density measuring instrument

manufactured by X-Rite.

11-2006
DX-S
Type 5160
Chapter 12 / 9
Order Number:
DD+DIS014.05E
Type 5160
nd
2 Edition
DX-S
Type 5160
nd
2 Edition
DX-S
Type 5160
nd
2 Edition
DX-S
Order Number:
DD+DIS014.06E
Order Number:
DD+DIS014.05E

DX-S Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

DX-S Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

HEALTHCARE

Purpose of this Document

add the order list for documentation.

Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a

Document Node ID: 16099429

Copyright 2008 Agfa HealthCare N.V.

Integrating the Order List for Documentation

Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Printing single Pages or Chapters

Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.

Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar

Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

Select the page range.

Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".

Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Printing the complete Service Manual

Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"

Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual

Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Exporting your Comments

Figure 5: Drop down menu Comment & Markup

Select Options - Export Selected Comments.

Save the file with any name.

Select Options - Import Comments.

Browse for the comments file and press select.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

12-2006 printed in Germany

Document Node ID: 11464334

Copyright 2006 Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare

About this Manual

+49 - (0)89 - 6207 3760

+49 - (0)89 - 6207 7388

+49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 3553

+49 - (0)89 - 6207 - 7271

About this Manual

Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures

Repair and Service

Machine specific Safety and Repair Information

Reference and Circuit Diagrams

Spare Parts List

Manufacturing Standard Modifications

Glossary and Keyword Index

About this Manual

Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the

Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user, engineer,

Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be the

Not-safety relevant notes

Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally the

Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to

Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action without

Switch the machine on

Switch the machine on

Action with the mouse or the

Required text input via the

Enter vips and click on

About this Manual

DX-S Service Documentation

Reason for the 2nd Edition:

Features of the NX Processing Station

Acquiring images from the Digitizer